Precast Concrete Beam Design Example LRFD 2002

LRFD Design Example #1:
Prestressed Precast Concrete Beam Bridge Design
Click here for Table of Contents
2202 N. West Shore Blvd., Suite 250 Tampa, FL 33607 (813) 282-2300
LRFD DESIGN EXAMPLE: PRESTRESSED PRECAST CONCRETE BEAM BRIDGE DESIGN
Table of Contents
Section 1: Project Information About this Design Example 1.01 1.02 1.03
General Notes Design Parameters
Cover
Section 2: Superstructure Design Dead Loads 2.01 Live Load Distribution Factors 2.02 Live Load Analysis 2.03 Prestressed Beam Design - Part I 2.04 Prestressed Beam Design - Part II 2.05 Empirical Deck Design 2.06 2.07 2.08 2.09 2.10 2.11
Traditional Deck Design Deck Overhang Design Creep and Shrinkage Parameters Expansion Joint Design Composite Neoprene Bearing Pad Design
Section 3: Substructure Design Dead Loads 3.01 Pier Cap Live Load Analysis 3.02 Pier Cap Design Loads 3.03 Pier Cap Design 3.04 Pier Column Live Load Analysis 3.05 Pier Column Design Loads 3.06 Pier Column Design 3.07 Pier Foundation Design Loads 3.08 Pier Pile Vertical Load Design 3.09 Pier Footing Design 3.10 End Bent Cap Live Load Analysis 3.11 End Bent Cap Design Loads 3.12 End Bent Cap Design 3.13 End Bent Pile Vertical Load Design 3.14 End Bent Backwall Design 3.15
(similar to Section 3.4) (similar to Section 3.9)
LRFD Design Example
Table of Contents
SUPERSTRUCTURE DESIGN
About this Design Example
Description
This document provides guidance for the design of a precast, prestressed beam bridge utilizing the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. The example includes the following component designs: Empirical deck design Traditional deck design Prestressed beam design Composite Neoprene bearing pad design Multi-column pier design End bent design
The following assumptions have been incorporated in the example: Two simple spans @ 90'-0" each, 30 degree skew. Minor horizontal curvature Multi-column pier on prestressed concrete piles. No phased construction. Two traffic railing barriers and one median barrier. No sidewalks. Permit vehicles are not considered. Design for jacking is not considered. Load rating is not addressed.
Since this example is presented in a Mathcad document, a user can alter assumptions, constants, or equations to create a customized application.
PROJECT INFORMATION
1.01 About this Design Example
Standards
The example utilizes the following design standards: Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (2000 edition) and applicable modifications. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, 2nd Edition, 2002 Interims. Florida Department of Transportation Structures LRFD Design Guidelines, January 2003 Edition. Florida Department of Transportation Structures Detailing Manual for LRFD, 1999 Edition.
Defined Units
All calculations in this electronic book use U.S. customary units. The user can take advantage of Mathcad's unit conversion capabilities to solve problems in MKS or CGS units. Although Mathcad has several built-in units, some common structural engineering units must be defined. For example, a lbf is a built-in Mathcad unit, but a kip or ton is not. Therefore, a kip and ton are globally defined as:
kip 1000 lbf ton 2000 lbf
Definitions for some common structural engineering units:

N newton plf pcf lbf ft lbf ft klf ksi
3
kN 1000 newton psf psi lbf ft

2
lbf in
2
kip ft kip in
2 6
ksf
kip ft
2
F 1deg
MPa 1 10 Pa
GPa 1 10 Pa
Acknowlegements
The Tampa office of HDR Engineering, Inc. prepared this document for the Florida Department of Transportation.
Notice
The materials in this document are only for general information purposes. This document is not a substitute for competent professional assistance. Anyone using this material does so at his or her own risk and assumes any resulting liability.
PROJECT INFORMATION
1.01 About this Design Example
PROJECT INFORMATION
General Notes
Design Method................. Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) except that the Prestressed Beams
and Prestressed Piles have been designed for Service Load.
Design Loading................. HL-93 Truck Future Wearing Surface... Design provides allowance for 15 psf Earthquake........................ Seismic acceleration coefficient in Florida varies from 1% to 3.75%
or Seismic provisions for minimum bridge support length only, SDG 2.3.
Concrete............................ Class
II II (Bridge Deck) IV V (Special) V
Minimum 28-day Compressive Strength (psi) Location f`c = 3400 Traffic Barriers f`c = 4500 CIP Bridge Deck f`c = 5500 CIP Substructure f`c = 6000 Concrete Piling f`c = 6500 Prestressed Beams
Environment...................... The superstructure is classified as slightly aggressive.

The substructure is classfied as moderately aggressive.
Reinforcing Steel.............. ASTM A615, Grade 60 Concrete Cover................. Superstructure

Top deck surfaces All other surfaces Substructure External surfaces exposed External surfaces cast against earth Prestressed Piling Top of Girder Pedestals 2" (Short bridge) 2" 3" 4" 3" 2"
Concrete cover does not include reinforcement placement or fabrication tolerances, unless shown as "minimum cover". See FDOT Standard Specifications for allowable reinforcement placement tolerances.
Distribution Values........... Item

Live Load (**/beam) Traffic Railing (plf) Wearing Surface (plf) Utilities (plf) Stay-In-Place Metal Forms (plf)
Interior Beams * * * * *
Exterior Beams * * * * *
Dimensions........................ All dimensions are in feet or inches, except as noted. Stay-in-Place Metal The design includes an allowance of 20 psf for the unit weight of metal forms Forms................................ and concrete required to fill the form flutes. The allowance is distributed over
the project plan area of the metal forms. Stay-in-place concrete forms will not be permitted.
PROJECT INFORMATION
1.02 General Notes
PROJECT INFORMATION
Design Parameters
Description
This section provides the design input parameters necessary for the superstructure and substructure design.
Page
5
Contents
A. General Criteria A1. Bridge Geometry A2. Number of Lanes A3. Concrete, Reinforcing and Prestressing Steel Properties
B. LRFD Criteria B1. Dynamic Load Allowance [LRFD 3.6.2] B2. Resistance Factors [LRFD 5.5.4.2] B3. Limit States [LRFD 1.3.2]
11
C. Florida Criteria C1. Chapter 1 - General requirements C2. Chapter 2 - Loads and Load Factors C3. Chapter 4 - Superstructure Concrete C4. Chapter 6 - Superstructure Components C5. Miscellaneous
19
D. Substructure D1. End Bent Geometry D2. Pier Geometry D3. Footing Geometry D4. Pile Geometry D5. Approach Slab Geometry D6. Soil Properties
PROJECT INFORMATION
1.03 Design Parameters
A. General Criteria
This section provides the general layout and input parameters for the bridge example.
A1. Bridge Geometry

Horizontal Profile A slight horizontal curvature is shown in the plan view. This curvature is used to illustrate centrifugal forces in the substructure design. For all other component designs, the horizontal curvature will be taken as zero.
PROJECT INFORMATION
In addition, the bridge is also on a skew which is defined as: Skew angle....................
Skew := 30deg
Vertical Profile
Overall bridge length............. Bridge design span length......
Lbridge 180 ft Lspan := 90 ft
PROJECT INFORMATION
Typical Cross-secton
Superstructure Beam Type

( "II" "III" "IV" "V" "VI" ). BeamType := "IV" N beams := 11 BeamSpacing := 8 ft
Number of beams................. Beam Spacing...................... Deck overhang at End Bent and Pier............................... Average buildup................... Diaphragm Thickness...........
Overhang := 4ft + 6.5in hbuildup := 1in t diap := 9 in
A2. Number of Lanes

Design Lanes Current lane configurations show two striped lanes per roadway with a traffic median barrier separating the roadways. Using the roadway clear width between barriers, Rdwywidth , the number of design traffic lanes per roadway, N lanes , can be calculated as: Roadway clear width............ Number of design traffic lanes per roadway.........................
N lanes = 3 Rdwywidth := 42 ft N lanes := floor
Rdwywidth 12 ft
PROJECT INFORMATION
Substructure Design In order to maximize the design loads of the substructure components, e.g. pier cap negative moment, pier columns, footing loads, etc., HL-93 vehicle loads were placed on the deck. In some cases, the placement of the loads ignored the location of the median traffic barrier. This assumption is considered to be conservative. Braking forces The bridge is NOT expected to become one-directional in the future. Future widening is expected to occur to the outside if additional capacity is needed. Therefore, for braking force calculations, N lanes = 3 . The designer utilized engineering judgement to ignore the location of the median barrier for live load placement for the substructure design and NOT ignore the median barrier for braking forces. The designer feels that the probability exists that the combination of lanes loaded on either side of the median barrier exists. However, this same approach was not used for the braking forces since these loaded lanes at either side of the median traffic barrier will NOT be braking in the same direction.
A3. Concrete, Reinforcing and Prestressing Steel Properties

Unit weight of concrete......... Modulus of elasticity for reinforcing steel................... Ultimate tensile strength for prestressing tendon............... Modulus of elasticity for prestressing tendon...............
conc := 150 pcf Es := 29000 ksi fpu := 270 ksi Ep := 28500 ksi
PROJECT INFORMATION
B. LRFD Criteria
The bridge components are designed in accordance with the following LRFD design criteria:
B1. Dynamic Load Allowance [LRFD 3.6.2]

An impact factor will be applied to the static load of the design truck or tandem, except for centrifugal and braking forces. Impact factor for fatigue and fracture limit states............... Impact factor for all other limit states..................................
IMfatigue := 1 + 33 100 15 100
IM := 1 +
B2. Resistance Factors [LRFD 5.5.4.2]

Flexure and tension of reinforced concrete.............. Flexure and tension of prestressed concrete............. Shear and torsion of normal weight concrete...................
:= 0.9 ' := 1.00 v := 0.90
B3. Limit States [LRFD 1.3.2]

The LRFD defines a limit state as a condition beyond which the bridge or component ceases to satisfy the provisions for which it was designed. There are four limit states prescribed by LRFD. These are as follows:
STRENGTH LIMIT STATE Load combinations which ensures that strength and stability, both local and global, are provided to resist the specified load combinations that a bridge is expected to experience in its design life. Extensive distress and structural damage may occur under strength limit state, but overall structural integrity is expected to be maintained. EXTREME EVENT LIMIT STATES Load combinations which ensure the structural survival of a bridge during a major earthquake or flood, or when collided by a vessel, vehicle, or ice flow, possibly under scoured conditions. Extreme event limit states are considered to be unique occurrences whose return period may be significantly greater than the design life of the bridge. SERVICE LIMIT STATE Load combinations which place restrictions on stress, deformation, and crack width under regular service conditions.
FATIGUE LIMIT STATE Load combinations which place restrictions on stress range as a result of a single design truck. It is
PROJECT INFORMATION 1.03 Design Parameters 9
Load combinations which place restrictions on stress range as a result of a single design truck. It is intended to limit crack growth under repetitive loads during the design life of the bridge. Table 3.4.1-1 - Load Combinations and Load Factors
Load Combination DC DD DW
EH EV ES yp yp yp yp 1.5 yp yp yp 1.00
LL IM CE
BR PL LS 1.75 1.35 -
WA
WS
WL
FR
TU CR SH
TG
SE
Use One of These at a Time
Limit State
EQ
IC
CT
CV
Strength I Strength II Strength III Strength IV EH, EV, ES, DW, and DC ONLY Strength V Extreme Event I Extreme Event II Service I
1.00 1.00 1.00
1.40
1.00 1.00 1.00
0.50/1.20 0.50/1.20 0.50/1.20
yTG yTG yTG
ySE ySE ySE
1.00
1.00
0.50/1.20
1.35 yEQ 0.50 1.00
1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
0.40 0.30
0.40 1.00
1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
0.50/1.20 1.00/1.20
yTG
ySE -
1.00 -
1.00 -
1.00 -
1.00 -
yTG
ySE
Table 3.4.1-2 - Load factors for permanent loads, yp
PROJECT INFORMATION
10
C. FDOT Criteria
C1. Chapter 1 - General Requirements
General [SDG 1.1] The design life for bridge structures is 75 years. Approach slabs are considered superstructure component. Class II Concrete (Bridge Deck) will be used for all environmental classifications. Criteria for Deflection and Span-to-Depth Ratios [SDG 1.2] This provision is not applicable, since no pedestrian loading is applied in this bridge design example. Concrete and Environment [SDG 1.3] The concrete cover for the deck is based on either the environmental classification [SDG 1.4] or the type of bridge [SDG 4.2.1]. Concrete cover for the deck..
cover deck = 2 in cover deck := 2 in if Lbridge < 300ft 2.5 in otherwise
Concrete cover for substructure not in contact with water...........................

cover sub = 3 in
cover sub :=
4 in if Environmentsub = "Extremely" 3 in otherwise
Concrete cover for substructure in contact with water..................................

cover sub.earth = 4 in
cover sub.earth :=
4.5 in if Environmentsub = "Extremely" 4 in otherwise
Minimum 28-day compressive strength of concrete components.........................
Class II (Bridge Deck) CIP Bridge Deck Approach Slabs IV V (Special) V CIP Substructure Concrete Piling Prestressed Beams
Location
fc.slab := 4.5 ksi fc.sub := 5.5 ksi fc.pile := 6.0 ksi fc.beam := 6.5 ksi
PROJECT INFORMATION
11
Environmental Classifications [SDG 1.4] The environment can be classified as either "Slightly" , "Moderately" or "Extremely" agressive. Environmental classification for superstructure................ Environmental classification for substructure...................
Environmentsuper "Slightly"
Environmentsub "Moderately"
C2. Chapter 2 - Loads and Load Factors

Dead loads [SDG 2.2] Weight of future wearing surface...............................
fws = 15 psf fws := 15 psf if Lbridge < 300ft 0 psf otherwise
Weight of sacrificial milling surface, using t mill = 0 in.......

mill = 0 psf
mill := t mill conc
(Note : See Sect. C3 [SDG 4.2] for calculation of t mill ).
Seismic Provisions [SDG 2.3] Seismic provisions for minimum bridge support length only. Wind Loads [SDG 2.4] The LRFD wind pressures should be increased by 20% for bridges located in Palm Beach, Broward, Dade, and Monroe counties..................
FDOT := 1.20
Miscellaneous Loads [SDG 2.5]

ITEM UNIT LOAD Traffic Railing Barrier (32 F-Shape) Lb / ft 421 Traffic Railing Median Barrier, (32 F- Shape) Lb / ft 486 Traffic Railing Barrier (42 Vertical Shape) Lb / ft 587 Traffic Railing Barrier (32 Vertical Shape) Lb / ft 385 Traffic Railing Barrier (42 F-Shape) Lb / ft 624 Traffic Railing Barrier / Soundwall (Bridge) Lb / ft 1008 Concrete, Structural Lb / ft 3 150 Future Wearing Surface Lb / ft 2 15 * Soil, Compacted Lb / ft 3 115 Stay-in-Place Metal Forms Lb / ft 2 20 ** * The Future Wearing Surface allowance applies only to minor widenings or short bridges as defined in SDG Chapter 7. ** Unit load of metal forms and concrete required to fill the form flutes to be applied over the projected plan area of the metal forms
PROJECT INFORMATION
12
Weight of traffic railing barrier................................. Weight of traffic railing median barrier.................................
wbarrier := 421 plf
wmedian.bar := 486 plf soil := 115 pcf
Weight of compacted soil...... Weight of stay-in-place metal forms..................................
forms := 20 psf
Barrier / Railing Distribution for Beam-Slab Bridges [SDG 2.8] SDG equations for dead load of barriers applied to the exterior beams.....................
W C1 C2 100
2 ( 10 K) + 39 3 S ( 3 K 8 ) +
wext =
C1 = 0.257
1.4
C2 = 2.2 0.335
L L + 0.0279 0.000793 10 10 10
Maximum number of beams in a span..............................

K = 10
K := if N beams > 10 , 10 , N beams
Applying the SDG equations to this design example, the following values are calculated............................
C1 = 55.1
C1 := 0.257
BeamSpacing 3 (10 K) 2 + 39 + ( 3 K 8 ) ft 1.4

2 3
...and..................................
C2 = 0.867
Lspan Lspan Lspan C2 := 2.2 0.335 + 0.0279 0.000793 10 ft 10 ft 10 ft

wbarrier C1 C2 100
Dead load of barriers applied to the exterior beams............

wbarrier.exterior = 0.201 klf
wbarrier.exterior :=
Dead load of barriers applied to the interior beams.............

wbarrier.interior = 0.055 ft kip
wbarrier.interior :=
2 wbarrier wbarrier.exterior ( K 2)
PROJECT INFORMATION
13
Median traffic barrier For purposes of this design example, the median traffic barrier will be equally distributed amongst all the beams comprising the superstructure. Include the dead load of the median traffic barrier on the design load of the exterior beams.................................
wbarrier.exterior := wbarrier.exterior +
wmedian.bar N beams
Include the dead load of the median traffic barrier on the design load of the interior beams.................................
wbarrier.interior = 0.099 klf
wbarrier.interior := wbarrier.interior +
wmedian.bar N beams
C3. Chapter 4 - Superstructure Concrete

General [SDG 4.1] Correction factor for Florida limerock coarse aggregate..... Unit Weight of Florida limerock concrete................. Modulus of elasticity for slab.....................................
Ec.slab = 3475 ksi limerock := 0.9 wc.limerock := 145 pcf
Ec.slab := limerock 1820 fc.slab ksi
) )
Modulus of elasticity for beam..................................

Ec.beam = 4176 ksi
Ec.beam := limerock 1820 fc.beam ksi
Modulus of elasticity for substructure........................

Ec.sub = 3841 ksi
Ec.sub := limerock 1820 fc.sub ksi
) )
Modulus of elasticity for piles....................................

Ec.pile = 4012 ksi
Ec.pile := limerock 1820 fc.pile ksi
Yield strength of reinforcing steel....................................
fy := 60 ksi
Note: Epoxy coated reinforcing not allowed on FDOT projects.
PROJECT INFORMATION
14
Concrete Deck Slabs [SDG 4.2] Bridge length definition.........

BridgeType = "Short" BridgeType := "Short" if Lbridge < 300ft "Long" otherwise
Thickness of sacrificial milling surface................................

t mill = 0 in
t mill
0 in if Lbridge < 300ft 0.5 in otherwise
Deck thickness.................... Deck Slab Design [SDG 4.2.4]
t slab 8.0 in
The empirical or traditional design method is used to design the deck slab for the service, fatigue, fracture, and strength limit states. The empirical design method may be used if the deck overhang is less than 6 feet. Otherwise, the traditional design method shall be used.
SlabOverhang max := "May use empirical design" if Overhang 6ft "Shall use traditional design" otherwise SlabOverhang max = "May use empirical design"
The deck overhang shall be designed using the traditional design method. The deck overhangs are designed for three limit state conditions: (1) Extreme event limit state - Transverse and longitudinal vehicular collision forces. (2) Extreme event limit state - Vertical collision forces (3) Strength limit state - Equivalent line load, DL + LL The deck slab at the median barrier shall be designed using the traditional design method. For the extreme event limit states, a minimum area of steel of 0.40 in per foot should be provided in the top of the deck slab. The summation of the area of steel for the top and bottom of the deck slab should provide a minimum of 0.80 in per foot. Prestressed, Pretensioned Components [SDG 4.3] Minimum compressive concrete strength at release is the greater of 4.0 ksi or 0.6 fc...............................
fci.beam.min = 4 ksi (Note : Compression = +, Tension = -)
2 2
fci.beam.min := max 4.0 ksi , 0.6 fc.beam
Maximum compressive concrete strength is 0.8 fc...

fci.beam.max = 5.2 ksi
fci.beam.max := 0.8 fc.beam
PROJECT INFORMATION
15
Any value between the minimum and maximum may be selected for the design. Minimum compressive concrete strength at release....
fci.beam = 4 ksi fci.beam := fci.beam.min
Corresponding modulus of elasticity..............................

Eci.beam = 3276 ksi
Eci.beam := limerock 1820 fci.beam ksi
Limits for tension in top of beam at release (straight strand only) Outer 15 percent of design beam.............................
ftop.outer15 := 12 fci.beam psi ftop.outer15 = 0.76 ksi
Center 70 percent of design beam...................
ftop.center70 := 6 fci.beam psi ftop.center70 = 0.38 ksi
Time-dependent variables for creep and shrinkage calculations Relative humidity............ Age (days) of concrete when load is applied........ Age (days) of concrete when section becomes composite..................... Age (days) of concrete used to determine long term losses....................
H := 75 T0 := 1
T1 := 120
T2 := 10000
C4. Chapter 6 - Superstructure Components

Temperature Movement [SDG 6.3]
Structural Material of Superstructure Concrete Only Concrete Deck on Steel Girder Steel Only Temperature (Degrees Fahrenheit) High Low 95 45 110 30 120 30
Mean 70 70 70
Range 50 80 90
PROJECT INFORMATION
16
The temperature values for "Concrete Only" in the preceding table apply to this example. Temperature mean......... Temperature high........... Temperature low............ Temperature rise............
t mean := 70 F t high := 95 F t low := 45 F t rise := thigh tmean t rise = 25 F
Temperature fall.............
t fall := t mean t low t fall = 25 F
Coefficient of thermal expansion [LRFD 5.4.2.2] for normal weight concrete.........
t :=
6 10
Expansion Joints [SDG 6.4]

Joint Type
Poured Rubber Silicone Seal Strip Seal Modular Joint Finger Joint
Maximum Joint Width *

2 3 Unlimited Unlimited
*Joints in sidewalks must meet all requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act.
For new construction, use only the joint types listed in the preceding table. A typical joint for most prestressed beam bridges is the silicone seal. Maximum joint width...... Minimum joint width at 70o F............................ Proposed joint width at 70o F............................
Wmax := 2 in 5 Wmin := in 8 W := 1 in
PROJECT INFORMATION
17
Movement [6.4.2] For prestressed concrete structures, the movement is based on the greater of the following combinations: Movement from the combination of temperature fall, creep, and shrinkage.................
xfall = xtemperature.fall ... + xcreep.shrinkage
(Note : A temperature rise with creep and shrinkage is not investigated since they have opposite effects).
Movement from factored effects of temperature.....
xrise = 1.15 xtemperature.rise xfall = 1.15 xtemperature.fall
(Note : For concrete structures, the temperature rise and fall ranges are the same.
C5. Miscellaneous
Beam Parameters Distance from centerline pier (FFBW) to centerline bearing. Distance from end of beam to centerline of bearing.......... Beam length.........................
Lbeam = 89.167 ft K := 11 in
(Note : Sometimes the "K" value at the end bent and pier may differ).
J := 6 in Lbeam := Lspan 2 ( K J)
Beam design length...............

Ldesign = 88.167 ft
Ldesign := Lspan 2 K
PROJECT INFORMATION
18
D. Substructure
D1. End Bent Geometry
(Note : End bent back wall not shown)
Depth of end bent cap........... Width of end bent cap........... Length of end bent cap.......... Height of back wall............... Backwall design width........... Thickness of back wall..........
hEB := 2.5ft b EB := 3.5 ft LEB := 101.614 ft hBW := 5 ft LBW := 1 ft t BW := 12 in
D2. Pier Geometry
Depth of pier cap................. Width of pier cap................. Length of pier cap................ Height of pier column........... Column diameter.................. Number of columns............. Surcharge on top of footing...
hCap := 4.5 ft b Cap := 4.5 ft LCap := 101.614 ft hCol := 14.0 ft b Col := 4.0 ft nCol := 4 hSurcharge := 2.0 ft
PROJECT INFORMATION
19
D3. Footing Geometry
Depth of footing.................. Width of footing................... Length of footing..................
hFtg := 4.0 ft b Ftg := 7.5 ft LFtg := 7.5 ft
D4. Pile Geometry

Pile Embedment Depth.......... Pile Size..............................
Pileembed := 12 in Pilesize := 18 in
D5. Approach Slab Geometry

Approach slab thickness....... Approach slab length............
t ApprSlab := 13.5 in LApprSlab := 34.75 ft (Note : The min. approach slab dimension due to the 30 ft = 34.64 ft ). skew is cos( Skew)
D6. Soil Properties

Unit weight of soil................
soil = 115 pcf
Defined Units
PROJECT INFORMATION
20
Dead Loads
Reference
Reference:F:\HDRDesignExamples\Ex1_PCBeam\103DsnPar.mcd(R)
Description
This section provides the dead loads for design of the bridge components.
Page
22
Contents
A. Non-Composite Section Properties A1. Summary of the properties for the selected beam type A2. Effective Flange Width [LRFD 4.6.2.6]
24
B. Composite Section Properties B1. Interior beams B2. Exterior beams B3. Summary of Properties
27
C. Dead Loads C1. Interior Beams C2. Exterior Beams C3. Summary
Superstructure Design
2.01 Dead Loads
21
A. Non-Composite Section Properties

A1. Summary of Properties for the Selected Beam Type
The non-composite beam properties are given and can be obtained from any engineering textbook/publication.
NON-COMPOSITE PROPERTIES Moment of Inertia Section Area ytop ybot Depth Top flange w idth Top flange depth Width of web Bottom flange width Bottom flange depth Bottom flange taper Section Modulus top Section Modulus bottom [in 4] [in 2] [in] [in] [in] [in] [in] [in] [in] [in] [in] [in 3] [in 3] Inc Anc ytnc ybnc h nc btf htf bw b bf h bf E Stnc Sbnc IV 260741 789 29.27 24.73 54 20 8 8 26 8 9 8908 10544
BeamType = "IV"
0
27
54
13
26
A2. Effective Flange Width [LRFD 4.6.2.6]

Interior beams The effective flange width is selected from the minimum of the following three calculations: One-quarter of the effective span length...
Slabwidth = 270.0 in 0 Slabwidth := 0 Lspan 4
12.0 times the average thickness of the slab, plus the greater of web thickness or one-half the width of the top flange of the beam.....................................................
Slabwidth = 106.0 in 1
b tf Slabwidth := 12 t slab + max b w , 1 2 Slabwidth := BeamSpacing 2
The average spacing of adjacent beams.....

Slabwidth = 96.0 in 2
Effective flange width for interior beams...

b eff.interior = 96.0 in
b eff.interior := min Slabwidth
Exterior beams
For exterior beams, the effective flange width may be taken as one-half the effective width of the adjacent interior beam, plus the least of:
2.01 Dead Loads
22
One-eighth of the effective span length..... Slabwidth = 135.0 in 0 6.0 times the average thickness of the slab, plus the greater of half the web thickness or one-quarter of the width of the top flange of the basic girder................... Slabwidth = 53.0 in 1 The width of the overhang........................ Slabwidth = 54.5 in 2
Slabwidth := 0
Lspan 8
b w btf Slabwidth := 6 t slab + max , 1 2 4

Slabwidth := Overhang 2 b eff.interior 2
Effective flange width for exterior beams..

b eff.exterior = 101.0 in
b eff.exterior :=
+ min Slabwidth
Transformed Properties To develop composite section properties, the effective flange width of the slab should be transformed to the concrete properties of the beam. Modular ratio between the deck and beam.
n = 0.832 n := Ec.slab Ec.beam
Transformed slab width for interior beams

b tr.interior = 79.9 in
b tr.interior := n beff.interior
) )
Transformed slab width for exterior beams

b tr.exterior = 84.0 in
b tr.exterior := n b eff.exterior
2.01 Dead Loads
23
B. Composite Section Properties

B1. Interior beams
Height of the composite section.....................
h = 63.0 in h := hnc + hbuildup + t slab
Area of the composite section........................

Aslab = 639.0 in Afillet = 20.0 in
2
Aslab := b tr.interior tslab Afillet := b tf hbuildup AInterior := Anc + Afillet + Aslab
2 2
AInterior = 1448.0 in
Distance from centroid of beam to extreme fiber in tension

Anc ybnc + Afillet hnc +
yb :=
hbuildup 2
tslab + Aslab hnc + hbuildup + 2
AInterior
yb = 40.3 in
Distance from centroid of beam to extreme fiber in compression.....................................

yt = 22.7 in
yt := h yb
Moment of Inertia........................................
Islab = 227710 in Ifillet = 4055 in
4 4 4
2 t slab Islab := (b h yb ) t + Aslab 12 tr.interior slab 2
Ifillet :=
( btf) hbuildup3
12
2 hbuildup + Afillet hnc + yb 2
IInterior = 682912 in
IInterior := Inc + Anc yb ybnc IInterior yt
) 2 + Islab + Ifillet
Section Modulus (top, top of beam, bottom)...

St = 30037 in
3 3
St :=
Stb = 49719 in Sb = 16961 in
IInterior Stb := hnc yb Sb := IInterior yb
2.01 Dead Loads
24
B2. Exterior beams

Calculations are similar to interior beams. Height of the composite section.....................
h = 63.0 in h := hnc + hbuildup + t slab
Area of the composite section........................

Aslab = 672.3 in Afillet = 20.0 in
2
Aslab := b tr.exterior t slab Afillet := b tf hbuildup
2 2
AExterior = 1481.3 in
AExterior := Anc + Afillet + Aslab
Distance from centroid of beam to extreme fiber in tension

Anc ybnc + Afillet hnc +
y'b :=
hbuildup 2
t slab + Aslab hnc + hbuildup + 2
AExterior
y'b = 40.7 in
Distance from centroid of beam to extreme fiber in compression.....................................

y't = 22.3 in
y't := h y'b
Moment of Inertia........................................
Islab = 229085 in Ifillet = 3818 in
4 4 4
2 tslab Islab := (b h y'b ) t + Aslab 12 tr.exterior slab 2
Ifillet :=
( btf) hbuildup3
12
2 hbuildup + Afillet hnc + y'b 2
IExterior = 694509 in
IExterior := Inc + Anc y'b ybnc IExterior y't
) 2 + Islab + Ifillet
Section Modulus (top, top of beam, bottom)...

St = 31124 in
3 3
St :=
Stb = 52162 in Sb = 17070 in
IExterior Stb := hnc y'b Sb := IExterior y'b
2.01 Dead Loads
25
B3. Summary of Properties

0
31.5
63
48
96
COM POSITE SECTION PROPERTIES Effective slab w idth Transformed slab width Height of composite section Effective slab area Area of composite section Neutral axis to bottom fiber Neutral axis to top fiber Inertia of composite section Section modulus top of slab Section modulus top of beam Section modulus bottom of beam
[in] b eff.interior/exterior [in] b tr.interior/exterior [in] h [in 2] Aslab [in 2] AInterior/Exterior [in] yb [in] yt [in 4] IInterior/Exterior [in 3] St [in 3] Stb [in 3] Sb
INTERIOR 96.0 79.9 63.0 639.0 1448.0 40.3 22.7 682912.0 30037.5 49719.4 16960.6
EXTERIOR 101.0 84.0 63.0 672.3 1481.3 40.7 22.7 694509.4 31123.9 52162.4 17070.1
2.01 Dead Loads
26
C. Dead Loads
Calculate the moments and shears as a function of "x", where "x" represents any point along the length of the beam from 0 feet to Ldesign. The values for the moment and shear at key design check points are given... where
Support := 0 ft ShearChk := 0.72 h Debond1 := 8 ft Debond2 := 16 ft Midspan := 0.5 Ldesign {Check beam for debonding, if not debonding, enter 0 ft.) (Check beam for debonding, if not debonding, enter 0 ft.)
For convenience in MathCad, place these points in a matrix.........................................
Support ShearChk x := Debond1 Debond2 Midspan
pt := 0 .. 4
C1. Interior Beams

Design Moments and Shears for DC Dead Loads Weight of beam
wBeamInt := Anc conc wBeamInt = 0.82 klf
Moment - self-weight of beam at Release..
M RelBeamInt( x) := M BeamInt( x) := V BeamInt( x) :=
wBeamInt Lbeam 2
wBeamInt x 2
2
Moment - self-weight of beam.................
wBeamInt Ldesign 2 wBeamInt Ldesign 2
wBeamInt x 2
Shear - self-weight of beam ...................
wBeamInt x
Weight of deck slab, includes haunch and milling surface

wSlabInt :=
( tslab + tmill) BeamSpacing + hbuildup b tf conc
wSlabInt = 0.82 klf
Moment - self-weight of deck slab, includes haunch and milling surface ..................... Shear - self-weight of deck slab, includes haunch and milling surface......................
M SlabInt( x) :=
wSlabInt Ldesign 2 wSlabInt Ldesign 2
wSlabInt x 2
V SlabInt( x) :=
wSlabInt x
2.01 Dead Loads
27
Shear from weight of diaphragms

PDiaphInt( x) :=
(BeamSpacing hnc Anc) hbf ( BeamSpacing b bf ) t diap conc if(x = 0ft , 1 , 0 )

wFormsInt := BeamSpacing b tf forms
Weight of stay-in-place forms

wFormsInt = 0.13 klf
Moment - stay-in-place forms..................
M FormsInt( x) := V FormsInt( x) :=
wFormsInt Ldesign 2 wFormsInt Ldesign 2
wFormsInt x 2
Shear - stay-in-place forms. ....................
wFormsInt x
Weight of traffic railing barriers

wbarrier.interior = 0.099 klf
2
Moment - traffic railing barriers...............
M TrbInt( x) := V TrbInt( x) :=
wbarrier.interior Ldesign 2 wbarrier.interior Ldesign 2
wbarrier.interior x 2
Shear - traffic railing barriers...................
wbarrier.interior x
DC Load total
wDC.BeamInt := wBeamInt + wSlabInt + wFormsInt + wbarrier.interior wDC.BeamInt = 1.87 klf
DC Load Moment
M DC.BeamInt( x) := M BeamInt( x) + M SlabInt( x) + MFormsInt( x) + MTrbInt( x)
DC Load Shear
V DC.BeamInt( x) := V BeamInt( x) + V SlabInt( x) + V FormsInt( x) + V TrbInt( x) + PDiaphInt( x)
Design Moments and Shears for DW Dead Loads

wFwsInt := BeamSpacing fws
Weight of future wearing surface

wFwsInt = 0.12 klf
2.01 Dead Loads
28
Moment - weight of future wearing surface................................................. Shear - weight of future wearing surface .
M FwsInt( x) :=
wFwsInt Ldesign 2 wFwsInt Ldesign 2
wFwsInt x 2
V FwsInt( x) :=
wFwsInt x
Weight of utility loads

wUtilityInt = 0.00 klf
wUtilityInt := 0 klf wUtilityInt Ldesign 2 wUtilityInt Ldesign 2 wUtilityInt x 2

2
Moment - utility loads.............................
M UtilityInt( x) := V UtilityInt( x) :=
Shear - utility loads.................................
wUtilityInt x
DW Load total
wDW.BeamInt := wFwsInt + wUtilityInt wDW.BeamInt = 0.12 klf
DW Load Moment
M DW.BeamInt( x) := MFwsInt ( x) + MUtilityInt( x)
DW Load Shear
V DW.BeamInt( x) := V FwsInt( x) + V UtilityInt( x)
C2. Exterior Beams

Design Moments and Shears for DC Dead Loads Weight of beam
wBeamExt := Anc conc wBeamExt = 0.82 klf
Moment - self-weight of beam at Release..
M RelBeamExt( x) :=
wBeamExt Lbeam 2
wBeamExt x 2
2
Moment - self-weight of beam.................
M BeamExt( x) :=
wBeamExt Ldesign 2 wBeamExt Ldesign 2
wBeamExt x 2
Shear - self-weight of beam ...................
V BeamExt( x) :=
wBeamExt x
2.01 Dead Loads
29
Weight of deck slab, includes haunch and milling surface

wSlabExt := BeamSpacing t ( slab + t mill) Overhang + + hbuildup b tf conc 2
wSlabExt = 0.87 klf
Moment - self-weight of deck slab, includes haunch and milling surface ..................... Shear - self-weight of deck slab, includes haunch and milling surface......................
M SlabExt( x) :=
wSlabExt Ldesign 2 wSlabExt Ldesign 2
wSlabExt x 2
V SlabExt( x) :=
wSlabExt x
Shear from weight of diaphragms
PDiaphExt( x) :=
PDiaphInt( x) 2
Weight of stay-in-place forms

wFormsExt = 0.06 klf
wFormsExt :=
BeamSpacing b tf forms 2
wFormsExt Ldesign 2 wFormsExt Ldesign 2 wFormsExt x 2
2
Moment - stay-in-place forms..................
M FormsExt( x) := V FormsExt( x) :=
Shear - stay-in-place forms. ....................
wFormsExt x
Weight of traffic railing barriers

Moment - traffic railing barriers...............
M TrbExt( x) := V TrbExt( x) :=
wbarrier.exterior Ldesign 2 wbarrier.exterior Ldesign 2
wbarrier.exterior x 2
Shear - traffic railing barriers...................
wbarrier.exterior x
DC Load total
wDC.BeamExt := wBeamExt + wSlabExt + wFormsExt + wbarrier.exterior wDC.BeamExt = 2.01 klf
2.01 Dead Loads
30
DC Load Moment
M DC.BeamExt( x) := MBeamExt( x) + M SlabExt( x) + MFormsExt( x) + MTrbExt( x)
DC Load Shear
V DC.BeamExt( x) := V BeamExt( x) + V SlabExt( x) + V FormsExt( x) + V TrbExt( x) + PDiaphExt( x)
Design Moments and Shears for DW Dead Loads Weight of future wearing surface
kip wFwsExt = 0.10 ft wFwsExt := Overhang 1.5417 ft +
BeamSpacing 2
fws
Moment - weight of future wearing surface.................................................
M FwsExt( x) :=
wFwsExt Ldesign 2 wFwsExt Ldesign 2
wFwsExt x 2
Shear - weight of future wearing surface .
V FwsExt( x) :=
wFwsExt x
Weight of utility loads

wUtilityExt = 0.00 klf
wUtilityExt := 0 klf wUtilityExt Ldesign 2 wUtilityExt Ldesign 2 wUtilityExt x 2

2
Moment - utility loads.............................
M UtilityExt( x) := V UtilityExt( x) :=
Shear - utility loads.................................
wUtilityExt x
DW Load total
wDW.BeamExt := wFwsExt + wUtilityExt wDW.BeamExt = 0.10 klf
DW Load Moment
M DW.BeamExt( x) := M FwsExt( x) + MUtilityExt( x)
DW Load Shear
V DW.BeamExt( x) := V FwsExt( x) + V UtilityExt( x)
2.01 Dead Loads
31
C3. Summary
Load/Location, x (ft)= Support 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
DESIGN MOMENTS (ft-kip) ShrChk Debond1 Debond2 3.8 8.0 16.0 132.6 131.1 130.9 20.2 15.8 298.0 19.1 0.0 19.1 266.8 263.5 263.2 40.6 31.8 599.2 38.5 0.0 38.5 481.1 474.5 473.9 73.1 57.2 1078.8 69.3 0.0 69.3
Midspan 44.1 816.7 798.6 797.6 123.1 96.3 1815.6 116.6 0.0 116.6
INTERIOR BEAM Beam at Release Beam Slab Forms Barrier TOTAL DC FWS Utilities TOTAL DW EXTERIOR BEAM Beam at Release Beam Slab Forms Barrier TOTAL DC FWS Utilities TOTAL DW
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
132.6 131.1 139.6 10.1 39.1 319.9 16.7 0.0 16.7
266.8 263.5 280.6 20.3 78.7 643.1 33.7 0.0 33.7
481.1 474.5 505.2 36.6 141.7 1157.9 60.6 0.0 60.6
816.7 798.6 850.2 61.5 238.4 1948.8 102.0 0.0 102.0
CORRESPONDING SHEARS (kip) Load/Location, x (ft)= Support 0.0 36.2 36.2 5.6 4.4 3.0 85.4 5.3 0.0 5.3 ShrChk 3.8 33.1 33.1 5.1 4.0 0.0 75.3 4.8 0.0 4.8 Debond1 8.0 29.7 29.6 4.6 3.6 0.0 67.4 4.3 0.0 4.3 Debond2 16.0 23.1 23.1 3.6 2.8 0.0 52.5 3.4 0.0 3.4 Midspan 44.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
INTERIOR BEAM Beam Slab Forms Barrier Diaphrams TOTAL DC FWS Utilities TOTAL DW EXTERIOR BEAM Beam Slab Forms Barrier Diaphrams TOTAL DC FWS Utilities TOTAL DW
Defined Units
36.2 38.6 2.8 10.8 1.5 89.9 4.6 0.0 4.6
33.1 35.3 2.6 9.9 0.0 80.8 4.2 0.0 4.2
29.7 31.6 2.3 8.9 0.0 72.4 3.8 0.0 3.8
23.1 24.6 1.8 6.9 0.0 56.3 2.9 0.0 2.9
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2.01 Dead Loads
32
Live Load Distribution Factors
Reference
Reference:I:\computer_support\StructuresSoftware\StructuresManual\HDRDesignExamples\Ex1_PCBeam\201DLs.mcd(R)
Description
This document calculates the live load distribution factors as per the LRFD.
Page
34 35 36
Contents
A. Input Variables B. Beam-Slab Bridges - Application [LRFD 4.6.2.2.1] C. Moment Distribution Factors C1. Moment: Interior Beams [LRFD 4.6.2.2.2b] C2. Moment: Exterior Beams [LRFD 4.6.2.2.2d] C3. Moment: Skewed Modification Factor [LRFD 4.6.2.2.2e ] C4. Distribution Factors for Design Moments
40
D. Shear Distribution Factors D1. Shear: Interior Beams [LRFD 4.6.2.2.3a] D2. Shear: Exterior Beams [LRFD 4.6.2.2.3b] D3. Shear: Skewed Modification Factor [LRFD 4.6.2.2.3c] D4. Distribution Factors for Design Shears
2.02 Live Load Distribution Factors
33
A. Input Variables
Cross-Section View
A1. Bridge Geometry

Overall bridge length............. Bridge design span length...... Beam design length............... Skew angle.......................... Superstructure Beam Type.... Number of beams................. Beam Spacing...................... Deck overhang..................... Roadway clear width............ Number of design traffic lanes................................... Height of composite section... Distance from neutral axis to bottom fiber of non-composite section................................ Thickness of deck slab......... Modular ratio between beam and deck............................. Moment of inertia for non-composite section.......... Area of non-composite section................................
Lbridge = 180 ft Lspan = 90 ft Ldesign = 88.167 ft Skew = 30 deg BeamType = "IV" Nbeams = 11 BeamSpacing = 8 ft Overhang = 4.5417 ft Rdwywidth = 42 ft Nlanes = 3 h = 63.0 in
ybnc = 24.7 in tslab = 8 in n

1
= 1.202
4
Inc = 260741.0 in Anc = 789.0 in

2
34
B. Beam-Slab Bridges - Application [LRFD 4.6.2.2.1]

Live load on the deck must be distributed to the precast, prestressed beams. AASHTO provides factors for the distribution of live load into the beams. The factors can be used if the following criteria is met: Width of deck is constant Number of beams is not less than four Beams are parallel and have approximately the same stiffness The overhang minus the barrier width is less than 3.0 feet Curvature in plan is less than the limit specified in Article 4.6.1.2
If these conditions are not met, a refined method of analysis is required and diaphragms shall be provided. Distance between center of gravity of non-composite beam and deck.......................
eg = 34.3 in
eg := h ybnc
tslab 2
Longitudinal stiffness parameter.....................

Kg = 1427039 in
4
Kg := n
Inc + Anc eg
35
C. Moment Distribution Factors

C1. Moment: Interior Beams [LRFD 4.6.2.2.2b]
One design lane Distribution factor for moment in interior beams when one design lane is loaded
S g m.Interior = 0.06 + 14
0.4
S L
0.3
Kg 12.0 L t 3 s
0.1
Using variables defined in this example,

BeamSpacing g m.Interior1 := 0.06 + 14 ft g m.Interior1 = 0.489
0.4
BeamSpacing L design
0.3
Kg 12.0 in Ldesign tslab3 ft
0.1
Two or more design lanes Distribution factor for moment in interior beams when two or more design lanes are loaded
S g m.Interior = 0.075 + 9.5
0.6
S L
0.2
Kg 12.0 L t 3 s
0.1

BeamSpacing g m.Interior2 := 0.075 + 9.5 ft g m.Interior2 = 0.690
0.6
BeamSpacing L design
0.2
Kg 12.0 in Ldesign tslab3 ft
0.1
Range of Applicability The greater distribution factor is selected for moment design of the beams.
g m.Interior := max g m.Interior1 , g m.Interior2 g m.Interior = 0.690
36
Verify the distribution factor satisfies LRFD criteria for "Range of Applicability".
g m.Interior := S ( BeamSpacing 3.5 ft) ( BeamSpacing 16.0 ft)
( )( ) L ( Ldesign 20 ft) ( Ldesign 240 ft)

ts tslab 4.5 in tslab 12 in Nb Nbeams 4 Kg Kg 10000 in Kg 7000000 in
4 4
g m.Interior if S ts L Nb Kg "NG, does not satisfy Range of Applicability" otherwise g m.Interior = 0.690
C2. Moment: Exterior Beams [LRFD 4.6.2.2.2d]

One design lane Distribution factor for moment in exterior beams when one design lane is loaded
De + S 2 ft S De + S 8 ft S
P1 = P2 =
De := Overhang 1.5417 ft De = 3 ft S := BeamSpacing S = 8 ft
The distribution factor for one design lane loaded is based on the lever rule, which includes a 0.5 factor for converting the truck load to wheel loads and a 1.2 factor for multiple truck presence.
g m.Exterior1 := if ( 2 ft + 6 ft) < De + S , g m.Exterior1 = 0.900
2 S + 2De 10 ft S
0.5 ,
S + De 2 ft S
0.5 1.2
Two or more design lanes Distribution factor for moment in exterior beams when two or more design lanes are loaded
de g m.Exterior = g m.Interior 0.77 + 9.1
37
Using variables defined in this example, Distance from tip of web for exterior beam to barrier
d e := Overhang 1.5417 ft d e = 2.667 ft de g m.Exterior2 := g m.Interior2 0.77 + 9.1 ft g m.Exterior2 = 0.733 bw 2
Range of Applicability The greater distribution factor is selected for moment design of the beams.
g m.Exterior := max g m.Exterior1 , g m.Exterior2 g m.Exterior = 0.900
g m.Exterior := d e d e 5.5 ft d e 1 ft g m.Exterior if d e "NG, does not satisfy Range of Applicability" otherwise g m.Exterior = 0.900
)(
C3. Moment: Skew Modification Factor [LRFD 4.6.2.2.2e ]

A skew modification factor for moments may be used if the supports are skewed and the difference between skew angles of two adjacent supports does not exceed 10 degrees.
0.25 0.5 Kg S 1.5 g m.Skew = 1 0.25 tan( ) 12.0 L t 3 L s

0.25 0.5 Kg BeamSpacing c1 := 0.25 L in 3 design 12.0 Ldesign tslab ft
c1 = 0.096 g m.Skew := 1 c1 tan( Skew g m.Skew = 0.958

Superstructure Design 2.02 Live Load Distribution Factors 38
) 1.5
g m.Skew := ( Skew 30 deg) ( Skew 60 deg) S ( BeamSpacing 3.5 ft) ( BeamSpacing 16.0 ft) L Ldesign 20 ft Ldesign 240 ft Nb Nbeams 4 g m.Skew if S L Nb "NG, does not satisfy Range of Applicability" otherwise g m.Skew := if
)(
Skew < 30 deg , 1 , g m.Skew
g m.Skew = 0.958
C4. Distribution Factors for Design Moments

M om ent Distribution Fa c tors Inte rior Ex terior 0.4 8 9 0 .90 0 1 La ne 0.6 9 0 0 .73 3 2+ La nes 0.9 5 8 0 .95 8 Sk ew DESIGN 0.6 6 1 0 .86 2
39
D. Shear Distribution Factors

D1. Shear: Interior Beams [LRFD 4.6.2.2.3a]
One design lane Distribution factor for shear in interior beams when one design lane is loaded
g v = 0.36 + S 25

g v.Interior1 := 0.36 + g v.Interior1 = 0.680 BeamSpacing 25 ft
Two or more design lanes Distribution factor for shear in interior beams when two or more design lanes are loaded
g v = 0.2 + S 12
S 35
2.0

g v.Interior2 := 0.2 + g v.Interior2 = 0.814 BeamSpacing 12 ft
BeamSpacing 35 ft
2.0
Range of Applicability The greater distribution factor is selected for shear design of the beams
g v.Interior := max g v.Interior1 , g v.Interior2 g v.Interior = 0.814
g v.Interior := S ( BeamSpacing 3.5 ft) ( BeamSpacing 16.0 ft) ts tslab 4.5 in tslab 12 in
( )( ) L ( Ldesign 20 ft) ( Ldesign 240 ft)
Nb Nbeams 4 g v.Interior if S ts L Nb "NG, does not satisfy Range of Applicability" otherwise g v.Interior = 0.814
40
D2. Shear: Exterior Beams [LRFD 4.6.2.2.3b]

One design lane Distribution factor for shear in exterior beams when one design lane is loaded
P1 = P2 =
De + S 2 ft S De + S 8 ft S
De = 3 ft S = 8 ft
The distribution factor for one design lane loaded is based on the lever rule, which includes a 0.5 factor for converting the truck load to wheel loads and a 1.2 factor for multiple truck presence.
g v.Exterior1 := if ( 2 ft + 6 ft) < De + S , g v.Exterior1 = 0.900
2 S + 2De 10 ft S
0.5 ,
S + De 2 ft S
0.5 1.2
Two or more design lanes Distribution factor for shear in exterior beams when two or more design lanes are loaded
de g v.Exterior = g v.Interior 0.6 + 10

d e = 2.667 ft de g v.Exterior2 := g v.Interior2 0.6 + 10 ft g v.Exterior2 = 0.706
Range of Applicability The greater distribution factor is selected for shear design of the beams
g v.Exterior := max g v.Exterior1 , g v.Exterior2 g v.Exterior = 0.900
41
g v.Exterior := d e d e 5.5 ft d e 1 ft g v.Exterior if d e "NG, does not satisfy Range of Applicability" otherwise g v.Exterior = 0.900
)(
D3. Shear: Skewed Modification Factor [LRFD 4.6.2.2.3c]

Skew modification factor for shear shall be applied to the exterior beam at the obtuse corner ( > 90o) and to all beams in a multibeam bridge.
12.0 L t 3 s g v.Skew = 1 + 0.20 K g

0.3
tan( )
3 12.0 in L tslab design ft g v.Skew := 1 + 0.20 Kg
0.3
tan( Skew
g v.Skew = 1.086
g v.Skew := ( Skew 0 deg) ( Skew 60 deg) S ( BeamSpacing 3.5 ft) ( BeamSpacing 16.0 ft) L Ldesign 20 ft Ldesign 240 ft Nb Nbeams 4 g v.Skew if S L Nb "NG, does not satisfy Range of Applicability" otherwise g v.Skew = 1.086
)(
If uplift is a design issue, the skew factor for all beams is unconservative. However, uplift is not a design issue for prestressed concrete beam bridges designed as simple spans.
D4. Distribution Factors for Design Shears

Shear Distribution Factors Interior Exterior 0.680 0.900 1 Lane 0.814 0.706 2+ Lanes 1.086 1.086 Skew DESIGN 0.885 0.978
Defined Units
Superstructure Design 2.02 Live Load Distribution Factors 42
Live Load Analysis
Reference
Reference:G:\computer_support\StructuresSoftware\StructuresManual\HDRDesignExamples\Ex1_PCBeam\202DFs.mcd(R)
Description
This section provides examples of the LRFD HL-93 live load analysis necessary for the superstructure design.
Page
44
Contents
A. Input Variables A1. Bridge Geometry A2. Beam Parameters A3. Dynamic Load Allowance [LRFD 3.6.2]
45
B. Maximum Live Load Moment, Reaction and Rotation B1. Maximum Live Load Rotation - One HL-93 vehicle B2. Live Load Moments and Shears - One HL-93 truck B3. Maximum Live Load Reaction at Intermediate Pier - - Two HL-93 vehicles B4. Summary
2.03 Live Load Analysis
43
A. Input Variables
A1. Bridge Geometry
Overall bridge length............. Bridge design span length......
Lbridge = 180 ft Lspan = 90 ft
A2. Beam Parameters

Beam length......................... Beam design length............... Modulus of elasticity for beam................................... Moment of inertia for the interior beam........................ Moment of inertia of the exterior beam.......................
Lbeam = 89.167 ft Ldesign = 88.167 ft Ec.beam = 4176 ksi IInterior = 682912 in
4
IExterior = 694509 in
A3. Dynamic Load Allowance [LRFD 3.6.2]

Impact factor for limit states, except fatigue and fracture....
IM = 1.33
44
B. Maximum Live Load Moment, Reaction and Rotation

This section shows how to calculate the maximum live load moment, reaction (shear), and rotation. The formulas for rotation were obtained from Roark's Formulas for Stress and Strain by Warren C. Young, 6th Edition, McGraw-Hill.
B1. Maximum Live Load Rotation - One HL-93 vehicle

The rotations are calculated for one vehicle over the interior and exterior beams. The composite beam sections are used to calculate the stiffness ( Ec.beam I) of the beams. The maximum live load rotation in a simple span is calculated by positioning the axle loads of an HL-93 design truck in the following locations:
Axle loads............................
P1 := 32 kip P2 := 32 kip P3 := 8 kip
Lane load.............................
kip wL := 0.64 ft P1 ( 0 ft) + P2 ( 14 ft) + P3 ( 28 ft) P1 + P2 + P3
Center of gravity for axle loads...................................

x cg = 9.333 ft
x cg :=
Distance from center of gravity for axle loads to centerline of span ................
z = 2.333 ft
z :=
14 ft x cg 2
45
Distance from left support to axle loads............................

X1 = 32.417 ft X2 = 46.417 ft X3 = 60.417 ft
X1 :=
Ldesign 2
z x cg
X2 := X1 + 14 ft X3 := X1 + 28 ft
Interior Beam Rotation induced by each axle load....................................

1 = 0.00079 rad 2 = 0.00077 rad 3 := 3 = 0.00015 rad 1 := 6 Ec.beam IInterior Ldesign
( ( (
P1 X1
) ) )
2 Ldesign X1 Ldesign X1
( ( (
)( )( )(
) ) )
2 :=
P2 X2
6 Ec.beam IInterior Ldesign P3 X3
6 Ec.beam IInterior Ldesign
Rotation induced by HL-93 truck..................................

truck = 0.00171 rad
truck := ( 1 + 2 + 3 )
Rotation induced by lane load....................................

lane = 0.00092 rad
lane :=
24 Ec.beam IInterior
wL Ldesign
Rotation induced by HL-93 truck and lane load...............

LL.Interior = 0.00263 rad
LL.Interior := truck + lane
Exterior Beam Rotations induced by each axle load....................................

1 = 0.00078 rad 2 := 2 = 0.00076 rad 3 = 0.00015 rad 3 := 1 := P1 X1 2 Ldesign X1 Ldesign X1
6 Ec.beam IExterior Ldesign
( ( (
) ) )
( ( (
)( )( )(
) ) )
46
P2 X2
6 Ec.beam IExterior Ldesign P3 X3
6 Ec.beam IExterior Ldesign
Rotation induced by HL-93 truck...................................

truck = 0.00168 rad
truck := ( 1 + 2 + 3 )
Rotation induced by lane load.

lane = 0.00091 rad
lane :=
24 Ec.beam IExterior
wL Ldesign
Rotation induced by HL-93 truck and lane load...............

LL.Exterior = 0.00259 rad
LL.Exterior := truck + lane
B2. Live Load Moments and Shears - One HL-93 truck

The live load moments and shears in a simple span is calculated by positioning the axle loads of an HL-93 design truck in the following locations:
47
Case 1 HL-93 truck moment and shear:

M truck1( x ) := P1
(Ldesign x)
Ldesign
x + P2
(Ldesign x 14 ft)
Ldesign
x + P3
(Ldesign x 28 ft)
Ldesign
Vtruck1( x ) := P1
(Ldesign x)
Ldesign
+ P2
(Ldesign x 14 ft)
Ldesign
+ P3
(Ldesign x 28 ft)
Ldesign
Case 2 HL-93 truck moment and shear:

M truck2( x ) := P1
(Ldesign x)
Ldesign
( x 14 ft) + P2
(Ldesign x)
Ldesign
x + P3
(Ldesign x 14 ft)
Ldesign
Vtruck2( x ) := P1
( x 14 ft) Ldesign
+ P2
(Ldesign x)
Ldesign
+ P3
(Ldesign x 14 ft)
Ldesign
Maximum moment and shear induced by the HL-93 truck...
M truck( x ) := max M truck1( x ) , M truck2( x ) Vtruck( x ) := max Vtruck1( x ) , Vtruck2( x )
(Note: Choose maximum value)
Moment and shear induced by the lane load.........................
M lane( x ) := Vlane( x ) :=
wL Ldesign wL Ldesign 2 2
wL x 2
wL x
Live load moment and shear for HL-93 truck load (including impact) and lane load.............
M LLI( x ) := M truck( x ) IM + M lane( x ) VLLI( x ) := Vtruck( x ) IM + Vlane( x )
Live load reaction (without impact) ..............................

RLL( Support) = 92.6 kip
RLL( x ) := Vtruck( x ) + Vlane( x )
48
B3. Maximum Live Load Reaction at Intermediate Pier - Two HL-93 vehicles
While two HL-93 vehicles controls in this design, the tandem and single truck with lane load needs to be investigated for other design span lengths. The maximum live load reaction at an intermediate pier is calculated by positioning the axle loads of an HL-93 design truck in the following locations:
Distance from left support of corresponding span to axle loads...................................

X1 = 25 ft X2 = 39 ft X3 = 53 ft X4 = 35.167 ft X5 = 49.167 ft X6 = 63.167 ft
X1 := 25 ft X2 := X1 + 14 ft X3 := X1 + 28 ft X4 := Ldesign 28 ft 25 ft X5 := X4 + 14 ft X6 := X4 + 28 ft
Reaction induced by each axle load....................................

R1 = 35.7 kip R2 = 35.7 kip R3 = 8.9 kip
R1 := R2 := R3 :=
P1 Ldesign P2 Ldesign P3 Ldesign
Ldesign X1 + X4 Ldesign X2 + X5 Ldesign X3 + X6
( ( (
) ) )
Reaction induced by HL-93 trucks.................................

Rtrucks = 80.3 kip
Rtrucks := R1 + R2 + R3
Reaction induced by lane load on both spans................

Rlanes = 57.6 kip
Rlanes :=
wL Lspan 2
( 2)
49
Reaction induced by HL-93 truck and lane load...............

RLLs = 124.1 kip
RLLs := 90% Rtrucks + Rlanes
Reaction induced by HL-93 truck (including impact factor) and lane load........................
RLLIs = 148.0 kip
RLLIs := 90% Rtrucks IM + Rlanes
B4. Summary
DESIGN LIVE LOAD
Load/Location, x (ft)= Support 0.0 ShrChk 3.8 Debond1 8.0 Debond2 16.0 Midspan 44.1
MOMENTS: INTERIOR BEAM Live load + DLA Distribution Factor Design Live Load + DLA Moment MOMENTS: EXTERIOR BEAM Live load + DLA Distribution Factor Design Live Load + DLA Moment SHEARS: INTERIOR BEAM Live load + DLA Distribution Factor Design Live Load + DLA Shear SHEARS: EXTERIOR BEAM Live load + DLA Distribution Factor Design Live Load + DLA Shear LL ROTATIONS (BRG PADS) Live load w/o DLA Distribution Factor Design Live Load Rotation LL REACTIONS (BRG PADS) Live load w/o DLA Distribution Factor Design Live Load Reactions 1 HL-93 REACTION Pier/End Bent (1 Truck) Pier (2 Trucks)
0.0 0.661
410.2 0.661 271.1
820.7 0.661 542.4
1461.4 0.661 965.9
2360.2 0.661 1559.9
0.862 0.0
410.2 0.862 353.6
820.7 0.862 707.5
1461.4 0.862 1259.9
2360.2 0.862 2034.7
113.8 0.885 100.7
107.3 0.885 94.9
100.0 0.885 88.5
86.2 0.885 76.3
37.7 0.885 33.4
113.8 0.978 111.3 Interior Beam 0.00263 0.661 0.00174 Interior Beam 92.6 0.885 81.9 w/o DLA 92.6 124.1
107.3 0.978 104.9 Exterior Beam 0.00259 0.862 0.00223 Exterior Beam 92.6 0.978 90.5 w/ DLA 113.8 148.0
100.0 0.978 97.8
86.2 0.978 84.3
37.7 0.978 36.9
Defined Units
Superstructure Design 2.03 Live Load Analysis 50
Prestressed Beam Design - Part I

Reference
Reference:F:\HDRDesignExamples\Ex1_PCBeam\203LLs.mcd(R)
Description
This section provides the design of the prestressed concrete beam - interior beam design.
Page
52 53
Contents
LRFD Criteria A. Input Variables A1. Bridge Geometry A2. Section Properties A3. Superstructure Moments at Midspan
A4. Superstructure Loads at Debonding Locations A5. Superstructure Loads at the Other Locations
56 B. Interior Beam Midspan Moment Design B1. Strand Pattern definition at Midspan B2. Prestressing Losses [LRFD 5.9.5] B3. Stress Limits (Compression = +, Tension = -) B4. Service I and III Limit States B5. Strength I Limit State moment capacity [LRFD 5.7.3] B6. Limits for Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.3.3] 71 C. Interior Beam Debonding Requirements C1. Strand Pattern definition at Support C2. Stresses at support at release C3. Strand Pattern definition at Debond1 C4. Stresses at Debond1 at Release C5. Strand Pattern definition at Debond2 C6. Stresses at Debond2 at Release 76 D. Shear Design D1. Determine Nominal Shear Resistance D2. and Parameters [LRFD 5.8.3.4.2] D3. Longitudinal Reinforcement 82 E. Summary
2.04 Prestressed Beam Design - Part I
51
LRFD Criteria
STRENGTH I Basic load combination relating to the normal vehicular use of the bridge without wind.
WA = 0 FR = 0 TU = 0 CR , SH
For superstructure design, water load and stream pressure are not applicable. No friction forces. No uniform temperature load effects due to simple spans. Movements are unrestrained. These effects are accounted during the design of the prestressed strands with a factor of 1.0 for all Limit States 1.0 ( CR + SH).
Strength1 = 1.25 DC + 1.50 DW + 1.75 LL
STRENGTH II -
Load combination relating to the use of the bridge by Owner-specified special design vehicles, evaluation permit vehicles, or both without wind.
"Permit vehicles are not evaluated in this design example"
SERVICE I -
Load combination relating to the normal operational use of the bridge with a 55 MPH wind and all loads taken at their nominal values.
BR , WL = 0 For prestressed beam design, braking forces and wind on live load are
negligible.
Service1 = 1.0 DC + 1.0 DW + 1.0 LL + 1.0 ( CR + SH) "Applicable for maximum compressive stresses in beam ONLY. For tension, see Service III."
SERVICE III -
Load combination relating only to tension in prestressed concrete structures with the objective of crack control.
Service3 = 1.0 DC + 1.0 DW + 0.8 LL + 1.0 ( CR + SH) "Applicable for maximum tension at midspan ONLY. For compression, see Service I."
FATIGUE -
Fatigue load combination relating to repetitive gravitational vehicular live load under a single design truck.
Fatigue = 0.75 LL
52
A. Input Variables
A1. Bridge Geometry
Overall bridge length....... Design span length......... Skew angle....................
Lbridge = 180 ft Lspan = 90 ft Skew = 30 deg
A2. Section Properties

COMPOSITE SECTION PROPERTIES Effective slab w idth Transformed slab width Height of composite section Effective slab area Area of composite section Neutral axis to bottom fiber Neutral axis to top fiber Inertia of composite section Section modulus top of slab Section modulus top of beam Section modulus bottom of beam
[in] beff.interior/exterior [in] btr.interior/exterior [in] h [in 2] Aslab [in 2] AInterior/Exterior [in] yb [in] yt [in 4] IInterior/Exterior [in 3] St [in 3] Stb [in 3] Sb
INTERIOR 96.0 79.9 63.0 639.0 1448.0 40.3 22.7 682912.0 30037.5 49719.4 16960.6
EXTERIOR 101.0 84.0 63.0 672.3 1481.3 40.7 22.7 694509.4 31123.9 52162.4 17070.1
A3. Superstructure Loads at Midspan

DC Moment of Beam at Release...............
M RelBeam = 816.7 ft kip M RelBeam := M RelBeamInt( Midspan)
DC Moment of Beam..............................
M Beam = 798.6 ft kip
M Beam := MBeamInt( Midspan)
DC Moment of Slab...............................
M Slab = 797.6 ft kip
M Slab := M SlabInt( Midspan)
53
DC Moment of stay-in-place forms..........

M Forms = 123.1 ft kip
M Forms := M FormsInt( Midspan)
DC Moment of traffic railing barriers........

M Trb = 96.3 ft kip
M Trb := MTrbInt( Midspan)
DW Moment of future wearing surface....

M Fws = 116.6 ft kip
M Fws := MFwsInt ( Midspan)
DW Moment of Utilities..........................
M Utility = 0 ft kip
M Utility := M UtilityInt( Midspan)
Live Load Moment.................................

M LLI = 1559.9 ft kip M Fatigue = 938 ft kip
M LLI := MLLI.Interior ( Midspan) M Fatigue := MLLI.Interior ( Midspan) Mlane( Midspan)
Service1 = 1.0 DC + 1.0 DW + 1.0 LL
Service I Limit State.........................

M Srv1 = 3492.1 ft kip Service3 = 1.0 DC + 1.0 DW + 0.8 LL
M Srv1 := 1.0 MBeam + MSlab + M Forms + MTrb ... + 1.0 MFws + MUtility + 1.0 M LLI
Service III Limit State.......................

M Srv3 = 3180.1 ft kip Strength1 = 1.25 DC + 1.50 DW + 1.75 LL
Strength I Limit State........................

M r = 5174.2 ft kip Fatigue = 0.75 LL
M r := 1.25 MBeam + MSlab + M Forms + MTrb ... + 1.50 MFws + M Utility + 1.75 M LLI
Fatigue Limit State............................

M Fatigue = 703.5 ft kip
M Fatigue := 0.75 M Fatigue (Note : Use NO LANE load).
A4. Superstructure Loads at Debonding Locations

DC Moment of Beam at Release Debond1 = 8 ft Location........................
M RelBeamD1 = 266.8 ft kip M RelBeamD1 := M RelBeamInt( Debond1)

M RelBeamD2 = 481.1 ft kip
M RelBeamD2 := M RelBeamInt( Debond2)
54
A5. Superstructure Loads at the Other Locations

At Support location DC Shear & Moment.........................
V DC.BeamInt( Support ) = 85.4 kip V DW.BeamInt( Support) = 5.3 kip V LLI.Interior( Support) = 100.7 kip M DC.BeamInt( Support) = 0 ft kip M DW.BeamInt( Support) = 0 ft kip M LLI.Interior( Support) = 0 ft kip
DW Shear & Moment ....
LL Shear & Moment.. ....
Strength1 = 1.25 DC + 1.50 DW + 1.75 LL

V u.Support = 290.9 kip
V u.Support := 1.25 V DC.BeamInt( Support ) ... + 1.50 V DW.BeamInt( Support) ... + 1.75 V LLI.Interior( Support)
( (
At Shear Check location DC Shear & Moment.........................

V DC.BeamInt( ShearChk) = 75.3 kip V DW.BeamInt( ShearChk) = 4.8 kip V LLI.Interior( ShearChk) = 94.9 kip M DC.BeamInt( ShearChk) = 298 ft kip M DW.BeamInt( ShearChk) = 19.1 ft kip M LLI.Interior( ShearChk) = 271.1 ft kip
Strength1 = 1.25 DC + 1.50 DW + 1.75 LL

V u = 267.5 kip
V u := 1.25 V DC.BeamInt( ShearChk) ... + 1.50 V DW.BeamInt( ShearChk) ... + 1.75 V LLI.Interior ( ShearChk)
M r = 875.7 ft kip
) M r := 1.25 ( MDC.BeamInt( ShearChk) ) ... + 1.50 ( MDW.BeamInt( ShearChk) ) ... + 1.75 ( MLLI.Interior ( ShearChk) )
( (
55
B. Interior Beam Midspan Moment Design

B1. Strand Pattern definition at Midspan
Using the following schematic, the proposed strand pattern at the midspan section can be defined.
Support = 0 ft
ShearChk = 3.8 ft
Debond1 = 8 ft
Debond2 = 16 ft
Midspan = 44.08 ft
Strand pattern at midspan Strand type....................

strandtype = "LowLax" strandtype := "LowLax" (Note : Options ( "LowLax" "StressRelieved" )
Strand size.....................
stranddia = 0.5 in
stranddia := 0.5 in
(Note : Options ( 0.5 in 0.5625 in 0.6 in )
Strand area....................
StrandArea = 0.153 in
2
StrandArea :=
in 0.192 if stranddia = 0.5625 in 0.217 if stranddia = 0.6 in 0.0 otherwise 0.153 if stranddia = 0.5 in
56
Define the number of strands and eccentricity of strands from bottom of beam......
BeamType = "IV"
MIDSPAN Strand Pattern Data

Rows of strand Number of from bottom of Input strands beam (inches) per row MIDSPAN 19 0 y9 = n9 = 17 0 y8 = n8 = 15 0 y7 = n7 = 13 0 y6 = n6 = 11 0 y5 = n5 = 9 0 y4 = n4 = 7 9 y3 = n3 = 5 11 y2 = n2 = 3 11 y1 = n1 = 4.87 Total strands = 31 Strand c.g. =
Area of prestressing steel........................

Aps = 4.7 in
2
Aps := strands total StrandArea
Transformed section properties As per SDG 4.3.1-C6, states "Stress and camber calculations for the design of simple span, pretensioned components must be based upon the use of transformed section properties." Modular ratio between the prestressing strand and beam. ...................................
np = 6.825 Ep np := Ec.beam Anc.tr := Anc + np 1 Aps ybnc Anc + strandcg in np 1 Aps Anc.tr
Non-composite area transformed.............

Anc.tr = 816.6 in
2
Non-composite neutral axis transformed...

ybnc.tr = 24.1 in
ybnc.tr :=
Non-composite inertia transformed...........

Inc.tr = 270911.4 in
4
Inc.tr := Inc + ybnc.tr strandcg in np 1 Aps Inc.tr Stopnc.tr := hnc ybnc.tr Inc.tr Sbotnc.tr := ybnc.tr
)2 (
Non-composite section modulus top.........

Stopnc.tr = 9047.9 in
3
Non-composite section modulus bottom....

Sbotnc.tr = 11260.7 in
3
57
Modular ratio between the mild reinforcing and transformed concrete deck slab..........
nm = 6.944
Es nm := Ec.beam
2
Assumed area of reinforcement in deck slab per foot width of deck slab...............
in Adeck.rebar := 0.62 ft ybar := h t mill
(Note : Assuming #5 at 12" spacing, top and bottom longitudinally).
Distance from bottom of beam to rebar....

ybar = 67 in
t slab 2
Total reinforcing steel within effective width of deck slab..................................

Abar = 4.96 in
2
Abar := b eff.interior Adeck.rebar
Composite area transformed....................

Atr = 1505.1 in
2
Atr := AInterior + np 1 Aps + nm 1 Abar
Composite neutral axis transformed..........

yb.tr = 40.1 in
yb AInterior + strandcg in ( np 1) Aps ... + ybar ( nm 1 ) Abar yb.tr := A

tr Itr := IInterior + yb.tr strandcg in np 1 Aps ... + yb.tr ybar nm 1 Abar Itr Sslab.tr := h yb.tr
Composite inertia transformed..................

Itr = 738546.7 in
4
) (
2
)2 (
Composite section modulus top of slab.......................................................

Sslab.tr = 32305.6 in
3
Composite section modulus top of beam.....................................................

Stop.tr = 23180.1 in
3
Itr Stop.tr := h yb.tr tslab tmill hbuildup
Composite section modulus bottom of beam.....................................................

Sbot.tr = 18399.8 in
3
Itr Sbot.tr := yb.tr
B2. Prestressing Losses [LRFD 5.9.5]

For prestressing members, the total loss, fpT , is expressed as:
fpT = fpF + fpA + fpES + fpSR + fpCR + fpR2
58
where...
friction loss................... anchorage set loss.......... elastic shortening loss..... shrinkage loss................ creep of concrete loss.... relaxation of steel loss.....
fpF fpA fpES fpSR fpCR fpR2
(Note : Not considered for bonded prestressed beams) (Note : Not considered for bonded prestressed beams)
For the prestress loss calculations, gross section properties (not transformed) can be used.
Elastic Shortening The loss due to elastic shortening in pretensioned members shall be taken as:
fpES = f Eci cgp Ep
where...
Modulus of elasticity of concrete at transfer of prestress force.......................................

Eci.beam = 3276 ksi
Modulus elasticity of prestressing steel.....

Ep = 28500 ksi
Eccentricity of strands at midspan for non-composite section............................

ecg.nc = 19.9 in
ecg.nc := ybnc strandcg in
Section modulus at the strand c.g for the non-composite section............................

Scg.nc = 13129.6 in
3
Inc Scg.nc := ecg.nc
Stress in prestressing steel prior to transfer

fps = 189 ksi
fps := 0.70 fpu
Corresponding total prestressing force......

Fps = 896.4 kip
Fps := Aps fps
Concrete stresses at c.g. of the prestressing force at transfer and the self wt of the beam at maximum moment location..................
fcgp = 1.75 ksi
Fps Fps ecg.nc MRelBeam fcgp := + Anc Scg.nc Scg.nc fpES := f Eci.beam cgp Ep
Losses due to elastic shortening...............

fpES = 15.2 ksi
59
Shrinkage Loss in prestress due to shrinkage may be estimated as:

fpSR = ( 17.0 0.150 H) ksi
where
Average annual relative humidity..............

H = 75 fpSR := ( 17.0 0.150 H) ksi
Losses due to shrinkage..........................

fpSR = 5.8 ksi
Creep Prestress loss due to creep may be taken as:

fpCR = 12 fcgp 7 fcdp 0
Eccentricity of strands at midspan for composite section...................................

ecg = 35.4 in
ecg := yb strandcg in
Section modulus at the strand c.g for the composite section...................................

Scg = 19294.7 in
3
Scg :=
IInterior ecg
Permanent load moments at midspan acting on non-composite section (except beam at M nc := MSlab + M Forms transfer)................................................
M nc = 920.7 kip ft
Permanent load moments at midspan acting on M := M Trb + M Fws + M Utility composite section...................................
M = 212.9 kip ft
Concrete stresses at c.g. of the prestressing force due to permanent loads except at transfer.................................................
fcdp = 0.97 ksi
M nc M fcdp := + Scg.nc Scg fpCR := max 12 fcgp 7 fcdp , 0 ksi
Losses due to creep................................

fpCR = 14.1 ksi
60
Steel Relaxation at Transfer Prestress loss due to relaxation loss of the prestressing steel at transfer may be taken as:
fpR1 =
where,
log(24.0 t) fpj 0.55 fpj if strandtype = "StressRelieved" 10.0 fpy log(24.0 t) fpj 40.0 f 0.55 fpj if strandtype = "LowLax" py
Time estimated (in days) between stressing and transfer...........................................

t = 1.5 days
t := 1.5
Initial stress in tendon at time of stressing (jacking force) [LRFD Table 5.9.3.1]......
fpj = 202.5 ksi
fpj :=
(0.70 fpu) (0.75 fpu)
if strandtype = "StressRelieved" if strandtype = "LowLax"
(Note : LRFD C5.9.5.4.4b allows fpj = 0.80 fpu for this calculation)
Specified yield strength of the prestressing steel [LRFD 5.4.4.1]..............................

fpy = 243 ksi
fpy :=
( 0.85 fpu) ( 0.90 fpu)
Losses due to steel relaxation at transfer...

fpR1 :=
log( 24.0 t ) fpj 10.0 f 0.55 fpj if strandtype = "StressRelieved" py f log( 24.0 t ) pj 0.55 fpj if strandtype = "LowLax" 40.0 fpy
fpR1 = 2.2 ksi
Steel Relaxation after Transfer Prestress loss due to relaxation loss of the prestressing steel after transfer may be taken as:
fpR2 =
20.0 0.4 fpES 0.2 ( fpSR + fpCR) if strandtype = "StressRelieved" 20.0 0.4 fpES 0.2 ( fpSR + fpCR) (30 %) if strandtype = "LowLax"
61
where, Losses due to steel relaxation after transfer

fpR2 :=
20.0 ksi 0.4 fpES 0.2 (fpSR + fpCR) if strandtype = "StressRelieved" 20.0 ksi 0.4 fpES 0.2 (fpSR + fpCR) ( 30 %) if strandtype = "LowLax"
fpR2 = 3 ksi
Total Prestress Loss The total loss, fpT , is expressed as........

fpT = 38.1 ksi fpT := fpES + fpSR + fpCR + fpR2
Percent loss of strand force.....................

Loss = 18.8 %
Loss :=
fpT fpj
B3. Stress Limits (Compression = +, Tension = -)

Initial Stresses [SDG 4.3] Limit of tension in top of beam at release (straight strand only) Outer 15 percent of design beam........ Center 70 percent of design beam...... Limit of compressive concrete strength at release...................................................
ftop.outer15 = 0.76 ksi ftop.center70 = 0.38 ksi
fci.beam = 4 ksi
For prestressing members, the total loss, fpT , at release is expressed as:
fpTRelease = fpES + fpR1
where...
elastic shortening loss..... relaxation of steel loss at transfer.........................
fpES fpR1 fpTRelease := fpES + fpR1
The losses at release...............................

fpTRelease = 17.4 ksi
62
Total jacking force of strands..................

Fpj = 960.5 kip
Fpj := fpj Aps
The actual stress in strand after losses at transfer have occured.............................

fpe = 185.1 ksi
fpe := fpj fpTRelease
Calculate the stress due to prestress at the top and bottom of beam at release: Total force of strands.............................
Fpe = 877.8 kip Fpe := fpe Aps
Stress at top of beam at support...............

pjSupport = 0.84 ksi
pjSupport :=
Fpe Fpe ecg.nc Stnc Anc

MRelBeam Stnc +
Stress at top of beam at center 70%.........

pjTop70 = 0.26 ksi
pjTop70 :=
Fpe Fpe ecg.nc A S tnc nc

+
Stress at bottom of beam at center 70%...

pjBotBeam = 1.84 ksi
pjBotBeam :=
M RelBeam Sbnc
Fpe Fpe ecg.nc A + S bnc nc
63
pjSupport :=
"OK" if pjSupport 0 ksi pjSupport ftop.outer15 "OK" if pjSupport > 0 ksi pjSupport fci.beam "NG" otherwise
where ftop.outer15 = 0.76 ksi where fci.beam = 4 ksi
pjSupport = "NG"
(Note : Debonding will be required).
Top70Release :=
"OK" if pjTop70 0 ksi pjTop70 ftop.center70 "OK" if pjTop70 > 0 ksi pjTop70 fci.beam "NG" otherwise
where ftop.center70 = 0.38 ksi where fci.beam = 4 ksi
Top70Release = "OK" BotRelease := "OK" if pjBotBeam fci.beam "NG" if pjBotBeam 0 ksi "NG" otherwise BotRelease = "OK"
where fci.beam = 4 ksi
(Note : Some MathCad equation explanations The check for the top beam stresses checks to see if tension is present, pjTop70 0 ksi , and then applies the proper allowable. A separate line is used for the compression and tension allowables. The last line, "NG" otherwise , is a catch-all statement such that if the actual stress is not within the allowables, it is considered "NG".) For the bottom beam, the first line, pjBotBeam fci.beam , checks that the allowable compression is not exceeded. The second line assures that no tension is present, if there is then the variable will be set to "NG". The catch-all statement, "NG" otherwise , will be ignored since the first line was satisfied. If the stress were to exceed the allowable, neither of the first two lines will be satisfied therefore the last line would produce the answer of "NG".
Final Stresses [LRFD Table 5.9.4.2.1-1 & 5.9.4.2.2-1] (1) Sum of effective prestress and permanent loads Limit of compression in slab..............
fallow1.TopSlab = 2.03 ksi fallow1.TopSlab := 0.45 fc.slab
Limit of compression in top of beam..

fallow1.TopBeam = 2.93 ksi
fallow1.TopBeam := 0.45 fc.beam
(2) Sum of live load and 1/2 sum of effective prestress and permanent loads Limit of compression in slab..............
64

(3) Sum of effective prestress, permanent loads and transient loads

(Note : The engineer is reminded that this check needs to be made also for stresses during shipping and handling. For purposes of this design example, this calculation is omitted).
Limit of compression in slab..............

fallow3.TopSlab = 2.70 ksi
fallow3.TopSlab := 0.60 fc.slab

(4) Tension at bottom of beam only Limit of tension in bottom of beam.....

fallow4.BotBeam :=
(0.0948 fc.beamksi) if Environmentsuper = "Extremely" (0.19 fc.beam ksi) otherwise

(Note : For not worse than moderate corrosion conditions.) Environmentsuper = "Slightly"
fallow4.BotBeam = 0.48 ksi
B4. Service I and III Limit States

At service, check the stresses of the beam at for compression and tension. In addition, the forces in the strands after losses need to be checked. The actual stress in strand after all losses have occured.........................................
fpe = 164.4 ksi fpe := fpj fpT
Allowable stress in strand after all losses have occured.........................................

fpe.Allow = 194.4 ksi LRFD 5.9.3 :=
fpe.Allow := 0.80 fpy
"OK, stress at service after losses satisfied" if fpe fpe.Allow "NG, stress at service after losses not satisfied" otherwise
LRFD 5.9.3 = "OK, stress at service after losses satisfied"
65
Calculate the stress due to prestress at the top of slab, top of beam and bottom of beam: Total force of strands.............................
Fpe = 780 kip Fpe Anc.tr Fpe Anc.tr Fpe ecg.nc Stopnc.tr Fpe ecg.nc Sbotnc.tr Fpe := fpe Aps
Stress at top of beam..............................

peTopBeam = 0.76 ksi
peTopBeam :=
Stress at bottom of beam.........................

peBotBeam = 2.33 ksi
peBotBeam :=
Service I Limit State The compressive stresses in the top of the beam will be checked for the following conditions: (1) Sum of effective prestress and permanent loads (2) Sum of live load and 1/2 sum of effective prestress and permanent loads (3) Sum of effective prestress and permanent loads and transient loads
(Note : Transient loads can include loads during shipping and handling. For purposes of this design example, these loads are omitted).
(1) Sum of effective prestress and permanent loads. The stress due to permanent loads can be calculated as follows: Stress in top of slab..........................
1 TopSlab = 0.08 ksi 1 TopBeam := M Beam + M Slab + MForms Stopnc.tr M Trb + M Fws + M Utility Stop.tr ... ... 1 TopSlab := M Trb + M Fws + M Utility Sslab.tr
Stress in top of beam........................

1 TopBeam = 1.63 ksi
+ peTopBeam TopSlab1 := if 1 TopSlab fallow1.TopSlab , "OK" , "NG"
Check top slab stresses.....................

TopSlab1 = "OK"
) )
where fallow1.TopSlab = 2.03 ksi

TopBeam1 := if 1TopBeam fallow1.TopBeam , "OK" , "NG"
Check top beam stresses...................

TopBeam1 = "OK"
where fallow1.TopBeam = 2.93 ksi
66
(2) Sum of live load and 1/2 sum of effective prestress and permanent loads Stress in top of slab..........................
2 TopSlab = 0.62 ksi MLLI 2 TopBeam := 0.5 1 TopBeam + Stop.tr M LLI 2 TopSlab := 0.5 1 TopSlab + Sslab.tr


TopSlab2 = "OK"
TopSlab2 := if 2 TopSlab fallow2.TopSlab , "OK" , "NG"
) )


TopBeam2 = "OK"
(3) Sum of effective prestress, permanent loads and transient loads Stress in top of slab..........................
3 TopSlab = 0.66 ksi M LLI 3 TopSlab := 1 TopSlab + Sslab.tr MLLI 3 TopBeam := 1 TopBeam + Stop.tr


TopSlab3 = "OK"
) )


TopBeam3 = "OK"
Service III Limit State total stresses (4) Tension at bottom of beam only Stress in bottom of beam..................
4 BotBeam = 0.45 ksi 4 BotBeam :=
MBeam MSlab M Forms ... ... Sbotnc.tr MTrb MFws MUtility + Sbot.tr
+ peBotBeam + 0.8 M LLI Sbot.tr
67
Check bottom beam stresses.............

BotBeam4 = "OK"
BotBeam4 := if 4 BotBeam fallow4.BotBeam , "OK" , "NG"
where fallow4.BotBeam = 0.48 ksi
B5. Strength I Limit State moment capacity [LRFD 5.7.3]

Strength I Limit State design moment.......
M r = 875.7 ft kip
Factored resistance
M r = Mn
Nominal flexural resistance
a hf a a a M n = Aps fps dp + As fy ds 2 A' s f'y d's 2 + 0.85 f'c b b w 1 hf 2 2 2
For a rectangular, section without compression reinforcement,

a a M n = Aps fps dp 2 + As fy ds 2 c= Aps fpu + As fy fpu 0.85 f'c 1 b + k Aps dp
where a = 1 c and
In order to determine the average stress in the prestressing steel to be used for moment capacity, a factor "k" needs to be computed. Value for "k"..........................................
k = 0.28 k := 2 1.04
fpy fpu
fc.beam 4000 psi , 0.65 1000 psi
Stress block factor.................................

1 = 0.73
1 := max0.85 0.05
Distance from the compression fiber to cg of prestress...........................................

dp = 58.1 in
dp := h strandcg in
Area of reinforcing mild steel...................

As = 0 in
2
As := 0 in
(Note : For strength calculations, deck reinforcement is conservatively ignored.)
Distance from compression fiber to reinforcing mild steel...............................

ds = 0 in
ds := 0 in
68
Distance between the neutral axis and compressive face...................................

c = 3.9 in
c :=
Aps fpu + As fy fpu 0.85 fc.beam 1 b tr.interior + k Aps dp
Depth of equivalent stress block...............

a = 2.8 in
a := 1 c
Average stress in prestressing steel...........

fps = 264.9 ksi
c fps := fpu 1 k d p
Resistance factor for tension and flexure of prestressed members [LRFD 5.5.4.2]......
' = 1.00
Moment capacity provided......................

M r.prov = 5937 ft kip
M r.prov := ' Aps fps dp
a 2
+ As fy ds
a 2
Check moment capacity provided exceeds required.................................................

Moment Capacity = "OK"
Moment Capacity :=
"OK" if Mr.prov M r "NG" otherwise

where Mr = 875.7 ft kip
B6. Limits for Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.3.3]

Maximum Reinforcement The maximum reinforcement requirements ensure the section has sufficient ductility and is not overreinforced.
Effective depth from extreme compression fiber to centroid of the tensile reinforcement........................................
de = 58.1 in
de :=
Aps fps dp + As fy ds Aps fps + As fy
The
c de
= 0.07 ratio should be less than 0.42 to satisfy maximum reinforcement requirements.
LRFD 5.7.3.3.1 :=
"OK, maximum reinforcement requirements for positive moment are satisfied" if "NG, section is over-reinforced, see LRFD equation C5.7.3.3.1-1" otherwise
c de
0.42
LRFD 5.7.3.3.1 = "OK, maximum reinforcement requirements for positive moment are satisfied"
69
Minimum Reinforcement The minimum reinforcement requirements ensure the moment capacity provided is at least 1.2 times greater than the cracking moment. Modulus of Rupture...............................
fr = 0.6 ksi fr := 0.24 fc.beam ksi
Stress in bottom of beam from Service III........................................................

4 BotBeam = 0.45 ksi
Additional amount of stress causing cracking................................................

= 0.2 ksi
:= 4 BotBeam fr
Section modulus to bottom of beam.........

Sb = 17070.1 in
3
Additional amount of moment causing cracking................................................

M = 224.3 kip ft
M := Sb
Service III load case moments.................

M Srv3 = 3180.1 ft kip
Moment due to prestressing provided.......

M ps = 1290.8 ft kip
M ps := Fpe ecg.nc
) )
Cracking moment...................................
M cr = 2113.6 ft kip
M cr := M Srv3 + Mps + M
Required flexural resistance.............

M r.reqd = 1164.6 ft kip
M r.reqd := min 1.2 Mcr , 133 % M r
Check that the capacity provided, Mr.prov = 5937 ft kip , exceeds minimum requirements, Mr.reqd = 1164.6 ft kip .
LRFD 5.7.3.3.2 :=
"OK, minimum reinforcement for positive moment is satisfied" if Mr.prov M r.reqd "NG, reinforcement for positive moment is less than minimum" otherwise
LRFD 5.7.3.3.2 = "OK, minimum reinforcement for positive moment is satisfied"
70
C. Interior Beam Debonding Requirements

C1. Strand Pattern definition at Support
Define the number of strands and eccentricity of strands from bottom of beam at Support = 0 ft
Rows of strand from bottom of y9 = y8 = y7 = y6 = y5 = y4 = y3 = y2 = y1 =
Strand c.g. =
Number of Input 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 5.00 strands
SUPPORT Strand Pattern Data

Number of strands per row SUPPORT n9 = n8 = n7 = n6 = n5 = n4 = n3 = n2 = n1 =
Total
beam (inches)
per row MIDSPAN n9 = n8 = n7 = n6 = n5 = n4 = n3 = n2 = n1 = 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 11 11
COMMENTS
0 0 0 0 0 0 9 9 9 27
31 strands =

Aps.Support = 4.1 in
2
Aps.Support := strandstotal StrandArea
C2. Stresses at support at release


Fpj = 836.5 kip
Fpj := fpj Aps.Support

fpe = 185.1 ksi
Fpe = 764.6 kip Fpe := fpe Aps.Support

pjTopEnd = 0.74 ksi
pjTopEnd :=
71
Stress at bottom of beam at support...

pjBotEnd = 2.41 ksi
pjBotEnd :=
Fpe Fpe ecg.nc + Sbnc Anc
TopRelease :=
"OK" if pjTopEnd 0 ksi pjTopEnd ftop.outer15 "OK" if pjTopEnd > 0 ksi pjTopEnd fci.beam "NG" otherwise
TopRelease = "OK"
BotRelease :=
"OK" if pjBotEnd fci.beam "NG" if pjBotEnd 0 ksi "NG" otherwise
BotRelease = "OK"
C3. Strand Pattern definition at Debond1

Define the number of strands and eccentricity of strands from bottom of beam at Debond1 = 8 ft
Strand c.g. =
DEBOND1 Strand Pattern Data

Number of strands per row DEBOND1 n9 = n8 = n7 = n6 = n5 = n4 = n3 = n2 = n1 =
Total
beam (inches)
per row MIDSPAN SUPPORT n9 = n8 = n7 = n6 = n5 = n4 = n3 = n2 = n1 = 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 11 11 31 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 9 9
COMMENTS
0 0 0 0 0 0 9 9 11 29
27 strands =

Aps.Debond1 = 4.4 in
2
Aps.Debond1 := strands total StrandArea
C4. Stresses at Debond1 at Release

72

Fpj = 898.5 kip
Fpj := fpj Aps.Debond1

fpe = 185.1 ksi
Fpe = 821.2 kip MRelBeamD1 Stnc Fpe := fpe Aps.Debond1
Stress at top of beam at outer 15%.........

pjTop15 = 0.43 ksi
pjTop15 :=
Fpe Fpe ecg.nc Anc Stnc

+
Stress at bottom of beam at outer 15%...

pjBotBeam :=
M RelBeamD1 Sbnc
pjTop15 :=
"OK" if pjTop15 0 ksi pjTop15 ftop.outer15 "OK" if pjTop15 > 0 ksi pjTop15 fci.beam "NG" otherwise
pjTop15 = "OK"
BotRelease :=
"OK" if pjBotBeam fci.beam "NG" if pjBotBeam 0 ksi "NG" otherwise
BotRelease = "OK"
73

Rows of strand from bottom of Input beam (inches) y9 = y8 = y7 = y6 = y5 = y4 = y3 = y2 = y1 =
Strand c.g. =
Numbe r of strands

Total
per MIDSPAN SUPPORT DEBOND1 n9 = n8 = n7 = n6 = n5 = n4 = n3 = n2 = n1 = 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 11 11 31 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 9 9 27 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 9 11
COMMENTS
19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 4.87
0 0 0 0 0 0 9 11 11 31 All strands are active beyond this point
29 strands =

2


Fpj = 960.5 kip

fpe = 185.1 ksi

pjTop15 = 0.2 ksi
pjTop15 :=
74

pjBotBeam :=
M RelBeamD2 Sbnc
pjTop15 :=
pjTop15 = "OK"
BotRelease :=
BotRelease = "OK"
75
D. Shear Design
D1. Determine Nominal Shear Resistance
The nominal shear resistance, Vn, shall be determined as the lesser of:
V n = V c + V s + Vp V n = 0.25 f'c b v dv
The shear resistance of a concrete member may be separated into a component, V c , that relies on tensile stresses in the concrete, a component, V s , that relies on tensile stresses in the transverse reinforcement, and a component, V p , that is the vertical component of the prestressing force. Nominal shear resistance of concrete section.................................................. Nominal shear resistance of shear reinforcement section.............................. Nominal shear resistance from prestressing for straight strands (non-draped)..............
V c = 0.0316 fc b v dv Vs = Av fy dv cot( ) s
V p := 0 kip
Effective shear depth..............................

dv = 45.4 in or dv = 3.8 ft
d a , 0.9 d , 0.72 h dv := max s s 2
(Note : This location is the same location as previously estimated for ShearChk = 3.8 ft .)
D2. and Parameters [LRFD 5.8.3.4.2]

Tables are give in LRFD to determine from the longitudinal strain and be calculated.
Mu v f'c
parameter, so these values need to
Longitudinal strain for sections with prestressing and transverse reinforcement.
x =
dv
+ 0.5 V u cot( ) Aps fpo 2 Es As + Ep Aps
Effective width................................ Effective shear depth........................
b v := b w dv = 3.8 ft
where b v = 8 in
76
Factor indicating ability of diagonally cracked concrete to transmit tension.. Angle of inclination for diagonal compressive stresses........................
(Note : Values of = 2 and = 45 deg cannot be assumed since beam is prestressed.)
LRFD Table 5.8.3.4.2-1 presents values of and for sections with transverse reinforcement . LRFD C5.8.3.4.2 states that data given by the table may be used over a range of values. Linear interpolation may be used, but is not recommended for hand calculations.
The longitudinal strain and
v f'c
parameter are calculated for the appropriate critical sections.
The shear stress on the concrete shall be determined as [LRFD 5.8.2.9-1]:

v= V u V p b v dv
Factored shear force at the critical section

V u = 267.5 kip
Shear stress on the section......................

v = 0.82 ksi
v :=
V u v V p v b v dv
Parameter for locked in difference in strain between prestressing tendon and concrete.
fpo = 189 ksi
fpo := 0.7 fpu
77
The prestressing strand force becomes effective with the transfer length..............
Ltransfer = 2.5 ft
Ltransfer := 60 stranddia
Since the transfer length, Ltransfer = 2.5 ft , is less than the shear check location, ShearChk = 3.8 ft , from the end of the beam, the full force of the strands are effective. Factored moment on section....................
M u = 1011.3 ft kip M u := max M r , V u dv
For the longitudinal strain calculations, an initial assumption for must be made.......
:= 24.2 deg Mu + 0.5 V u cot( ) Aps.Support fpo 2 Es As + Ep Aps.Support
Longitudinal strain..................................
x = 0.92
x :=
dv
( 1000)
Since the strain value is negative, the strain needs to be recalculated as per LRFD equation 5.8.3.4.2-3:
Mu + 0.5 V u cot( ) Aps fpo
whereas
ex =
dv
2 Ec Ac + Es As + Ep Aps
)
(Note : The non-composite area of the beam is divided by its height, then multiplied by one-half of the composite section height).
Area of the concrete on the tension side of the member...........................................

Ac = 460.2 in
2
Anc h Ac := hnc 2
Recalculating the strain,

Mu + 0.5 V u cot( ) Aps.Support fpo
x :=
2 Ec.beam Ac + Es As + Ep Aps.Support
dv
( 1000)
x = 0.05 v f'c
parameter.......................................
v fc.beam
= 0.126
78
Based on LRFD Table 5.8.3.4.2-1, the values of and can be approximately taken as: Angle of inclination of compression stresses
= 24.2 deg
Factor relating to longitudinal strain on the shear capacity of concrete

:= 2.78
Nominal shear resistance of concrete section..................................................

V c = 81.3 kip
V c := 0.0316 fc.beam ksi bv dv
Stirrups Size of stirrup bar ( "4" "5" "6" )...

bar := "5" Av = 0.620 in
2
Area of shear reinforcement.................... Diameter of shear reinforcement..............
dia = 0.625 in
Nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement

Vn = Vc + Vp + Vs
where.............................................
V n = 297.3 kip
V n := min
Vu v
, 0.25 fc.beam b v dv + V p
and.................................................
V s = 216.0 kip
V s := V n V c V p
Spacing of stirrups Minimum transverse reinforcement..........

smin = 57.7 in smin := Av fy 0.0316 b v fc.beam ksi
Transverse reinforcement required...........

sreq = 17.4 in
sreq := if V s 0 , smin ,
Av fy dv cot( ) Vs
Minimum transverse reinforcement required................................................

s = 17.4 in
s := min smin , sreq
79
Maximum transverse reinforcement

smax := if
V u v V p < 0.125 fc.beam , min( 0.8 dv , 24 in) , min(0.4 dv , 12 in) v (b v dv)
smax = 12 in
Spacing of transverse reinforcement cannot exceed the following spacing........

spacing = 12.0 in
spacing := if smax > s , s , smax
D3. Longitudinal Reinforcement

For sections not subjected to torsion, longitudinal reinforcement shall be proportioned so that at each section the tensile capacity of the reinforcement on the flexural tension side of the member, taking into account any lack of full development of that reinforcement.
General equation for force in longitudinal reinforcement

T= Mu dv b +
Vu 0.5 V s V p cot( ) v
V s := min Mu dv
where.............................................
V s = 297.3 kip
Av fy dv cot( ) V u , spacing v
+
and.................................................
T = 628.0 kip
T :=
At the shear check location Longitudinal reinforcement, previously computed for positive moment design.......
2
Equivalent force provided by this steel......

TpsShearChk = 764.6 kip
TpsShearChk := Aps.Support fpe
LRFD 5.8.3.5 :=
"Ok, positive moment longitudinal reinforcement is adequate" if TpsShearChk T "NG, positive moment longitudinal reinforcement provided" otherwise
LRFD 5.8.3.5 = "Ok, positive moment longitudinal reinforcement is adequate"
At the support location
80

T= Mu dv b +
V s := min
where Mu = 0 ft kip
where.............................................
V s = 312.9 kip
Av fy dv cot( ) V u.Support , spacing v
and.................................................
T = 371.1 kip
T :=
V u.Support 0.5 V s V p cot( ) v
In determining the tensile force that the reinforcement is expected to resist at the inside edge of the bearing area, the values calculated at dv = 3.8 ft from the face of the support may be used. Note that the force is greater due to the contribution of the moment at dv. For this example, the actual values at the face of the support will be used. Longitudinal reinforcement, previously computed for positive moment design.......
2
The prestressing strand force is not all effective at the support area due to the transfer length required to go from zero force to maximum force. A factor will be applied that takes this into account. Transfer length...................................... Distance from center line of bearing to end of beam.......................................... Estimated length of bearing pad...............
Ltransfer = 30 in J = 6 in Lpad := 12 in (Note ! - this dimension needs to be increased since the edge of pad should be about 1-1/2" from the edge of the beam. Override and use the following: J := 8.5 in ) Lpad 2
Determine the force effective at the inside edge of the bearing area.
J+ Factor :=
Factor to account for effective force........

Factor = 0.5
Ltransfer

TpsSupport = 369.5 kip LRFD 5.8.3.5 :=
TpsSupport := Aps.Support fpe Factor
"Ok, positive moment longitudinal reinforcement is adequate" if TpsSupport T "NG, positive moment longitudinal reinforcement provided" otherwise
LRFD 5.8.3.5 = "NG, positive moment longitudinal reinforcement provided"
81
In otder to satisfy the equation, we increase the shear steel contribution by specifying the actual stirrup spacing used at this location. Assume stirrups are at the following spacing.
spacing := 11 in (Note : Decreasing the spacing will not improve Vs since it will then be a function of the shear at the support and not the shear steel).
re-computing.......................................
V s = 323.2 kip
V s := min
and.................................................
T = 359.6 kip
T :=


(Note : The location of the bearing pad had to be moved in order to satisfy this criteria. It will now provide 2-1/2" from the edge of the pad to the end of the beam. The engineer needs to assure that this is properly detailed and adhered to in the plans).
Several important design checks were not performed in this design example (to reduce the length of calculations). However, the engineer should assure that the following has been done at a minimum: Design for interface steel Design for anchorage steel Design for camber Design check for beam transportation loads Design for fatigue checks when applicable
E. Summary
Defined Units
82
Prestressed Beam Design - Part II

Reference
Description
This section provides the design of the prestressed concrete beam - exterior beam design.
Page
84 86
Contents
Design changes from Interior beam design A. Input Variables A1. Bridge Geometry A2. Section Properties A3. Superstructure Moments at Midspan A4. Superstructure Loads at Debonding Locations A5. Superstructure Loads at the Other Locations
89
B. Interior Beam Midspan Moment Design B1. Strand Pattern definition at Midspan B2. Prestressing Losses [LRFD 5.9.5] B3. Stress Limits (Compression = +, Tension = -) B4. Service I and III Limit States B5. Strength I Limit State moment capacity [LRFD 5.7.3] B6. Limits for Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.3.3]
104
C. Interior Beam Debonding Requirements C1. Strand Pattern definition at Support C2. Stresses at support at release C3. Strand Pattern definition at Debond1 C4. Stresses at Debond1 at Release C5. Strand Pattern definition at Debond2 C6. Stresses at Debond2 at Release
109
D. Shear Design D1. Determine Nominal Shear Resistance D2. and Parameters [LRFD 5.8.3.4.2] D3. Longitudinal Reinforcement
116
E. Summary
2.05 Prestressed Beam Design - Part II
83
DESIGN CHANGES FROM INTERIOR BEAM DESIGN

The FDOT Prestressed beam program was utilized to quickly determine if the exact strand pattern used in the interior beam design will work for the exterior. For the exterior, there was insufficient moment capacity provided at midspan. In order to achieve the moment capacity, the number of strands were increased from 31 to 38.
3.215 3 3.22 3.44 1 3.66 2 3.88
TotalNumberOfTendons = 38 NumberOfDebondedTendons = 4 NumberOfDrapedTendons = 0 StrandSize = "1/2 in low lax" StrandArea = 0.153 in

2
y tendonT y tendonT y tendonT
4.1 1 HalfBeamCoord in 4.32 1 1.01 min HalfBeamCoord in 4.54
( (
) )
0 0
x tendonT
0.5 0
1 , x tendon
T
Debonded Full Length Draped Beam Surface
, x tendon
1.5 2
2.5
2.167 0 , HalfBeamCoord in
JackingForce per.strand = 30.982 kip
By examining the figure below, it will be obvious that the beam section will not work with straight strands since debonding would be required for almost up to 10 feet from midspan in either direction.
Rel. Comp. & Final Ten. (Bot., Allow)
1
0.484 f bot.beam.rel ksi f all.comp.rel ksi f bot.beam.stage8.c2 ksi f all.tension ksi

n n
0
n
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
2.807 3 0 min( CR_fcomp.rel) = 0.855 Location n Check_fcomp.rel = "No Good!" ft 89.167
FDOT SDG states to consider the individual beams designs as a first trial subject to modifications by combining similar designs into groups of common materials and stranding based upon the following priorities: 1.) 2.) 3.) 4.) 28-Day Compressive Concrete Strength (fc) Stranding (size, number, and location) Compressive Concrete Strength at Release (fci) Shielding (Debonding)*
84
The solution chosen is to increase the release strength of the concrete. In the interior beam design, the minimum value of fci.beam.min = 4 ksi was utilized. Since the exterior beam governs, we will use the maximum value allowed, fci.beam.max = 5.2 ksi. for this design example for both beams. The following file shows the design of the exterior beam with the following strand pattern.
3.215 3 3.22 3.44 3.66 3.88 1 4.1 in 4.32 1.01 min HalfBeamCoord
TotalNumberOfTendons = 40 NumberOfDebondedTendons = 4 NumberOfDrapedTendons = 0 StrandSize = "1/2 in low lax"

0 0
y tendonT
1 y tendonT
y tendonT
HalfBeamCoord
( (
) in) 4.54
x tendonT
0.5 0
1 , x tendon
T
Debonded Full Length Draped Beam Surface
, x tendon
1.5 2
2 , HalfBeamCoord 0 in
2.5 2.167
JackingForce per.strand = 30.982 kip

Rel. Comp. & Final Ten. (Bot., Allow)
0.242 f bot.beam.rel ksi f all.comp.rel ksi f bot.beam.stage8.c2 ksi f all.tension ksi

n n n
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
3 3.12 4 0 Location n ft 89.17
New values for release strength

Release strength...............................
fci.beam := fci.beam.max fci.beam = 5.2 ksi
Modulus of elasticity........................
Eci.beam := limerock 1820 fci.beam ksi Eci.beam = 3735 ksi
85
A. Input Variables
A1. Bridge Geometry
Overall bridge length....... Design span length......... Skew angle....................
A2. Section Properties

COMPOSITE SECTION PROPERTIES Effective slab w idth Transformed slab width Height of composite section Effective slab area Area of composite section Neutral axis to bottom fiber Neutral axis to top fiber Inertia of composite section Section modulus top of slab Section modulus top of beam Section modulus bottom of beam
[in] beff.interior/exterior [in] btr.interior/exterior [in] h [in 2] Aslab [in 2] AInterior/Exterior [in] yb [in] yt [in 4] IInterior/Exterior [in 3] St [in 3] Stb [in 3] Sb
INTERIOR 96.0 79.9 63.0 639.0 1448.0 40.3 22.7 682912.0 30037.5 49719.4 16960.6
EXTERIOR 101.0 84.0 63.0 672.3 1481.3 40.7 22.7 694509.4 31123.9 52162.4 17070.1
A3. Superstructure Loads at Midspan

DC Moment of Beam at Release...............
M RelBeam = 816.7 ft kip M RelBeam := M RelBeamExt( Midspan)
DC Moment of Beam..............................
M Beam = 798.6 ft kip
M Beam := MBeamExt( Midspan)
DC Moment of Slab...............................
M Slab = 850.2 ft kip
M Slab := M SlabExt( Midspan)
86
DC Moment of stay-in-place forms..........

M Forms = 61.5 ft kip
M Forms := M FormsExt( Midspan)
DC Moment of traffic railing barriers........

M Trb = 238.4 ft kip
M Trb := MTrbExt( Midspan)
DW Moment of future wearing surface....

M Fws = 102 ft kip
M Fws := MFwsExt( Midspan)
DW Moment of Utilities..........................
M Utility = 0 ft kip
M Utility := M UtilityExt( Midspan)
Live Load Moment.................................

M LLI = 2034.7 ft kip M Fatigue = 1412.9 ft kip
M LLI := MLLI.Exterior ( Midspan) M Fatigue := MLLI.Exterior ( Midspan) M lane( Midspan)
Service1 = 1.0 DC + 1.0 DW + 1.0 LL
Service I Limit State.........................

M Srv1 = 4085.5 ft kip Service3 = 1.0 DC + 1.0 DW + 0.8 LL
Service III Limit State.......................

M Srv3 = 3678.6 ft kip Strength1 = 1.25 DC + 1.50 DW + 1.75 LL

M r = 6149.8 ft kip Fatigue = 0.75 LL
M r := 1.25 MBeam + MSlab + M Forms + MTrb ... + 1.50 MFws + M Utility + 1.75 M LLI
Fatigue Limit State............................

M Fatigue = 1059.7 ft kip
M Fatigue := 0.75 M Fatigue (Note : Use NO LANE load).
A4. Superstructure Loads at Debonding Locations

M RelBeamD1 = 266.8 ft kip M RelBeamD1 := M RelBeamExt( Debond1)

M RelBeamD2 = 481.1 ft kip
M RelBeamD2 := M RelBeamExt( Debond2)
87
A5. Superstructure Loads at the Other Locations

At Support location DC Shear & Moment.........................
V DC.BeamExt( Support) = 89.9 kip V DW.BeamExt( Support ) = 4.6 kip V LLI.Exterior ( Support ) = 111.3 kip M DC.BeamExt( Support) = 0 ft kip M DW.BeamExt( Support) = 0 ft kip M LLI.Exterior ( Support) = 0 ft kip
Strength1 = 1.25 DC + 1.50 DW + 1.75 LL

V u.Support = 314.1 kip
V u.Support := 1.25 V DC.BeamExt( Support) ... + 1.50 V DW.BeamExt( Support) ... + 1.75 V LLI.Exterior ( Support)
( (
At Shear Check location DC Shear & Moment.........................

V DC.BeamExt( ShearChk) = 80.8 kip V DW.BeamExt( ShearChk) = 4.2 kip V LLI.Exterior ( ShearChk) = 104.9 kip M DC.BeamExt( ShearChk) = 319.9 ft kip M DW.BeamExt( ShearChk) = 16.7 ft kip M LLI.Exterior ( ShearChk) = 353.6 ft kip
Strength1 = 1.25 DC + 1.50 DW + 1.75 LL

V u = 291.0 kip
V u := 1.25 V DC.BeamExt( ShearChk) ... + 1.50 V DW.BeamExt( ShearChk) ... + 1.75 V LLI.Exterior ( ShearChk)
M r = 1043.8 ft kip
) M r := 1.25 ( MDC.BeamExt( ShearChk) ) ... + 1.50 ( MDW.BeamExt( ShearChk) ) ... + 1.75 ( MLLI.Exterior ( ShearChk) )
( (
88
B. Interior Beam Midspan Moment Design

B1. Strand Pattern definition at Midspan
Using the following schematic, the proposed strand pattern at the midspan section can be defined.
Support = 0 ft
ShearChk = 3.8 ft
Debond1 = 8 ft
Debond2 = 16 ft
Midspan = 44.08 ft
Strand pattern at midspan Strand type....................

strandtype = "LowLax" strandtype := "LowLax" (Note : Options ( "LowLax" "StressRelieved" )
Strand size.....................
stranddia = 0.5 in
stranddia := 0.5 in
(Note : Options ( 0.5 in 0.5625 in 0.6 in )
Strand area....................
2
StrandArea :=
in 0.192 if stranddia = 0.5625 in 0.217 if stranddia = 0.6 in 0.0 otherwise 0.153 if stranddia = 0.5 in
89
Define the number of strands and eccentricity of strands from bottom of beam......
BeamType = "IV"
MIDSPAN Strand Pattern Data

Rows of strand Number of from bottom of Input strands beam (inches) per row MIDSPAN 19 0 y9 = n9 = 17 0 y8 = n8 = 15 0 y7 = n7 = 13 0 y6 = n6 = 11 0 y5 = n5 = 9 7 y4 = n4 = 7 11 y3 = n3 = 5 11 y2 = n2 = 3 11 y1 = n1 = 5.70 Total strands = 40 Strand c.g. =

Aps = 6.1 in
2
Aps := strands total StrandArea
Transformed section properties As per SDG 4.3.1-C6, states "Stress and camber calculations for the design of simple span, pretensioned components must be based upon the use of transformed section properties." Modular ratio between the prestressing strand and beam. ...................................
np = 6.825 Ep np := Ec.beam Anc.tr := Anc + np 1 Aps ybnc Anc + strandcg in np 1 Aps Anc.tr
Non-composite area transformed.............

Anc.tr = 824.6 in
2
Non-composite neutral axis transformed...

ybnc.tr = 23.9 in
ybnc.tr :=
Non-composite inertia transformed...........

Inc.tr = 272558.1 in
4
Inc.tr := Inc + ybnc.tr strandcg in np 1 Aps Inc.tr Stopnc.tr := hnc ybnc.tr Inc.tr Sbotnc.tr := ybnc.tr
)2 (
Non-composite section modulus top.........

Stopnc.tr = 9057.3 in
3
Non-composite section modulus bottom....

Sbotnc.tr = 11400.6 in
3
90
Modular ratio between the mild reinforcing and transformed concrete deck slab..........
nm = 6.944
Es nm := Ec.beam
2
Assumed area of reinforcement in deck slab per foot width of deck slab...............
in Adeck.rebar := 0.62 ft ybar := h t mill
(Note : Assuming #5 at 12" spacing, top and bottom longitudinally).
Distance from bottom of beam to rebar....

ybar = 67 in
t slab 2
Total reinforcing steel within effective width of deck slab..................................

Abar = 5.22 in
2
Abar := b eff.exterior Adeck.rebar
Composite area transformed....................

Atr = 1548 in
2
Atr := AExterior + np 1 Aps + nm 1 Abar
Composite neutral axis transformed..........

yb.tr = 40 in
yb AExterior + strandcg in (np 1 ) Aps ... + ybar ( nm 1 ) Abar yb.tr := A

tr Itr := IExterior + yb.tr strandcg in np 1 Aps ... + yb.tr ybar nm 1 Abar Itr Sslab.tr := h yb.tr
Composite inertia transformed..................

Itr = 759063.4 in
4
) (
2
)2 (
Composite section modulus top of slab.......................................................

Sslab.tr = 33009.2 in
3
Composite section modulus top of beam.....................................................

Stop.tr = 23724 in
3
Itr Stop.tr := h yb.tr tslab tmill hbuildup
Composite section modulus bottom of beam.....................................................

Sbot.tr = 18974.5 in
3
Itr Sbot.tr := yb.tr
B2. Prestressing Losses [LRFD 5.9.5]

For prestressing members, the total loss, fpT , is expressed as:
fpT = fpF + fpA + fpES + fpSR + fpCR + fpR2
91
where...
friction loss................... anchorage set loss.......... elastic shortening loss..... shrinkage loss................ creep of concrete loss.... relaxation of steel loss.....
fpF fpA fpES fpSR fpCR fpR2
(Note : Not considered for bonded prestressed beams) (Note : Not considered for bonded prestressed beams)
For the prestress loss calculations, gross section properties (not transformed) can be used.
Elastic Shortening The loss due to elastic shortening in pretensioned members shall be taken as:
fpES = f Eci cgp Ep
where...
Modulus of elasticity of concrete at transfer of prestress force.......................................

Eci.beam = 3735.2 ksi
Modulus elasticity of prestressing steel.....

Ep = 28500 ksi
Eccentricity of strands at midspan for non-composite section............................

ecg.nc = 19 in
ecg.nc := ybnc strandcg in
Section modulus at the strand c.g for the non-composite section............................

Scg.nc = 13701.6 in
3
Inc Scg.nc := ecg.nc
Stress in prestressing steel prior to transfer

fps = 189 ksi
fps := 0.70 fpu
Corresponding total prestressing force......

Fps = 1156.7 kip
Fps := Aps fps
Concrete stresses at c.g. of the prestressing force at transfer and the self wt of the beam at maximum moment location..................
fcgp = 2.36 ksi
Fps Fps ecg.nc MRelBeam fcgp := + Anc Scg.nc Scg.nc fpES := f Eci.beam cgp Ep
Losses due to elastic shortening...............

fpES = 18 ksi
92
Shrinkage Loss in prestress due to shrinkage may be estimated as:

fpSR = ( 17.0 0.150 H) ksi
where
Average annual relative humidity..............

H = 75 fpSR := ( 17.0 0.150 H) ksi
Losses due to shrinkage..........................

fpSR = 5.8 ksi
Creep Prestress loss due to creep may be taken as:

fpCR = 12 fcgp 7 fcdp 0
Eccentricity of strands at midspan for composite section...................................

ecg = 34.6 in
ecg := yb strandcg in
Section modulus at the strand c.g for the composite section...................................

Scg = 20093 in
3
Scg :=
IExterior ecg
Permanent load moments at midspan acting on non-composite section (except beam at M nc := MSlab + M Forms transfer)................................................
M nc = 911.8 kip ft
Permanent load moments at midspan acting on M := M Trb + M Fws + M Utility composite section...................................
M = 340.4 kip ft
Concrete stresses at c.g. of the prestressing force due to permanent loads except at transfer.................................................
fcdp = 1 ksi
M nc M fcdp := + Scg.nc Scg fpCR := max 12 fcgp 7 fcdp , 0 ksi
Losses due to creep................................

fpCR = 21.3 ksi
93
Steel Relaxation at Transfer Prestress loss due to relaxation loss of the prestressing steel at transfer may be taken as:
fpR1 =
where,
log(24.0 t) fpj 0.55 fpj if strandtype = "StressRelieved" 10.0 fpy log(24.0 t) fpj 40.0 f 0.55 fpj if strandtype = "LowLax" py
Time estimated (in days) between stressing and transfer...........................................

t = 1.5 days
t := 1.5
Initial stress in tendon at time of stressing (jacking force) [LRFD Table 5.9.3.1]......
fpj = 202.5 ksi
fpj :=
(0.70 fpu) (0.75 fpu)
(Note : LRFD C5.9.5.4.4b allows fpj = 0.80 fpu for this calculation)
Specified yield strength of the prestressing steel [LRFD 5.4.4.1]..............................

fpy = 243 ksi
fpy :=
( 0.85 fpu) ( 0.90 fpu)
Losses due to steel relaxation at transfer...

fpR1 :=
log( 24.0 t ) fpj 10.0 f 0.55 fpj if strandtype = "StressRelieved" py f log( 24.0 t ) pj 0.55 fpj if strandtype = "LowLax" 40.0 fpy
fpR1 = 2.2 ksi
Steel Relaxation after Transfer Prestress loss due to relaxation loss of the prestressing steel after transfer may be taken as:
fpR2 =
20.0 0.4 fpES 0.2 ( fpSR + fpCR) if strandtype = "StressRelieved" 20.0 0.4 fpES 0.2 ( fpSR + fpCR) (30 %) if strandtype = "LowLax"
94
where, Losses due to steel relaxation after transfer

fpR2 :=
20.0 ksi 0.4 fpES 0.2 (fpSR + fpCR) if strandtype = "StressRelieved" 20.0 ksi 0.4 fpES 0.2 (fpSR + fpCR) ( 30 %) if strandtype = "LowLax"
fpR2 = 2.2 ksi
Total Prestress Loss The total loss, fpT , is expressed as........

fpT = 47.2 ksi fpT := fpES + fpSR + fpCR + fpR2
Percent loss of strand force.....................

Loss = 23.3 %
Loss :=
fpT fpj
B3. Stress Limits (Compression = +, Tension = -)

Initial Stresses [SDG 4.3] Limit of tension in top of beam at release (straight strand only) Outer 15 percent of design beam........ Center 70 percent of design beam...... Limit of compressive concrete strength at release...................................................
ftop.outer15 = 0.76 ksi ftop.center70 = 0.38 ksi
fci.beam = 5.2 ksi
For prestressing members, the total loss, fpT , at release is expressed as:
fpTRelease = fpES + fpR1
where...
elastic shortening loss..... relaxation of steel loss at transfer.........................
fpES fpR1 fpTRelease := fpES + fpR1

95

Fpj = 1239.3 kip
Fpj := fpj Aps

fpe = 182.3 ksi
Fpe = 1115.6 kip Fpe := fpe Aps

pjSupport = 0.97 ksi
pjSupport :=
Fpe Fpe ecg.nc Stnc Anc

MRelBeam Stnc +
Stress at top of beam at center 70%.........

pjTop70 = 0.13 ksi
pjTop70 :=

+
Stress at bottom of beam at center 70%...

pjBotBeam = 2.5 ksi
pjBotBeam :=
M RelBeam Sbnc
96
pjSupport :=
"OK" if pjSupport 0 ksi pjSupport ftop.outer15 "OK" if pjSupport > 0 ksi pjSupport fci.beam "NG" otherwise
where ftop.outer15 = 0.76 ksi where fci.beam = 5.2 ksi
pjSupport = "NG"
(Note : Debonding will be required).
Top70Release :=
"OK" if pjTop70 0 ksi pjTop70 ftop.center70 "OK" if pjTop70 > 0 ksi pjTop70 fci.beam "NG" otherwise
where ftop.center70 = 0.38 ksi where fci.beam = 5.2 ksi
Top70Release = "OK" BotRelease := "OK" if pjBotBeam fci.beam "NG" if pjBotBeam 0 ksi "NG" otherwise BotRelease = "OK"
where fci.beam = 5.2 ksi
(Note : Some MathCad equation explanations The check for the top beam stresses checks to see if tension is present, pjTop70 0 ksi , and then applies the proper allowable. A separate line is used for the compression and tension allowables. The last line, "NG" otherwise , is a catch-all statement such that if the actual stress is not within the allowables, it is considered "NG".) For the bottom beam, the first line, pjBotBeam fci.beam , checks that the allowable compression is not exceeded. The second line assures that no tension is present, if there is then the variable will be set to "NG". The catch-all statement, "NG" otherwise , will be ignored since the first line was satisfied. If the stress were to exceed the allowable, neither of the first two lines will be satisfied therefore the last line would produce the answer of "NG".
Final Stresses [LRFD Table 5.9.4.2.1-1 & 5.9.4.2.2-1] (1) Sum of effective prestress and permanent loads Limit of compression in slab..............

(2) Sum of live load and 1/2 sum of effective prestress and permanent loads Limit of compression in slab..............
97

(3) Sum of effective prestress, permanent loads and transient loads

(Note : The engineer is reminded that this check needs to be made also for stresses during shipping and handling. For purposes of this design example, this calculation is omitted).
Limit of compression in slab..............

fallow3.TopSlab = 2.70 ksi
fallow3.TopSlab := 0.60 fc.slab

(4) Tension at bottom of beam only Limit of tension in bottom of beam.....

fallow4.BotBeam :=
(0.0948 fc.beamksi) if Environmentsuper = "Extremely" (0.19 fc.beam ksi) otherwise

(Note : For not worse than moderate corrosion conditions.) Environmentsuper = "Slightly"
fallow4.BotBeam = 0.48 ksi
B4. Service I and III Limit States

At service, check the stresses of the beam at for compression and tension. In addition, the forces in the strands after losses need to be checked. The actual stress in strand after all losses have occured.........................................
fpe = 155.3 ksi fpe := fpj fpT
Allowable stress in strand after all losses have occured.........................................

fpe.Allow = 194.4 ksi LRFD 5.9.3 :=
fpe.Allow := 0.80 fpy
"OK, stress at service after losses satisfied" if fpe fpe.Allow "NG, stress at service after losses not satisfied" otherwise
LRFD 5.9.3 = "OK, stress at service after losses satisfied"
98
Calculate the stress due to prestress at the top of slab, top of beam and bottom of beam: Total force of strands.............................
Fpe = 950.3 kip Fpe Anc.tr Fpe Anc.tr Fpe ecg.nc Stopnc.tr Fpe ecg.nc Sbotnc.tr Fpe := fpe Aps
Stress at top of beam..............................

peTopBeam = 0.84 ksi
peTopBeam :=
Stress at bottom of beam.........................

peBotBeam = 2.74 ksi
peBotBeam :=
Service I Limit State The compressive stresses in the top of the beam will be checked for the following conditions: (1) Sum of effective prestress and permanent loads (2) Sum of live load and 1/2 sum of effective prestress and permanent loads (3) Sum of effective prestress and permanent loads and transient loads
(Note : Transient loads can include loads during shipping and handling. For purposes of this design example, these loads are omitted).
(1) Sum of effective prestress and permanent loads. The stress due to permanent loads can be calculated as follows: Stress in top of slab..........................
1 TopSlab = 0.12 ksi 1 TopBeam := M Beam + M Slab + MForms Stopnc.tr M Trb + M Fws + M Utility Stop.tr ... ... 1 TopSlab := M Trb + M Fws + M Utility Sslab.tr

+ peTopBeam TopSlab1 := if 1 TopSlab fallow1.TopSlab , "OK" , "NG"

TopSlab1 = "OK"
) )


TopBeam1 = "OK"
99
(2) Sum of live load and 1/2 sum of effective prestress and permanent loads Stress in top of slab..........................
2 TopSlab = 0.80 ksi MLLI 2 TopBeam := 0.5 1 TopBeam + Stop.tr M LLI 2 TopSlab := 0.5 1 TopSlab + Sslab.tr


TopSlab2 = "OK"
) )


TopBeam2 = "OK"
(3) Sum of effective prestress, permanent loads and transient loads Stress in top of slab..........................
3 TopSlab = 0.86 ksi M LLI 3 TopSlab := 1 TopSlab + Sslab.tr MLLI 3 TopBeam := 1 TopBeam + Stop.tr


TopSlab3 = "OK"
) )


TopBeam3 = "OK"
Service III Limit State total stresses (4) Tension at bottom of beam only Stress in bottom of beam..................
4 BotBeam = 0.31 ksi 4 BotBeam :=
MBeam MSlab M Forms ... ... Sbotnc.tr MTrb MFws MUtility + Sbot.tr
+ peBotBeam + 0.8 M LLI Sbot.tr
100
Check bottom beam stresses.............

BotBeam4 = "OK"
BotBeam4 := if 4 BotBeam fallow4.BotBeam , "OK" , "NG"
where fallow4.BotBeam = 0.48 ksi
B5. Strength I Limit State moment capacity [LRFD 5.7.3]

Strength I Limit State design moment.......
M r = 1043.8 ft kip
Factored resistance
M r = Mn
a hf a a a M n = Aps fps dp + As fy ds 2 A' s f'y d's 2 + 0.85 f'c b b w 1 hf 2 2 2
For a rectangular, section without compression reinforcement,

a a M n = Aps fps dp 2 + As fy ds 2 c= Aps fpu + As fy fpu 0.85 f'c 1 b + k Aps dp
where a = 1 c and
In order to determine the average stress in the prestressing steel to be used for moment capacity, a factor "k" needs to be computed. Value for "k"..........................................
k = 0.28 k := 2 1.04
fpy fpu
fc.beam 4000 psi , 0.65 1000 psi

1 = 0.73
1 := max0.85 0.05
Distance from the compression fiber to cg of prestress...........................................

dp = 57.3 in
dp := h strandcg in
Area of reinforcing mild steel...................

As = 0 in
2
As := 0 in
(Note : For strength calculations, deck reinforcement is conservatively ignored.)
Distance from compression fiber to reinforcing mild steel...............................

ds = 0 in
ds := 0 in
101
Distance between the neutral axis and compressive face...................................

c = 4.8 in
c :=
Aps fpu + As fy fpu 0.85 fc.beam 1 b tr.exterior + k Aps dp
Depth of equivalent stress block...............

a = 3.5 in
a := 1 c
Average stress in prestressing steel...........

fps = 263.7 ksi
c fps := fpu 1 k d p
Resistance factor for tension and flexure of prestressed members [LRFD 5.5.4.2]......
' = 1.00
Moment capacity provided......................

M r.prov = 7471.7 ft kip
M r.prov := ' Aps fps dp
a 2
+ As fy ds
a 2
Check moment capacity provided exceeds required.................................................

Moment Capacity = "OK"
Moment Capacity :=
"OK" if Mr.prov M r "NG" otherwise

where Mr = 1043.8 ft kip

de = 57.3 in
de :=
The
c de
LRFD 5.7.3.3.1 :=
c de
0.42
102
fr = 0.6 ksi fr := 0.24 fc.beam ksi
Stress in bottom of beam from Service III........................................................

4 BotBeam = 0.31 ksi
Additional amount of stress causing cracking................................................

= 0.3 ksi
:= 4 BotBeam fr
Section modulus to bottom of beam.........

Sb = 17070.1 in
3
Additional amount of moment causing cracking................................................

M = 434.3 kip ft
M := Sb
Service III load case moments.................

M Srv3 = 3678.6 ft kip
Moment due to prestressing provided.......

M ps = 1506.9 ft kip
M ps := Fpe ecg.nc
) )
Cracking moment...................................
M cr = 2606 ft kip
M cr := M Srv3 + Mps + M

Check that the capacity provided, Mr.prov = 7471.7 ft kip , exceeds minimum requirements, Mr.reqd = 1388.3 ft kip .
LRFD 5.7.3.3.2 := "OK, minimum reinforcement for positive moment is satisfied" if Mr.prov M r.reqd "NG, reinforcement for positive moment is less than minimum" otherwise LRFD 5.7.3.3.2 = "OK, minimum reinforcement for positive moment is satisfied"
103
C. Interior Beam Debonding Requirements

C1. Strand Pattern definition at Support
Define the number of strands and eccentricity of strands from bottom of beam at Support = 0 ft
Strand c.g. =
SUPPORT Strand Pattern Data

Number of strands per row SUPPORT n9 = n8 = n7 = n6 = n5 = n4 = n3 = n2 = n1 =
Total
beam (inches)
per row MIDSPAN n9 = n8 = n7 = n6 = n5 = n4 = n3 = n2 = n1 = 0 0 0 0 0 7 11 11 11
COMMENTS
0 0 0 0 0 7 11 9 9 36
40 strands =

2
Aps.Support := strandstotal StrandArea
C2. Stresses at support at release


Fpj = 1115.4 kip
Fpj := fpj Aps.Support

fpe = 182.3 ksi
Fpe = 1004 kip Fpe := fpe Aps.Support

pjTopEnd = 0.87 ksi
pjTopEnd :=
104
Stress at bottom of beam at support...

pjBotEnd = 3.08 ksi
pjBotEnd :=
TopRelease :=
"OK" if pjTopEnd 0 ksi pjTopEnd ftop.outer15 "OK" if pjTopEnd > 0 ksi pjTopEnd fci.beam "NG" otherwise
TopRelease = "NG"
(Note : See Sect D3 - By inspection, if the factor to account for the strand force varying up to the transfer length of the strands is applied, the stresses at the top will be within the allowable limit.)
BotRelease :=
"OK" if pjBotEnd fci.beam "NG" if pjBotEnd 0 ksi "NG" otherwise
BotRelease = "OK"

Strand c.g. =

Total
beam (inches)
per row MIDSPAN SUPPORT n9 = n8 = n7 = n6 = n5 = n4 = n3 = n2 = n1 = 0 0 0 0 0 7 11 11 11 40 0 0 0 0 0 7 11 9 9
COMMENTS
0 0 0 0 0 7 11 11 9 38
36 strands =

2

105

Fpj = 1177.3 kip

fpe = 182.3 ksi

pjTop15 = 0.56 ksi
pjTop15 :=
Fpe Fpe ecg.nc Anc Stnc

+

pjBotBeam :=
M RelBeamD1 Sbnc
pjTop15 :=
pjTop15 = "OK"
BotRelease :=
BotRelease = "OK"
106

Rows of strand from bottom of Input beam (inches) y9 = y8 = y7 = y6 = y5 = y4 = y3 = y2 = y1 =
Strand c.g. =
Numbe r of strands

Total
per MIDSPAN SUPPORT DEBOND1 n9 = n8 = n7 = n6 = n5 = n4 = n3 = n2 = n1 = 0 0 0 0 0 7 11 11 11 40 0 0 0 0 0 7 11 9 9 36 0 0 0 0 0 7 11 11 9
COMMENTS
19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 5.70
0 0 0 0 0 7 11 11 11 40 All strands are active beyond this point
38 strands =

2


Fpj = 1239.3 kip

fpe = 182.3 ksi

pjTop15 = 0.32 ksi
pjTop15 :=
107

pjBotBeam :=
M RelBeamD2 Sbnc
pjTop15 :=
pjTop15 = "OK"
BotRelease :=
BotRelease = "OK"
108
D. Shear Design
The nominal shear resistance, Vn, shall be determined as the lesser of:
V n = V c + V s + Vp V n = 0.25 f'c b v dv
The shear resistance of a concrete member may be separated into a component, V c , that relies on tensile stresses in the concrete, a component, V s , that relies on tensile stresses in the transverse reinforcement, and a component, V p , that is the vertical component of the prestressing force. Nominal shear resistance of concrete section.................................................. Nominal shear resistance of shear reinforcement section.............................. Nominal shear resistance from prestressing for straight strands (non-draped)..............
V c = 0.0316 fc b v dv Vs = Av fy dv cot( ) s
V p := 0 kip

dv = 45.4 in or dv = 3.8 ft
d a , 0.9 d , 0.72 h dv := max s s 2
(Note : This location is the same location as previously estimated for ShearChk = 3.8 ft .)
D2. and Parameters [LRFD 5.8.3.4.2]

Tables are give in LRFD to determine from the longitudinal strain and be calculated.
Mu v f'c
parameter, so these values need to
Longitudinal strain for sections with prestressing and transverse reinforcement.
x =
dv
+ 0.5 V u cot( ) Aps fpo 2 Es As + Ep Aps
b v := b w dv = 3.8 ft
where b v = 8 in
109
Factor indicating ability of diagonally cracked concrete to transmit tension.. Angle of inclination for diagonal compressive stresses........................
(Note : Values of = 2 and = 45 deg cannot be assumed since beam is prestressed.)
LRFD Table 5.8.3.4.2-1 presents values of and for sections with transverse reinforcement . LRFD C5.8.3.4.2 states that data given by the table may be used over a range of values. Linear interpolation may be used, but is not recommended for hand calculations.
The longitudinal strain and
v f'c
parameter are calculated for the appropriate critical sections.
The shear stress on the concrete shall be determined as [LRFD equation 5.8.2.9-1]:
v= V u V p b v dv
Factored shear force at the critical section

V u = 291 kip
Shear stress on the section......................

v = 0.89 ksi
v :=
V u v V p v b v dv
Parameter for locked in difference in strain between prestressing tendon and concrete.
fpo = 189 ksi
fpo := 0.7 fpu
110
The prestressing strand force becomes effective with the transfer length..............
Ltransfer = 2.5 ft
Ltransfer := 60 stranddia
Since the transfer length, Ltransfer = 2.5 ft , is less than the shear check location, ShearChk = 3.8 ft , from the end of the beam, the full force of the strands are effective. Factored moment on section....................
M u = 1100 ft kip M u := max M r , V u dv
:= 23.3 deg Mu + 0.5 V u cot( ) Aps.Support fpo 2 Es As + Ep Aps.Support
x = 1.31
x :=
dv
( 1000)
Since the strain value is negative, the strain needs to be recalculated as per LRFD equation 5.8.3.4.2-3:
Mu + 0.5 V u cot( ) Aps fpo
whereas
ex =
dv
2 Ec Ac + Es As + Ep Aps
)
(Note : The non-composite area of the beam is divided by its height, then multiplied by one-half of the composite section height).
Area of the concrete on the tension side of the member...........................................

Ac = 460.2 in
2
Anc h Ac := hnc 2
Recalculating the strain,

Mu + 0.5 V u cot( ) Aps.Support fpo
x :=
2 Ec.beam Ac + Es As + Ep Aps.Support
dv
( 1000)
x = 0.10 v f'c
parameter.......................................
v fc.beam
= 0.137
111
= 23.3 deg

:= 2.79

V c = 81.6 kip
V c := 0.0316 fc.beam ksi bv dv
Stirrups Size of stirrup bar ( "4" "5" "6" )...

bar := "5" Av = 0.620 in
2
Area of shear reinforcement.................... Diameter of shear reinforcement..............
dia = 0.625 in

Vn = Vc + Vp + Vs
where.............................................
V n = 323.3 kip
V n := min
Vu v
, 0.25 fc.beam b v dv + V p
and.................................................
V s = 241.8 kip
V s := V n V c V p

smin = 57.7 in smin := Av fy 0.0316 b v fc.beam ksi

sreq = 16.2 in
Av fy dv cot( ) Vs

s = 16.2 in
112

smax := if
V u v V p < 0.125 fc.beam , min( 0.8 dv , 24 in) , min(0.4 dv , 12 in) v (b v dv)
smax = 12 in

spacing = 12.0 in

For sections not subjected to torsion, longitudinal reinforcement shall be proportioned so that at each section the tensile capacity of the reinforcement on the flexural tension side of the member, taking into account any lack of full development of that reinforcement.

T= Mu dv b +
V s := min Mu dv
where.............................................
V s = 323.3 kip
+
and.................................................
T = 698.7 kip
T :=
At the shear check location Longitudinal reinforcement, previously computed for positive moment design.......
2

TpsShearChk = 1004 kip
TpsShearChk := Aps.Support fpe
LRFD 5.8.3.5 :=
"Ok, positive moment longitudinal reinforcement is adequate" if TpsShearChk T "NG, positive moment longitudinal reinforcement provided" otherwise
At the support location
113

T= Mu dv b +
V s := min
where Mu = 0 ft kip
where.............................................
V s = 326.5 kip
and.................................................
T = 431.3 kip
T :=
In determining the tensile force that the reinforcement is expected to resist at the inside edge of the bearing area, the values calculated at dv = 3.8 ft from the face of the support may be used. Note that the force is greater due to the contribution of the moment at dv. For this example, the actual values at the face of the support will be used. Longitudinal reinforcement, previously computed for positive moment design.......
2
The prestressing strand force is not all effective at the support area due to the transfer length required to go from zero force to maximum force. A factor will be applied that takes this into account. Transfer length...................................... Distance from center line of bearing to end of beam.......................................... Estimated length of bearing pad...............
Ltransfer = 30 in J = 6 in Lpad := 12 in (Note ! - this dimension needs to be increased since the edge of pad should be about 1-1/2" from the edge of the beam. Override and use the following: J := 8.5 in ) Lpad 2
Determine the force effective at the inside edge of the bearing area.
J+ Factor :=
Factor to account for effective force........

Factor = 0.5
Ltransfer

114
(Note : The location of the bearing pad had to be moved in order to satisfy this criteria. It will now provide 2-1/2" from the edge of the pad to the end of the beam. The engineer needs to assure that this is properly detailed and adhered to in the plans).
Several important design checks were not performed in this design example (to reduce the length of calculations). However, the engineer should assure that the following has been done at a minimum: Design for interface steel Design for anchorage steel Design for camber Design check for beam transportation loads Design for fatigue checks when applicable
E. Summary
Defined Units
115
Empirical Deck Design
References
Description
This section provides the criteria for the empirical deck design. This section does not include the overhang design.
Page
117
Contents
A. Design Parameters A1. Concrete Deck Slabs - Empirical Design [SDG 4.2.4 A] A2. Deck Slab Design [SDG 4.2.4] A3. Skewed Decks A4. Proposed Reinforcing Details
119
B. Empirical Deck Design Conditions [LRFD 9.7.2] B1. Conditions B2. Summary
2.06 Empirical Deck Design
116
A. Design Parameters
A1. Concrete Deck Slabs - Empirical Design [SDG 4.2.4 A]
Reinforcement Requirements [SDG 4.2.4] supercede [LRFD 9.7.2.5]
A2. Deck Slab Design [SDG 4.2.4]

Top and bottom reinforcement for deck slab "Use #5 bars @ 12 inch spacing in both directions" Additional top reinforcement for overhang "Use 2-#5 bars @ 4 inch spacing"
A3. Skewed Decks

The skew influences the amount of reinforcement
Skew = 30 deg
Transverse steel "Perpendicular to CL of span " Top reinforcement for deck slab along skew "Use 3 #5 bars @ 6 inch spacing" Top and bottom longitudinal reinforcement for deck slab at skew "Use #5 bars @ 6 inch spacing, BeamSpacing distance"
A4. Proposed Reinforcing Details
117
118
B. Empirical Deck Design Conditions [LRFD 9.7.2]

B1. Conditions
The empirical deck design may be used if the following conditions are satisfied. The conditions are "TRUE" , "FALSE" , or "NA" . Cross-frames or diaphragms are used at the supports...................................................... This condition applies to cross-sections with torsionally stiff units, such as individual, separated box beams, therefore not applicable for prestressed beams................................... The supporting components are made of steel and/or concrete............................................
Condition := "TRUE" 0
Condition := "NA" 1 Condition := "TRUE" 2 Condition := "TRUE" 3
The deck is fully cast-in-place and water cured..........................................................
The deck has a uniform depth, except for haunches at beam flanges and other local thickening.................................................... The ratio of effective length to design depth is between 6.0 and 18.0................................... Condition = "TRUE"
5
Ratio :=
( Slabeff.Length)
t slab
(Note : #5 Internally answered)
Ratio = 10.25 t core = 4.0 in
Core depth of the slab is not less than 4.0 in....

Condition = "TRUE" 6
The effective slab length does not exceed 13.5 ft................................................................ Condition = "TRUE"
7
Slabeff.Length = 6.833 ft
The minimum slab depth is not less than 7.0 in, excluding a sacrificial wearing surface............ Condition = "TRUE"
8
t slab = 8 in
119
The slab overhang beyond the centerline of the outside girder is at least 5.0 times the slab depth. This condition is also satisfied if the overhang is at least 3.0 times the slab depth and a structurally continuous concrete barrier is made composite with the overhang................. Condition = "TRUE"
9
The specified 28-day compressive strength of the deck concrete is not less than 4.0 ksi........ Condition = "TRUE"
10
fc.slab = 4.5 ksi
The deck is made composite with the supporting structural components. For concrete beams, stirrups extending into the deck is sufficient to satisfy this requirement....
B2. Summary
If all the above conditions are satisfied, then the reinforcing in Section A2 is applicable. If all the conditions are not satisfied, then the deck slab shall be designed by the traditional deck design. For deck overhangs, the empirical deck design is not applicable, so the traditional deck design is used for all deck overhang designs.
EmpiricalDesignSummary =
"Yes, crossframes or diaphragms are used at supports" "Yes, for box girders, intermediate diaphragms or supplemental reinforcement are provided" "Yes, steel girders or concrete beams are used" "Yes, deck is CIP and/or water cured" "Yes, deck has uniform depth, except for haunches" "Yes, effective length to depth criteria is satisfied" "Yes, core depth of slab is not less than 4 in" "Yes, effective slab length does not exceed 13.5 ft" "Yes, minimum slab depth is not less than 7 ft" "Yes, overhang is at least 5 times the depth of slab" "Yes, 28-day compressive strength of concrete is not less than 4 ksi" "Yes, deck is composite with supporting structural members"
Defined Units
120
Traditional Deck Design
References
Reference:F:\HDRDesignExamples\Ex1_PCBeam\206DeckEmp.mcd(R)
Description
This section provides the criteria for the traditional deck design.
Page
122 122 123 124
Contents
LRFD Criteria FDOT Criteria A. Input Variables B. Approximate Methods of Analysis - Decks [LRFD 4.6.2] B1. Width of Equivalent Interior Strips B2. HL-93 Live Load B3. Dead Load Design Moments B4. Design Moment Summary and Limit State Combinations:
130
C. Moment Design C1. Positive Moment Region Design - Flexural Resistance [LRFD 5.7.3.2] C2. Negative Moment Region Design - Flexural Resistance [LRFD 5.7.3.2] C3. Limits for Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.3.3] C4. Crack Control by Distribution Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.3.4] C5. Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement [LRFD 5.10.8.2] C6. Distribution of Reinforcement [LRFD 9.7.3.2] C7. Summary of Reinforcement Provided and Comparison with Empirical Design
2.07 Traditional Deck Design
121
LRFD Criteria
Live Loads - Application of Design Vehicular Live Loads - Deck Overhang Load [LRFD 3.6.1.3.4]
This section is not applicable for Florida designs, since the barriers are not designed as structurally continuous and composite with the deck slab.
Static Analysis - Approximate Methods of Analysis - Decks [LRFD 4.6.2.1] Deck Slab Design Table [LRFD Appendix A4]
Table A4.1-1 in Appendix 4 may be used to determine the design live load moments. STRENGTH I Basic load combination relating to the normal vehicular use of the bridge without wind.
WA , FR = 0 TU , CR , SH , FR = 0
For superstructure design, water load / stream pressure and friction forces are not applicable. Uniform temperature, creep, shrinkage are generally ignored.
Strength1 = 1.25 DC + 1.50 DW + 1.75 LL
SERVICE I -
BR , WS , WL = 0
For superstructure design, braking forces, wind on structure and wind on live load are not applicable.
Service1 = 1.0 DC + 1.0 DW + 1.0 LL
FATIGUE -
"Not applicable for deck slabs on multi-beam bridges"
FDOT Criteria
Skewed Decks [SDG 4.2.11 ]
Transverse steel..................................... Top reinforcement for deck slab along skew..................................................... Top and bottom longitudinal reinforcement for deck slab at skew..............................
"Perpendicular to CL of span "
"Use 3 #5 bars @ 6 inch spacing"
"Use #5 bars @ 6 inch spacing, BeamSpacing distance"
122
A. Input Variables
Bridge design span length........................ Number of beams................................... Beam Spacing........................................
Lspan = 90 ft N beams = 11 BeamSpacing = 8 ft S := BeamSpacing
Average Buildup..................................... Beam top flange width............................. Thickness of deck slab............................ Milling surface thickness......................... Deck overhang....................................... Dynamic Load Allowance........................ Bridge skew...........................................
hbuildup = 1 in b tf = 20 in t slab = 8 in t mill = 0 in Overhang = 4.542 ft IM = 1.33 Skew = 30 deg
123
B. Approximate Methods of Analysis - Decks [LRFD 4.6.2]

B1. Width of Equivalent Interior Strips
The deck is designed using equivalent strips of deck width. The equivalent strips account for the longitudinal distribution of LRFD wheel loads and are not subject to width limitations. The width in the transverse direction is calculated for both positive and negative moments. Width of equivalent strip for positive moment................................................
Epos = 78.8 in
26 + 6.6 Epos :=
ft
in
Width of equivalent strip for negative moment................................................

Eneg = 72.0 in
48 + 3.0 Eneg :=
S ft
in
The equivalent strips can be modeled as continuous beams on rigid supports, since typical AASHTO beam bridges do not have any transverse beams.
B2. Live Loads for Equivalent Strips

All HL-93 wheel loads shall be applied to the equivalent strip of deck width, since the spacing of supporting components in the secondary direction (longitudinal to beams) exceeds 1.5 times the spacing in the primary direction (transverse to beams).
124
HL-93 wheel load...................................

P := 16kip
HL-93 wheel load for negative moment.....

Pneg = 6.2 klf
P Pneg := ( 1 + IM) Eneg
HL-93 wheel load for positive moment.....

Ppos = 5.7 klf
P Ppos := ( 1 + IM) Epos
HL-93 lane load......................................

wlane := 0.64 klf
The lane load is applied over a 10 ft width for positive and negative moment.............
wlane.strip = 0.064 klf
wlane.strip :=
wlane 10
Location of Negative Live Load Design Moment The negative live load design moment is taken at a distance from the supports.......
Loc negative = 6.7 in 1 Loc negative := min 3 b tf , 15 in
HL-93 Live Load Design Moments Instead of performing a continuous beam analysis, Table A4.1-1 in Appendix 4 may be used to determine the live load design moments. The following assumptions and limitations should be considered when using these moments: The moments are calculated by applying the equivalent strip method to concrete slabs supported on parallel beams. Multiple presence factors and dynamic load allowance are included. The values are calculated according to the location of the design section for negative moments in the deck (LRFD 4.6.2.1.6). For distances between the listed values, interpolation may be used. The moments are applicable for decks supported by at least three beams with a width between the centerlines of the exterior beams of not less than 14.0 ft. The values represent the upper bound for moments in the interior regions of the slab. A minimum and maximum total overhang width from the center of the exterior girder are evaluated. The minimum is 21 in. and the maximum is the smaller of ( 0.625 BeamSpacing) and 6 ft.
125
A railing barrier width of 21.0 in. is used to determine the clear overhang width. Florida utilizes a railing width of 18.5 in. The difference in moments from the diifferent railing width is expected to be within acceptable limits for practical design. The moments do not apply to deck overhangs, which need to be designed according to the provisions of LRFD A13.4.1.
For this example.....................................

BeamSpacing = 8 ft Loc negative = 6.7 in
Positive Live Load Design Moment...........
M LL.pos := 5.69 ft kip
Negative Live Load Design Moment..........

M LL.neg = 4.62 ft kip
M LL.neg := ( 6.7in 6 in)
( 3.98 ft kip 4.81 ft kip ) ( 9 in 6 in)
+ 4.81 (ft kip )
(Note : Interpolated value)
126
B3. Dead Load Design Moments

Design width of deck slab.......................
b slab := 1ft
"DC" loads include the dead load of structural components and non-structural attachments Self-weight of deck slab....................
kip wslab = 0.100 ft wslab :=
( tslab + tmill) b slab conc
Weight of traffic barriers...................

Pbarrier = 0.4 kip
Pbarrier := wbarrier b slab
Weight of median barrier...................

Pmedian.barrier = 0.5 kip
Pmedian.barrier := wmedian.bar b slab
"DW" loads include the dead load of a future wearing surface and utilities Weight of Future Wearing Surface.....
wfws = 0.015 klf wfws := fws b slab
Analysis Model for Dead Loads
Any plane frame program can be utilized to develop the moments induced by the dead loads. For this example, Larsa was used to determine the dead load design moments for both the DC and DW loads.
127
Design Moments for DC Loads Positive Negative Moment (k-ft) Beam / Span Moment (k-ft) Center Left 1 0.05 -2.73 -2.26 2 0.52 0.03 0.04 3 0.21 -0.68 -0.43 4 0.28 -0.50 -0.31
Right -2.34 0.18 -0.47 -0.30
The governing negative design moment for DC loads occurs at beam 1. However, this moment is due to the overhang, which typically has more negative moment steel requirements than the interior regions of the deck. Since the overhang is designed separately, the overhang moments are not considered here. For the interior regions, the positive moment in Span 2 and the negative moment to the right of beam 3 govern. Positive moment............................... Negative moment.............................
M DC.pos := 0.52 kip ft M DC.neg := 0.47 kip ft
Positive Beam / Span Moment (k-ft) 1 0.04 2 0.04 3 0.04 4 0.04
Design Moments for DW Loads Negative Moment (k-ft) Center Left -0.07 -0.05 -0.08 -0.05 -0.08 -0.05 -0.08 -0.05
Right -0.04 -0.05 -0.05 -0.05
The DW moments are approximately constant for the negative and positive design moments. Positive moment............................... Negative moment..............................
M DW.pos := 0.04 kip ft M DW.neg := 0.05 kip ft
128
B4. Limit State Moments

The service and strength limit states are used to design the section Service I Limit State Positive Service I Moment.......................
M serviceI.pos = 6.3 kip ft M serviceI.pos := MDC.pos + M DW.pos + M LL.pos
Negative Service I Moment......................

M serviceI.neg = 5.1 kip ft
M serviceI.neg := M DC.neg + MDW.neg + MLL.neg
Strength I Limit State Positive Strength I Moment......................

M strengthI.pos = 10.7 kip ft M strengthI.pos := 1.25M DC.pos + 1.50 M DW.pos + 1.75 MLL.pos
Negative Strength I Moment....................

M strengthI.neg = 8.7 kip ft
M strengthI.neg := 1.25MDC.neg + 1.50 M DW.neg + 1.75 MLL.neg
129
C. Moment Design
A few recommendations on bar size and spacing are available to minimize problems during construction. The same size and spacing of reinforcing should be utilized for both the negative and positive moment regions. If this arrangement is not possible, the top and bottom reinforcement should be spaced as a multiple of each other. This pattern places the top and bottom bars in the same grid pattern, and any additional steel is placed between these bars.
The design procedure consists of calculating the reinforcement required to satisfy the design moment, then checking this reinforcement against criteria for crack control, minimum reinforcement, maximum reinforcement, shrinkage and temperature reinforcement, and distribution of reinforcement. The procedure is the same for both positive and negative moment regions.
C1. Positive Moment Region Design - Flexural Resistance [LRFD 5.7.3.2]

Factored resistance
M r = Mn
a hf a a a M n = Aps fps dp 2 + As fy ds 2 A' s f'y d's 2 + 0.85 f'c b b w 1 hf 2 2
Simplifying the nominal flexural resistance

a M n = As fy ds 2
where
a=
As fy 0.85 f'c b
Using variables defined in this example.....

M r := MstrengthI.pos fc.slab = 4.5 ksi fy = 60 ksi = 0.9 t slab = 8 in b := bslab
M r = As.pos fy ds
As.pos fy 2 0.85 fc.slab b

1
where
t slab = h
b = 12 in
Initial assumption for area of steel required Size of bar...................................... Proposed bar spacing.......................
bar := "5" spacingpos := 8 in
130
Bar area.......................................... Bar diameter....................................
Abar = 0.310 in dia = 0.625 in
Area of steel provided per foot of slab......

As.pos = 0.47 in
2
Abar 1 ft As.pos := spacingpos
Distance from extreme compressive fiber to centroid of reinforcing steel.....................

ds = 5.7 in
dia ds := t slab cover deck 2
Solve the quadratic equation for the area of steel required.........................................
Given
M r = As.pos fy ds
As.reqd := Find As.pos

1
Reinforcing steel required........................

2
As.reqd = 0.44 in
The area of steel provided, As.pos = 0.47 in , should be greater than the area of steel required, As.reqd = 0.44 in . If not, decrease the spacing of the reinforcement. Once As.pos is greater than As.reqd , the proposed reinforcing is adequate for the design moments.
C2. Negative Moment Region Design - Flexural Resistance [LRFD 5.7.3.2]
Variables:
M r := MstrengthI.neg fc.slab = 4.5 ksi fy = 60 ksi = 0.9 t slab = 8 in b := bslab b = 12 in t slab = h
Initial assumption for area of steel required Size of bar....................................... Proposed bar spacing....................... Bar area.......................................... Bar diameter....................................
bar = "5" spacingneg := 10 in Abar = 0.310 in dia = 0.625 in
2
131

As.neg = 0.37 in
2
Abar 1 ft As.neg := spacingneg
Distance from extreme compressive fiber to centroid of reinforcing steel.................

ds = 5.7 in
Given
M r = As.neg fy ds
As.reqd := Find As.neg
As.neg fy 2 0.85 fc.slab b

1
Reinforcing steel required........................

2
As.reqd = 0.36 in
2 2
The area of steel provided, As.neg = 0.37 in , should be greater than the area of steel required, As.reqd = 0.36 in . If not, decrease the spacing of the reinforcement. Once As.neg is greater than As.reqd , the proposed reinforcing is adequate for the design moments.
C3. Crack Control by Distribution Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.3.4]

Concrete is subjected to cracking. Limiting the width of expected cracks under service conditions increases the longevity of the structure. Potential cracks can be minimized through proper placement of the reinforcement. The check for crack control requires that the actual stress in the reinforcement should not exceed the service limit state stress (LRFD 5.7.3.4). The stress equations emphasize bar spacing rather than crack widths. Stress in the mild steel reinforcement at the service limit state
fsa = z
1
0.6 fy
( dcA)
Crack width parameter
"moderate exposure" 170 kip z = "severe exposure" 130 in "buried structures" 100
The environmental classifications for Florida designs do not match the classifications to select the crack width parameter. For this example, a "Slightly" or "Moderately" aggressive environment corresponds to "moderate exposure" and an "Extremely" aggressive environment corresponds to "severe exposure".
Environmentsuper = "Slightly" z := 170 kip in aggressive environment
132
Positive Moment Distance from extreme tension fiber to center of closest bar (concrete cover need not exceed 2 in.)....................................
dc = 2.313 in
dia dc := min tslab ds , 2 in + 2 b nbar := spacingpos
Number of bars per design width of slab...

nbar = 1.5
Effective tension area of concrete surrounding the flexural tension reinforcement........................................

A = 37.0 in
2
A :=
( b ) 2 dc nbar
)
, 0.6 fy
Service limit state stress in reinforcement..

fsa = 36.0 ksi
fsa := min
z
1
( d A) 3 c
The neutral axis of the section must be determined to determine the actual stress in the reinforcement. This process is iterative, so an initial assumption of the neutral axis must be made.
x := 1.6 in Given 1 2 b x =
2
Es Ec.slab
As.pos ds x
xna := Find( x) xna = 1.6 in
Compare the calculated neutral axis xna with the initial assumption x . If the values are not equal, adjust
x = 1.6 in to equal xna = 1.6 in.
Tensile force in the reinforcing steel due to service limit state moment. .....................
Ts = 14.572 kip
Ts :=
MserviceI.pos xna ds 3
Actual stress in the reinforcing steel due to service limit state moment.......................
fs.actual = 31.3 ksi
Ts fs.actual := As.pos
133
The service limit state stress in the reinforcement should be greater than the actual stress due to the service limit state moment.
LRFD 5.7.3.3.4a := "OK, crack control for +M is satisfied" if fs.actual fsa "NG, crack control for +M not satisfied, provide more reinforcement" otherwise LRFD 5.7.3.3.4a = "OK, crack control for +M is satisfied"
Negative Moment Distance from extreme tension fiber to center of closest bar (concrete cover need not exceed 2 in.)....................................
dc = 2.313 in
dia dc := min tslab ds , 2 in + 2 b nbar := spacingneg

nbar = 1.2

A = 46.3 in
2
A :=
( b ) 2 dc nbar

fsa = 35.8 ksi
fsa := min
z
1
( d A) 3 c
, 0.6 fy
x := 1.5 in Given 1 2 b x =
2
Es Ec.slab
As.neg ds x
Ts = 11.863 kip
Ts :=
MserviceI.neg xna ds 3
134
Ts fs.actual := As.neg
LRFD 5.7.3.3.4b := "OK, crack control for -M is satisfied" if fs.actual fsa "NG, crack control for -M not satisfied, provide more reinforcement" otherwise LRFD 5.7.3.3.4b = "OK, crack control for -M is satisfied"
C4. Limits for Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.3.3]

Maximum Reinforcement The maximum reinforcement requirements ensure the section has sufficient ductility and is not overreinforced. The greater reinforcement from the positive and negative moment sections is checked. Area of steel provided.............................
As = 0.47 in
2
As := max As.pos , As.neg

1 = 0.825
1 := max0.85 0.05
fc.slab 4000 psi , 0.65 1000 psi
Distance from extreme compression fiber to the neutral axis of section....................

c = 0.7 in
c :=
As fy 0.85 fc.slab 1 b
Effective depth from extreme compression fiber to centroid of the tensile reinforcement.
de = As fps dp + As fy ds Aps fps + As fy de := ds
Simplifying for this example..............

de = 5.7 in
Ratio for maximum reinforcement check

c de = 0.13
The
c de
ratio should be less than 0.42 to satisfy maximum reinforcement requirements.
135
LRFD 5.7.3.3.1 :=
"OK, maximum reinforcement requirements are satisfied" if "NG, section is over reinforced, so redesign!" otherwise
c de
0.42
LRFD 5.7.3.3.1 = "OK, maximum reinforcement requirements are satisfied"
fr = 509.1 psi fr := 0.24 fc.slab ksi
Distance from the extreme tensile fiber to the neutral axis of the composite section...
y = 4.0 in
y :=
tslab 2
Moment of inertia for the section.............

Islab = 512.0 in
4
1 3 Islab := b tslab 12
Section modulus.....................................
S = 128.0 in
3
S :=
Islab y
Cracking moment...................................
M cr = 5.4 kip ft
M cr := fr S
1.2 M cr
Minimum reinforcement required.............

Amin = 0.27 in
2
Amin :=
As fy 1 fy ds 2 0.85 fc.slab b
Required area of steel for minimum reinforcement should not be less than As 133% or Amin ..................................
As.req = 0.27 in
2
As.req := min As 133 % , Amin
Maximum bar spacing for mimimum reinforcement........................................

spacingmax = 13.8 in
spacingmax :=
As.req A bar
Greater bar spacing from positive and negative moment section.........................

spacing = 10 in
spacing := max spacingpos , spacingneg
136
The bar spacing should be less than the maximum bar spacing for minimum reinforcement
LRFD 5.7.3.3.2 := "OK, minimum reinforcement requirements are satisfied" if spacing spacingmax "NG, section is under-reinforced, so redesign!" otherwise LRFD 5.7.3.3.2 = "OK, minimum reinforcement requirements are satisfied"
C5. Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement [LRFD 5.10.8.2]

Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement provided Size of bar ( "4" "5" "6" )........ Bar spacing...................................... Bar area.......................................... Bar diameter.................................... Gross area of section..............................
Ag = 96.0 in
2
barst := "5" barspa.st := 12 in Abar = 0.31 in dia = 0.625 in Ag := bslab tslab

2
Minimum area of shrinkage and temperature reinforcement........................................

AST = 0.18 in
2
AST :=
0.11 ksi Ag fy
Maximum spacing for shrinkage and temperature reinforcement.......................

spacingST = 18.0 in
spacingST := min
b
AST Abar
, 3 tslab , 18 in
The bar spacing should be less than the maximum spacing for shrinkage and temperature reinforcement
LRFD 5.7.10.8 := "OK, minimum shrinkage and temperature requirements" if spacing spacingST "NG, minimum shrinkage and temperature requirements" otherwise LRFD 5.7.10.8 = "OK, minimum shrinkage and temperature requirements"
C6. Distribution of Reinforcement [LRFD 9.7.3.2]

The primary reinforcement is placed perpendicular to traffic, since the effective strip is perpendicular to traffic. Reinforcement shall also be placed in the secondary direction (parallel to traffic) for load distribution purposes. This reinforcement is placed in the bottom of the deck slab as a percentage of the primary reinforcement.
137
Distribution reinforcement provided Size of bar ( "4" "5" "6" )........ Bar spacing...................................... Bar area.......................................... Bar diameter....................................
bardist := "5" barspa.dist := 10 in Abar = 0.31 in dia = 0.625 in
2
The effective span length (LRFD 9.7.2.3) is the distance between the flange tips plus the flange overhang................................
Slabeff.Length = 6.833 ft
Slabeff.Length := BeamSpacing b w b tf b w 0.5
) (
The area for secondary reinforcement should not exceed 67% of the area for primary reinforcement............................
%Asteel = 0.67
%Asteel := min
220 Slabeff.Length ft
% , 67%
Required area for secondary reinforcement........................................

As.DistR = 0.31 in
2
As.DistR := As.pos %Asteel
Maximum spacing for secondary reinforcement........................................

MaxSpacing DistR = 11.9 in
MaxSpacing DistR :=
As.DistR A bar
The bar spacing should not exceed the maximum spacing for secondary reinforcement
LRFD 9.7.3.2 := "OK, distribution reinforcement requirements" if barspa.dist MaxSpacingDistR "NG, distribution reinforcement requirements" otherwise LRFD 9.7.3.2 = "OK, distribution reinforcement requirements"
138
C7. Summary of Reinforcement Provided and Comparison with Empirical Design

Transverse reinforcing Bar size Top spacing
bar = "5" spacingneg = 10.0 in
Bottom spacing spacingpos = 8.0 in Shrinkage and temperature reinforcing Bar size
barst = "5"
Bottom spacing barspa.st = 12.0 in

LRFD 5.7.10.8 = "OK, minimum shrinkage and temperature requirements"
Longitudinal Distribution reinforcing Bar size

bardist = "5"
Bottom spacing barspa.dist = 10.0 in

LRFD 9.7.3.2 = "OK, distribution reinforcement requirements"
A comparison per square foot of deck slab shows that the traditional design method requires about 22% more reinforcement than what is provided with the empirical design method. However, in order to improve constructability, reinforcing at top and bottom of the slab are kept at the same spacing (reduces field errors in placement). Therefore, the actual increase in the reinforcing versus the empirical design is about 34% for this design example.
Deck Slab Design Comparison

Empirical Design Traditional Design Bar size & spacing provided #5 @ 8" #5 @ 8" Area Provided / ft (in2) 0.46 0.46
Area Bar size & Area Bar size & Provided / ft spacing Required /ft spacing (in2) required (in2) Main Tranverse Reinforcing Top (transverse) Bottom (transverse) Shrinkage and Temperature Top (longitudinal) Distribution Steel Bottom (longitidinal) Comparison (reinforcing area per sf of slab) Ratios (Percentage)
Defined Units
#5 @12" #5 @12"
0.31 0.31
#5 @ 10" #5 @ 8"
0.37 0.46
#5 @12" #5 @12"
0.31 0.31 1.24 0%
#5 @12" #5 @10"
0.31 0.37 1.51 22%
#5 @10" #5 @10"
0.37 0.37 1.66 34%
139
Deck Overhang Design
References
Reference:F:\HDRDesignExamples\Ex1_PCBeam\207DeckTra.mcd(R)
Description
This section provides the overhang deck design.
Page
141 141 142 143
Contents
LRFD Criteria FDOT Criteria A. Input Variables B. Strength Limit State Design B1. Width of Equivalent Strip B2. Live Load Design Moment B3. Dead Load Design Moments B4. Limit State Moments
146
C. Moment Design C1. Negative Moment Region Design - Flexural Resistance [LRFD 5.7.3.2] C2. Crack Control by Distribution Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.3.4] C3. Limits for Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.3.3] C4. Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement [LRFD 5.10.8.2] C5. Summary
2.08 Deck Overhang Design
140
LRFD Criteria
Live Loads - Application of Design Vehicular Live Loads - Deck Overhang Load [LRFD 3.6.1.3.4]
This section is not applicable for Florida designs, since the barriers are not designed as structurally continuous and composite with the deck slab.
Static Analysis - Approximate Methods of Analysis - Decks [LRFD 4.6.2.1] Empirical Design - General - Application [LRFD 9.7.2.2]
The empirical deck design shall not be applied to overhangs.
Railings [LRFD Chapter 13] Deck Overhang Design [LRFD A13.4]
FDOT Criteria
Deck Slab Design [SDG 4.2.4]
The deck overhang shall be designed using the traditional design method. The deck overhangs are designed for three limit state conditions: Extreme event limit state - Transverse and longitudinal vehicular collision forces. Extreme event limit state - Vertical collision forces Strength limit state - Equivalent line load, DL + LL
The extreme event limit states can be satisfied by providing a minimum area of reinforcement in the deck overhang. The design method used for the deck slab influences the minimum reinforcement. Deck slab designed by the empirical design method
As.Overhang.Empirical := 0.92 in per foot of overhang slab
2
Deck slab designed by the traditional design method:

As.Overhang.Traditional := 0.80 in
2
per foot of overhang slab
In this example, the deck is designed using the empirical design method. (The traditional design method was presented only for comparison purposes.)
As.TL4 := As.Overhang.Empirical As.TL4 = 0.92 in per foot of overhang slab
2
Superstructure Components - Traffic Railings [SDG 6.7]

All new traffic railing barriers shall satisfy LRFD Chapter 13, TL-4 criteria.
141
A. Input Variables
Beam top flange width............................. Thickness of slab.................................... Milling surface thickness......................... Deck overhang....................................... Dynamic load allowance.........................
b tf = 20 in t slab = 8 in t mill = 0 in Overhang = 4.5417 ft IM = 1.33
Proposed reinforcement detail..................
142
B. Strength Limit State Design

B1. Width of Equivalent Strip
The overhang section is designed using equivalent strips of deck width. The strip is perpendicular to traffic and accounts for the longitudinal distribution of LRFD wheel loads. To calculate the equivalent width, the distance from the wheel load to the location of the negative live load moment must be determined.
Distance from center of exterior beam to location of overhang design moment.........

Loc negative = 6.7 in
1 b , 15 in Loc negative = min 3 tf
Distance from wheel load to location of overhang design moment........................

X = 1.444 ft
X := Overhang 1.5417 ft 1 ft Locnegative
Equivalent width of primary strip for overhang...............................................

Eoverhang = 59.4 in
Eoverhang := 45.0 + 10.0
X ft
in
B2. Live Load Design Moment

The live load design moment for the deck overhang is calculated using the LRFD HL-93 truck load and lane load. A one foot strip is utilized in the calculations. HL-93 wheel load................................... HL-93 wheel load for the overhang moment.................................................
Poverhang = 4.3 kip P = 16 kip
P Poverhang := ( IM) ( 1 ft) Eoverhang
143
HL-93 lane load..................................... Lane load for the overhang moment.........

wlane.overhang = 0.064 klf
wlane = 0.64 klf wlane.overhang := wlane 10
Moment arm for lane..............................

X LL = 2.4 ft
X LL := X + 1 ft
Live load design moment for deck overhang...............................................

M LL = 6.4 kip ft
M LL := Poverhang X +
wlane.overhang X LL 2
B3. Dead Load Design Moments

DC and DW dead loads are used for design. DC loads include the dead load of structural components and non-structural attachments. DW loads include the dead load of a future wearing surface and utilities. Design width of deck overhang...............
b overhang := 1ft
DC Loads Moment induced by self-weight of deck overhang Moment arm for overhang.................
X overhang = 4.0 ft X overhang := Overhang Loc negative
Self-weight of deck overhang............

kip woverhang = 0.100 ft
woverhang :=
( t slab + t mill) b overhang conc

2
Moment..........................................
M overhang = 0.8 ft kip
M overhang :=
woverhang X overhang 2
Moment induced by barrier load Moment arm for barrier....................

X barrier = 3.5 ft X barrier := Overhang Locnegative
1.5417 ft 3
Barrier load......................................
Pbarrier = 0.4 kip
Pbarrier := wbarrier b overhang
Moment..........................................
M barrier = 1.5 ft kip
M barrier := Pbarrier X barrier
144
Moment induced by DC loads..................

M DC = 2.3 kip ft
M DC := M overhang + Mbarrier
DW Loads Moment induced by future wearing surface Moment arm for future wearing surface...........................................
X fws = 2.4 ft X fws := Overhang Locnegative 1.5417 ft
Self-weight of future wearing surface.

wfws = 0.015 ft kip
wfws := fws b overhang wfws X fws 2

2
Moment..........................................
M fws = 0.04 ft kip
M fws :=
Moment induced by DW loads.................

M DW = 0.04 kip ft
M DW := Mfws
B4. Limit State Moments

The service and strength limit state moments are used to design the section. Service I Limit State Overhang Service I Moment....................
M serviceI = 8.7 kip ft M serviceI := M DC + M DW + M LL
Strength I Limit State Overhang Strength I Moment..................

M strengthI = 14.1 kip ft M strengthI := 1.25MDC + 1.50 MDW + 1.75 MLL
145
C. Moment Design
The design procedure consists of calculating the reinforcement required to satisfy the design moment, then checking this reinforcement against criteria for crack control, minimum reinforcement, maximum reinforcement, and shrinkage and temperature reinforcement. The reinforcement must satisfy requirements for the extreme event limit states and the strength limit state.

Reinforcement required for the extreme event limit states
As.TL4 = 0.92 in per foot of deck overhang
2
Reinforcement Required for Strength Limit State Factored resistance

M r = Mn
Simplifying the nominal flexural resistance

a M n = As fy ds 2 a= As fy 0.85 f'c b

M r := MstrengthI fc.slab = 4.5 ksi fy = 60 ksi = 0.9 t slab = 8 in b = 12 in b := bslab t slab = h
Initial assumption for area of steel required Size of bar....................................... Proposed bar spacing.......................
bar = "5" spacing := 4 in
146
Bar area.......................................... Bar diameter....................................
Abar = 0.310 in dia = 0.625 in

As.overhang = 0.93 in
2
Abar 1 ft As.overhang := spacing

ds = 5.7 in
Given
M r = As.overhang fy ds
As.reqd := Find As.overhang
As.overhang fy 2 0.85 fc.slab b

1
Reinforcing area required........................
As.reqd = 0.59 in
2
The area of steel provided, As.overhang = 0.93 in , should be greater than the area of steel required for the strength limit state, As.reqd = 0.59 in , AND the extreme event limit state, As.TL4 = 0.92 in . If not, decrease the spacing of the reinforcement. Once As.overhang is greater than the limit state requirements, the proposed reinforcing is adequate for the design moments.
2 2

Concrete is subjected to cracking. Limiting the width of expected cracks under service conditions increases the longevity of the structure. Potential cracks can be minimized through proper placement of the reinforcement. The check for crack control requires that the actual stress in the reinforcement should not exceed the service limit state stress (LRFD 5.7.3.4). The stress equations emphasize bar spacing rather than crack widths. Stress in the mild steel reinforcement at the service limit state
fsa = z
1
0.6 fy
( dcA)
Crack width parameter
147
Environmentsuper = "Slightly" kip z := 170 in
aggressive environment
Distance from extreme tension fiber to center of closest bar (concrete cover need not exceed 2 in.)....................................
dc = 2.313 in
dia dc := min tslab ds , 2 in + 2
Number of bars per design width of slab..

nbar = 3
b nbar := spacing

A = 18.5 in
2
A :=
( b ) 2 dc nbar

fsa = 36.0 ksi
fsa := min
z
1
( d A) 3 c
, 0.6 fy
x := 2.1 in 1 2 b x =
2
Given
Es Ec.slab
As.overhang ds x
Ts = 20.984 kip
Ts :=
MserviceI xna ds 3
Ts fs.actual := As.overhang
148
LRFD 5.7.3.3.4 := "OK, crack control for moment is satisfied" if fs.actual fsa "NG, increase the reinforcement provided" otherwise LRFD 5.7.3.3.4 = "OK, crack control for moment is satisfied"

Maximum Reinforcement The maximum reinforcement requirements ensure the section has sufficient ductility and is not overreinforced. Area of steel provided.............................
As = 0.93 in
2
As := As.overhang

1 = 0.825
1 := max0.85 0.05
fc.slab 4000 psi , 0.65 1000 psi
Distance from extreme compression fiber to the neutral axis of section........................

c = 1.5 in
c :=
As fy 0.85 fc.slab 1 b
Effective depth from extreme compression fiber to centroid of the tensile reinforcement
As fps dp + As fy ds Aps fps + As fy de := ds
de =
Simplifying for this example..............

de = 5.7 in
Ratio for maximum reinforcement check.

c de = 0.259
The
c de
ratio should be less than 0.42 to satisfy maximum reinforcement requirements.

LRFD 5.7.3.3.1 := c de 0.42
"OK, maximum reinforcement requirements are satisfied" if "NG, section is over reinforced, so redesign!" otherwise
LRFD 5.7.3.3.1 = "OK, maximum reinforcement requirements are satisfied"
149
fr = 509.1 psi fr := 0.24 fc.slab ksi
y = 4.0 in
y :=
tslab 2

Islab = 512.0 in
4
1 3 Islab := b tslab 12
Section modulus.....................................
S = 128.0 in
3
S :=
Islab y
Cracking moment...................................
M cr = 5.4 kip ft
M cr := fr S
1.2 M cr
Minimum reinforcement required.............

Amin = 0.29 in
2
Amin :=
As fy 1 fy ds 2 0.85 fc.slab b
Required area of steel for minimum reinforcement should not be less than As 133% or Amin ..................................
As.req = 0.29 in
2
As.req := min As 133 % , Amin
Maximum bar spacing for mimimum reinforcement........................................

spacingmax = 13.0 in
spacingmax :=
As.req A bar
The bar spacing should be less than the maximum bar spacing for minimum reinforcement
LRFD 5.7.3.3.2 := "OK, minimum reinforcement requirements are satisfied" if spacing spacingmax "NG, section is under-reinforced, so redesign!" otherwise LRFD 5.7.3.3.2 = "OK, minimum reinforcement requirements are satisfied"
150
C4. Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement [LRFD 5.10.8.2]

Gross area of section..............................
Ag = 96.0 in
2
Ag := boverhang tslab
Minimum area of shrinkage and temperature reinforcement........................................

AST = 0.18 in
2
AST :=
0.11 ksi Ag fy

spacingST = 18.0 in
spacingST := min
b
AST Abar
, 3 tslab , 18 in
LRFD 5.7.10.8 := "OK, minimum shrinkage and temperature requirements" if spacing spacingST "NG, minimum shrinkage and temperature requirements" otherwise LRFD 5.7.10.8 = "OK, minimum shrinkage and temperature requirements"
C5. Summary
Size of bar
bar = "5"
Proposed bar spacing

spacing = 4 in
LRFD 5.7.3.3.4 = "OK, crack control for moment is satisfied" LRFD 5.7.3.3.1 = "OK, maximum reinforcement requirements are satisfied" LRFD 5.7.3.3.2 = "OK, minimum reinforcement requirements are satisfied" LRFD 5.7.10.8 = "OK, minimum shrinkage and temperature requirements"
Defined Units
151
Creep and Shrinkage Parameters
References
Reference:F:\HDRDesignExamples\Ex1_PCBeam\208DeckCant.mcd(R)
Description
This section provides the creep and shrinkage factors as per the LRFD 5.4.2.3.2 and 5.4.2.3.3.
Page
153
Contents
A. Input Variables A1. Time Dependent Variables A2. Transformed Properties A3. Compute Volume to Surface area ratios
155 157
B. Shrinkage Coefficient (LRFD 5.4.2.3.3) C. Creep Coefficient (LRFD 5.4.2.3.2)
2.09 Creep and Shrinkage Parameters
152
A. Input Variables
A1. Time Dependent Variables
Relative humidity.................................... Age (days) of concrete when load is applied.................................................. Age (days) of concrete deck when section becomes composite................................ Age (days) used to determine long term losses...................................................
H = 75 T0 = 1 T1 = 120 T2 = 10000
A2. Transformed Properties

Required thickness of deck slab............... Effective slab width for interior beam....... Effective slab width for exterior beam...... Superstructure beam type........................
t slab = 8 in b eff.interior = 96.0 in b eff.exterior = 101.0 in BeamTypeTog = "IV"
A3. Volume to Surface Area Ratios (Notional Thickness)

The volume and surface area are calculated for 1 ft. of length. The surface area only includes the area exposed to atmospheric drying. The volume and surface area of the deck are analyzed using the effective slab width for the interior beam. Effective slab width...............................
b eff := b eff.interior
3
Volume of beam..................................... Volume of deck...................................... Volume of composite section................... Surface area of beam.............................. Surface area of deck.............................. Surface area of composite section...........
Volume beam = 5.5 ft Volume deck = 5.3 ft Volume = 10.8 ft

3
Surfacebeam = 12.2 ft Surfacedeck = 15.7 ft Surface = 27.9 ft

2
153
The shrinkage coefficient uses the notional thickness of the composite section...........
ho.SH = 4.7 in
Volume ho.SH := Surface
The creep coefficient uses the notional thickness of the non-composite section, since the forces responsible for creep are initially applied to the non-composite section..................................................
ho.CR = 5.4 in
Volume beam ho.CR := Surfacebeam
154
B. Shrinkage Coefficient (LRFD 5.4.2.3.3)

Shrinkage can range from approximately zero for concrete continually immersed in water to greater than 0.0008 for concrete that is improperly cured. Several factors influence the shrinkage of concrete. Aggregate characteristics and proportions Average humidity at the bridge site W/C ratio Type of cure Volume to surface area ratio of member Duration of drying period
Shrinkage strain for moist-cured concretes without shrinkage-prone aggregates.............................................
t 3 sh = ks kh 35.0 + t 0.51 10 t 3 sh = ks kh 55.0 + t 0.56 10 kh := 140 H 70 70 if H < 80 if H 80 1064 94 ho 923
Shrinkage strain for steam-cured concretes without shrinkage-prone aggregates..........
Factor for relative humidity.....................

kh = 0.929
3 ( 100 H)
Factor for effects of the volume to surface ratio..........................................
ks =
t
26 e
0.36 ho t 45+t
+t
Factor kc for Volume to Surface Ratio

1.4 ks1.0 ks1.5 correction factor, ks ks2.0
1.2
1
t
ks3.0 0.8
t
ks4.0 0.6
t
ks5.0 ks6.0
0.4
0.2
0 1 10 100 t drying time (days)
1 .10
1 .10
155
Using variables defined in this example and assuming moist-cured concrete, Shrinkage strain...............................
t 0.51 10 3 sh ( t ) := ks kh t 35.0 + t
Shrinkage strain on composite section at Day T1 = 120 .............................. Shrinkage strain on composite section at
Day T2 = 10000 ....................................
sh T1 = 0.00032
( ) ( )
sh T2 = 0.00063
Shrinkage strain on composite section from Day T1 = 120 to Day

T2 = 10000 ................................................. SH = 0.00032
SH := sh T2 sh T1
( )
( )
Note : Shrinkage and Creep [LRFD 5.4.2.3 ] Assumptions for shrinkage strain.......
0.0002 after 28 days

0.0005 after one year
Based on these assumptions, at Day 120 the strain is 0.0002. At Day 10000, the shrinkage strain should be 0.0005. The amount of shrinkage strain from Day 120 to Day 10000 is 0.0003. which closely compares with the calculated value of 0.00032. For this example, the shrinkage strains calculated in this section are used for the remaining design.
156
C. Creep Coefficient (LRFD 5.4.2.3.2)

Creep is influenced by the same factors as shrinkage and also by the following factors: Magnitude and duration of stress Maturity of concrete at loading Temperature of concrete
For typical temperature ranges in bridges, temperature is not a factor in estimating creep. Concrete shortening due to creep generally ranges from 1.5 to 4.0 times the initial elastic shortening, depending primarily on concrete maturity at loading. Creep Coefficient
t,t
1.58 120 (t i ) ( i ) = 3.5 kc kf

H
0.118
0.6 tt) ( i 0.6 10.0 + ( t t ) i
Factor for effect of concrete strength......

kf = 0.718
kf :=
0.67 +
t
26 e
fc.beam ksi
Factor for effect of volume to surface ratio......................................................
kc =
0.36 ho t 45+t
+t
0.54 ho 1.80 + 1.77 e 2.587
Factor kc for Volume to Surface Ratio

1.4 kc1.0 kc1.5 correction factor, kc kc2.0 kc3.0 kc4.0 kc6.0 1.2 1 0.8 0.6
t
0.4 0.2 0 1 10 100 t time under load (days)
1 .10
1 .10
157
Using variables defined in this example, Creep coefficient.............................
(t ti) 0.6 H 0.118 (t , ti ) := 3.5 kc kf 1.58 (t ) t 120 i 0.6 10.0 + ( t t i)

cr1 := T1 , T0
Creep coefficient on non-composite section from Day T0 = 1 to Day

T1 = 120 ........................................ cr1 = 0.627
Creep coefficient on non-composite section from Day T0 = 1 to Day

T2 = 10000 ..................................... cr2 = 1.681
cr2 := T2 , T0
Creep factor at Day T1 ....................

C120 = 1.627
C120 := 1 + cr1
Creep factor at Day T2 ...................

C10000 = 2.681
C10000 := 1 + cr2
Defined Units
158
Expansion Joint Design
References
Reference:F:\HDRDesignExamples\Ex1_PCBeam\209CRSH.mcd(R)
Description
This section provides the design of the bridge expansion joints.
Page
160 160 161
Contents
LRFD Criteria FDOT Criteria A. Input Variables A1. Bridge Geometry A2. Temperature Movement [SDG 6.3] A3. Expansion Joints [SDG 6.4] A4. Movement [6.4.2]
164
B. Expansion Joint Design B1. Movement from Creep, Shrinkage and Temperature (SDG 6.4.2) B2. Movement from Temperature (SDG 6.4.2) B3. Temperature Adjustment for Field Placement of Joint B4. Bearing Design Movement/Strain
166
C. Design Summary
2.10 Expansion Joint Design
159
LRFD Criteria
Uniform Temperature [3.12.2]
Superseded by SDG 2.7.2 and SDG 6.3.
Shrinkage and Creep [5.4.2.3] Movement and Loads - General [14.4.1] Bridge Joints [14.5]
FDOT Criteria
Uniform Temperature - Joints and Bearings [SDG 2.7.2]
Delete LRFD [3.12.2] and substitute in lieu thereof SDG Chapter 6.
Expansion Joints [SDG 6.4]
160
A. Input Variables
A1. Bridge Geometry
Overall bridge length............................... Bridge design span length........................ Skew angle............................................
A2. Temperature Movement [SDG 6.3]

Structural Material of Superstructure Concrete Only Concrete Deck on Steel Girder Steel Only Temperature (Degrees Fahrenheit) High Low 95 45 110 30 120 30
Mean 70 70 70
Range 50 80 90
The temperature values for "Concrete Only" in the preceding table apply to this example. Temperature mean........................... Temperature high............................. Temperature low.............................. Temperature rise..............................
t rise = 25 F t mean = 70 F t high = 95 F t low = 45 F t rise := thigh tmean
Temperature fall...............................
t fall = 25 F
t fall := t mean t low
Coefficient of thermal expansion [LRFD 5.4.2.2] for normal weight concrete.........
t = 6 10
6 1
A3. Expansion Joints [SDG 6.4]

Joint Type
Poured Rubber Silicone Seal Strip Seal Modular Joint Finger Joint
Maximum Joint Width *

2 3 Unlimited Unlimited
*Joints in sidewalks must meet all requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act.
161
For new construction, use only the joint types listed in the preceding table. A typical joint for most prestressed beam bridges is the silicone seal. Maximum joint width........................ Minimum joint width at 70o F............ Proposed joint width at 70o F............
Wmax := 2 in 5 Wmin := in 8 W := 1 in
A4. Movement [SDG 6.4.2]

Temperature The movement along the beam due to temperature should be resolved along the axis of the expansion joint or skew. Displacements normal to skew at top of bents Temperature rise..............................
zTempR = 0.14 in zTempR := t t rise cos( Skew ) Lspan
Temperature Fall..............................
zTempF = 0.14 in
zTempF := t t fall cos( Skew ) Lspan
Displacements parallel to skew at top of bents Temperature rise..............................

xTempR = 0.08 in xTempR := t t rise sin( Skew ) Lspan
Temperature Fall..............................
xTempF = 0.08 in
xTempF := t t fall sin( Skew ) Lspan
For silicone seals, displacements parallel to the skew are not significant in most joint designs. For this example, these displacements are ignored.
Creep and Shrinkage The following assumptions are used in this design example: Creep and Shrinkage prior to day 120 (casting of deck) is neglected for the expansion joint design. Creep [LRFD 5.4.2.3] is not considered at this time. After day 120, all beams are assumed to creep towards their centers. The slab will offer some restraint to this movement of the beam. The beam and slab interaction, combined with forces not being applied to the center of gravity for the composite section, is likely to produce longitudinal movements and rotations. For most prestressed beams designed as simple spans for dead and live load, these joint movements due to creep are ignored.
162
Shrinkage after day 120 is calculated using LRFD 5.4.2.3. Creep strain........................................... Shrinkage strain..................................... Strain due to creep and shrinkage.............
CS = 0.00032 CR := 0. SH = 0.00032 CS := CR + SH
The movement along the beam due to creep and shrinkage should be resolved along the axis of the expansion joint or skew. Displacements normal to skew at top of bents...........................................
zCS = 0.30 in zCS := CS cos( Skew ) Lspan
Displacements parallel to skew at top of bents...............................................

xCS = 0.17 in
xCS := CS sin( Skew ) Lspan
For silicone seals, displacements parallel to the skew are not significant in most joint designs. For this example, these displacements are ignored.
163
B. Expansion Joint Design

For prestressed concrete structures, the movement is based on the greater of two cases: Movement from the combination of temperature fall, creep, and shrinkage Movement from factored effects of temperature
B1. Movement from Creep, Shrinkage and Temperature (SDG 6.4.2)

The combination of creep, shrinkage, and temperature fall tends to "open" the expansion joint. Movement from the combination of temperature fall, creep, and shrinkage.......
zTemperature.Fall = ztemperature.fall + zcreep.shrinkage CST := zCS + zTempF
Using variables defined in this example.....

CST = 0.44 in
Joint width from opening caused by creep, shrinkage, and temperature......................

WCSTopen = 1.44 in
WCSTopen := W + CST
The joint width from opening should not exceed the maximum joint width.
CSTJt_Open := "OK, joint width does not exceed maximum joint width" if WCSTopen Wmax "NG, joint width exceeds maximum joint width" otherwise CSTJt_Open = "OK, joint width does not exceed maximum joint width"
B2. Movement from Temperature (SDG 6.4.2)

Movement from factored effects of temperature rise
zrise.or.fall = 1.15 ztemperature.rise.or.fall
Using variables defined in this example, Joint width from opening caused by factored temperature fall.........................
WTopen = 1.16 in WTopen := W + 1.15 zTempF
Joint width from closing caused by factored temperature rise.........................

WTclose = 0.84 in
WTclose := W 1.15 zTempR
164
The joint width from opening should not exceed the maximum joint width.
TemperatureJt_Open := "OK, joint width does not exceed maximum joint width" if WTopen Wmax "NG, joint width exceeds maximum joint width" otherwise TemperatureJt_Open = "OK, joint width does not exceed maximum joint width"
The joint width from closing should not be less than the minimum joint width.
TemperatureJt_Close := "OK, joint width is not less than minimum joint width" if WTclose Wmin "NG, joint width exceeds minimum joint width" otherwise TemperatureJt_Close = "OK, joint width is not less than minimum joint width"
B3. Temperature Adjustment for Field Placement of Joint

For field temperatures other than 70o F, a temperature adjustment is provided. The adjustment is used during construction to obtain the desired joint width...................
TAdj = 0.0056 in F
TAdj :=
zTempR trise
B4. Bearing Design Movement/Strain

For the bearing pad design, the following strain due to temperature, creep and shrinkage will be utilized..........................
CST = 0.00047
CST := CR + SH + t tfall
165
C. Design Summary
Joint width at 70o...................................
W = 1 in
Joint width from opening caused by creep, shrinkage, and temperature......................
WCSTopen = 1.44 in CSTJt_Open = "OK, joint width does not exceed maximum joint width"
........ Wmax = 2 in
Joint width from opening caused by factored temperature..............................
WTopen = 1.16 in TemperatureJt_Open = "OK, joint width does not exceed maximum joint width"
........ Wmax = 2 in
Joint width from closing caused by factored temperature..............................
WTclose = 0.84 in TemperatureJt_Close = "OK, joint width is not less than minimum joint width"
........ Wmin = 0.625 in
Adjustment for field temperatures other than 70o................................................
TAdj = 0.0056
in F
Bearing pad design movement/strain........
CST = 0.00047
Defined Units
166
Composite Neoprene Bearing Pad Design

Reference
Reference:F:\HDRDesignExamples\Ex1_PCBeam\210ExpJt.mcd(R)
Description
This section provides the design of the bridge composite neoprene bearing pad. Only the interior beam at End bent 1 bearing pad is designed within this file. For the design of bearing pads for any other beam type (exterior beam) and location (at pier), design is similar to methodology shown in this file.
Page
168 168 169
Contents
LRFD Criteria FDOT Criteria A. Input Variables A1. Bridge Geometry A2. Bearing Design Movement/Strain A3. Bearing Design Loads
171 172
B. Composite Bearing Pad Design Dimensions C. Composite Bearing Pad Design [LRFD 14.7.5] C1. General [LRFD 14.7.5.1] C2. Material Properties [LRFD 14.7.5.2] C3. Compressive Stress [LRFD 14.7.5.3.2] C4. Compressive Deflections [LRFD 14.7.5.3.3] C5. Shear Deformations [LRFD 14.7.5.3.4] C6. Combined Compression and Rotations [LRFD 14.7.5.3.5] C7. Stability of Elastomeric Bearings [LRFD 14.7.5.3.6] C.8 Reinforcement [LRFD 14.7.5.3.7] C.9 Anchorage and Anchor Bolts [LRFD 14.8.3] C.10 Horizontal Force and Movement [LRFD 14.6.3.1]
183
D. DESIGN SUMMARY D1. Bearing Pad Properties D2. LRFD Checks (METHOD B)
2.11 Composite Neoprene Bearing Pad
167
LRFD Criteria
Uniform Temperature [LRFD 3.12.2]
Superseded by SDG 2.7.2 and SDG 6.3.
Movement and Loads - General [LRFD 14.4.1]

Specifies that "the influence of impact need not be included" in the design of bearings.
Movement and Loads - Design Requirements [LRFD 14.4.2]

Specifies 0.005 RAD as an allowance for uncertainties.
Steel-Reinforced Elastomeric Bearings - Method B [LRFD 14.7.5]
FDOT Criteria
Seismic Provisions - General [SDG 2.3.1]
Simple span concrete beam bridges are exempt from seismic design. Design for minimum seismic support length only.
Uniform Temperature - Joints and Bearings [SDG 2.7.2]

Delete LRFD [3.12.2] and substitute in lieu thereof SDG Chapter 6.
Vessel Collision - Design Methodology - Damage Permitted [SDG 2.11.4]

Ship impact on bearings is not considered in this example.
Temperature Movement [SDG 6.3] Bearings [SDG 6.5]

Specifies design of Composite neoprene bearing pads in accordance with LRFD Method B.
168
A. Input Variables
A1. Bridge Geometry
Bridge design span length........................ Skew angle............................................
Lspan = 90 ft Skew = 30 deg
A2. Bearing Design Movement/Strain

For the bearing pad design, the following strain due to temperature, creep and shrinkage will be utilized..........................
CST = 0.00047
A3. Bearing Pad Design Loads

The design of the interior and exterior beams follow the same procedures and concept as outlined in this design example. In order to minimize the calculations, only one beam type will be evaluated. Flexibility to evaluate an interior or exterior beam is given by changing the input values chosen below (see input options note).
RDC := V DC.BeamInt ( Support)
DC dead loads.......................................
RDC = 85.4 kip
Note : Input options...... V DC.BeamInt( Support)
DW dead loads......................................
RDW = 5.3 kip
RDW := V DW.BeamInt( Support)
Live Load Rotation .................................

LL = 0.00174 rad
LL := LL.Int
Live Load Reaction.................................

RLL = 81.9 kip
RLL := RLL.Int
V DC.BeamExt( Support) V DW.BeamInt( Support) V ( Support ) DW.BeamExt LL.Int LL.Ext RLL.Int RLL.Ext
169
Service I Limit State Design Loads.

Service1 = 1.0 DC + 1.0 DW + 1.0 LL
Total Bearing Design Load.......................

RBrgTotal = 172.6 kip
RBrgTotal := 1.0 RDC + 1.0 RDW + 1.0 RLL
Live Load Bearing Design Load................

RBrgLL = 81.9 kip
RBrgLL := 1.0 RLL
Live Load Design Rotation.......................

LL = 0.0017 rad
170
B. Composite Bearing Pad Design Dimensions

Bearing pad size and dimensions
The dimensions of the bearing pad can be selected using FDOT Construction Specifications, Section 932 Non-Metallic Accessory Materials for Concrete Pavement and Concrete Structures. Section 932-2.2.3 states that composite neoprene pads shall consist of alternate laminations of neoprene and hot-rolled steel sheets molded together as one unit. The pads should meet the following requirements: Outer metal laminations shall be 3/16 inch .................................. Inner laminations shall be 14-gauge (2.0 mm)..................... Outer neoprene laminations shall be 1/4 inch.................................
3 hse := in 16 hsi := 2 mm hre := 0.25in
or
hsi = 0.0787 in
Inner neoprene laminations shall be of equal thicknesses Edges of steel laminates should be covered with minimum or 1/4 inch of elastomer
Length of bearing pad............................. Width of bearing pad.............................. Height of bearing pad.............................. Number of external elastomer layers......... Number of internal elastomer layers.........
Lpad := 12 in Wpad := 17 in hpad := 2.5 in ne := 2 ni := 3
171
C. Composite Bearing Pad Design [LRFD 14.7.5]

C1. General [LRFD 14.7.5.1]
Thickness of an internal elastomer layer....
hri = 0.489 in hri := hpad ne hre + hse ni 1 hsi ni
) (
The top and bottom cover layers shall be no thicker than 70 percent of the internal layers....................................................
hre = 0.25 in LRFD 14.7.5.1 :=
hre 0.7 hri
"OK, Thickness of the external layers" if hre 0.7 hri "NG, The external layer is too thick" otherwise
where
0.7 hri = 0.34 in
LRFD 14.7.5.1 = "OK, Thickness of the external layers"
Total elastomer thickness........................

hrt = 1.968 in
hrt := ne hre + ni hri
Area of bearing pad................................

Apad = 204 in
2
Apad := Lpad Wpad
Shape factor..........................................
S = 7.2
S :=
Lpad Wpad 2 hri Lpad + Wpad
C2. Material Properties [LRFD 14.7.5.2]

LRFD specifies the shear modulus of the elastomer based on the durometer hardness. For Method B design, only Grades 50 and 60 hardness are applicable. Elastomer durometer hardness................. Corresponding lower limit for shear modulus................................................
Gmin = 0.130 ksi Grade := 60
Gmin :=
95 psi if Grade = 50 130 psi if Grade = 60
Corresponding upper limit for shear modulus................................................

Gmax = 0.200 ksi
Gmax :=
130 psi if Grade = 50 200 psi if Grade = 60
172
Creep deflection factor...........................

cr = 0.35
cr :=
0.25 if Grade = 50 0.35 if Grade = 60
C3. Compressive Stress [LRFD 14.7.5.3.2]

Each elastomeric bearing layer shall satisfy the criteria for the average compressive stress at the service limit state. The criteria depends on whether or not the bearing is considered free or fixed against shear deformation. As a guideline, if the bridge superstructure has restraints against movements, such as shear blocks, dowels, fixity, etc., then the bearings are considered fixed against shear deformations. If no restraints are present, then the bearings are free to deform due to shear. Actual service compressive stress due to the total load..........................................
s.actual = 0.85 ksi s.actual := RBrgTotal Apad
Actual service compressive stress due to live load................................................

L.actual = 0.40 ksi
L.actual :=
RBrgLL Apad
Superstructure Free for Shear Allowable service compressive stress due to the total load..........................................
s = 1.55 ksi s := min 1.66 Gmin S , 1.6 ksi
Allowable service compressive stress due to live load.............................................

L = 0.62 ksi
L := 0.66 Gmin S
LRFD allows the shear modulus value to be utilized as the one causing the worst effect. Therefore, the lower limit value will be used for this criteria. Re-writing and solving for the governing values: The actual compressive stresses should be less than the allowable compressive stresses.
LRFD 14.7.5.3.2_1 := "OK, actual compressive stress for total load (free for shear)" if s.actual s "NG, actual compressive stress for total load (free for shear)" otherwise LRFD 14.7.5.3.2_1 = "OK, actual compressive stress for total load (free for shear)"
LRFD 14.7.5.3.2_2 :=
"OK, Compressive stress for live load only (free for shear)" if L.actual L "NG, Compressive stress for live load only (free for shear)" otherwise
LRFD 14.7.5.3.2_2 = "OK, Compressive stress for live load only (free for shear)"
173
Superstructure Fixed for Shear Allowable service compressive stress due to the total load......................................
s = 1.75 ksi s := min 2.0 Gmin S , 1.75 ksi
Allowable service compressive stress due to live load.............................................

L = 0.93 ksi
L := 1.00 Gmin S
The actual compressive stresses should be less than the allowable compressive stresses.
LRFD 14.7.5.3.2_3 := "OK, Compressive stress for total load (fixed for shear)" if s.actual s "NG, Compressive stress for total load (fixed for shear)" otherwise LRFD 14.7.5.3.2_3 = "OK, Compressive stress for total load (fixed for shear)"
LRFD 14.7.5.3.2_4 :=
"OK, Compressive stress for live load only (fixed for shear)" if L.actual L "NG, Compressive stress for live load only (fixed for shear)" otherwise
LRFD 14.7.5.3.2_4 = "OK, Compressive stress for live load only (fixed for shear)"
C4. Compressive Deflections [LRFD 14.7.5.3.3]

An overly flexible bearing can introduce a step at the deck joint on the riding surface. As traffic passes over this step, additional impact loading is applied to the bridge. The step can also damage the deck joints and seals. LRFD suggests limiting the relative deflections across a joint due to instantaneous loads. Limiting the relative deflections................
max := 0.125 in
The instantaneous deflections are calculated using the compressive strain. This compressive strain represents the amount of deflection that the thickest layer of the neoprene bearing will undergo due to the instantaneous loads. LRFD provides compressive strain charts based on the durometer hardness of the bearing pad:
174
Required information to select compressive strain from chart: Bearing durometer............................ Actual compressive stress due to live load................................................ Shape factor.................................... Compressive strain from chart................. Instantaneous compressive deflection due to live load............................................. Substituting and re-writing................
il = 0.039 in Grade = 60 L.actual = 0.402 ksi S = 7.2 i := 0.02
il = i hri il := ne i hre + ni i hri
LRFD suggests adding the effects of creep on the elastomer for the instantaneous deflections. Long-term deflection due to instantaneous loads.....................................................
c = 0.053 in c := il 1 + cr
The long-term deflection due to instantaneous loads should not exceed the maximum deflection.
LRFD 14.7.5.3.3 := "OK, long-term compressive deflection less than maximum deflection" if c < max "NG, long-term compressive deflection exceeds maximum deflection" otherwise LRFD 14.7.5.3.3 = "OK, long-term compressive deflection less than maximum deflection"
175
C5. Shear Deformations [LRFD 14.7.5.3.4]

Concrete shrinkage, thermal movements, and beam shortening cause shear deformations in the bearing pads.
For a two-span bridge with equal span lengths and constant pier heights, the assumed center of movement is the center support (Pier 2). From this assumption, the shear deformations at Pier 2 are negligible, so all movement occurs at the end bents. Shear deformations along the beam line for creep, shrinkage, and temperature............
s = 0.506 in s := CST Lspan
The bearing pad is parallel to the skew, so the movement along the beam needs to be resolved along the axis of the pads. Longitudinal shear deformation..........
sz = 0.439 in sz := s cos( Skew
) )
Transverse shear deformation............

sx = 0.253 in
sx := s sin( Skew
Required total elastomer thickness............

hrt.req = 1.013 in
hrt.req := 2 s
The total elastomer thickness should be greater than the required total elastomer thickness.
LRFD 14.7.5.3.4 := "OK, Elastomer thickness for shear deformation" if hrt hrt.req "NG, Elastomer thickness for shear deformation" otherwise LRFD 14.7.5.3.4 = "OK, Elastomer thickness for shear deformation"
C6. Combined Compression and Rotations [LRFD 14.7.5.3.5]

Bearing Pad Rotations Previous FDOT procedures provided standard pad sizes to use with various beam types. The introduction of Method B equations established a more stringent design for the bearing pads, particularly between the interaction of rotation and compression. The FDOT standard pad sizes no longer satisfy the Method B criteria. Specifically, the new criteria was causing the bearing pads to be taller to satisfy rotational requirements, which introduced problems with the interaction of combined compression and rotation (uplift criteria).
176
The result is that a more "detailed" calculation for displacements and rotations are now required. For example:
Grade Rotation Total Rotation Live Load Rotation = 0.003819 (+ Grade Rotation) or = -0.011437 (- Grade Rotation) Plus 0.005 rad (AASHTO LRFD 14.4.2) = 0.005 rad Maximum Rotation = 0.016437 rad
total = (-0.03231) + (0.01394 + 0.01062 + 0.00069 + 0.00066 + 0.00067) + (0.00192) +/- (0.00763)
Rotation Due to Prestress
Dead Load Rotation
The LRFD criteria for uplift is predominantly concerned with pads bonded to the substructure and girder. Since FDOT does not require bonding, the uplift criteria of LRFD 14.7.5.3.5-1 need not be satisfied. Depending on the size of pads required by the Method B equations, the calculations for rotation can either be simplified or detailed. Bearing pad rotations typically consist of the following: Prestress rotation Dead load rotations (beam, slab, barrier, FWS, SIP forms) Grade rotations (no grade adjustments utilized, eg. plates, beam notches, etc.) Construction tolerances on pedestals and piers (usually included in the construction tolerances factor
If the bearing pad dimensions required by the Method B equations are considered reasonable (using engineering judgement and/or experience), then the rotations due to prestress, dead load, and grade are ignored. This reasoning assumes the rotations are negligible or the combined effects are beneficial, which is also ignored. If the designer does not feel the bearing pad dimensions are reasonable, these rotations need to be calculated.
177
Rotation due to prestress, dead load, and grade....................................................
DC := 0.0 rad
(Note : For this design example, these rotations are not calculated)
Rotation due to construction tolerances and uncertainties [LRFD 14.4.2].............. Rotations due to live loads.......................
LL = 0.0017 rad
tol := 0.005 rad
Total rotations along the beam.................

s = 0.0067 rad
s := DC + LL + tol
Bearing pads are parallel to the skew, so rotation along the beam needs to be resolved along the axis of the pads. Longitudinal rotation.........................
sx = 0.0058 rad sx := s cos( Skew
) )
Transverse rotation...........................
sz = 0.0034 rad
sz := s sin( Skew
Uplift, Compression and Rotation Requirement The bearing pad design requires a balance between the stiffness required to support large compressive loads and the flexibility needed to accommodate translation and rotation. LRFD requirements for allowable stresses and stability provide the balance between stiffness and flexibility. LRFD states that "Bearings shall be designed so that uplift does not occur under any combination of loads and corresponding location." However, bearings normally used in FDOT projects are unbonded, so uplift can occur. LRFD also presents concerns for strain reversal in the elastomer, which is not applicable for unbonded bearings. Actual compressive stress at service limit state due to the total load.........................
s.actual = 0.846 ksi s.actual := RBrgTotal Apad
Rectangular bearings must satisfy uplift requirements in LRFD 14.7.5.3.5-1. ........ n may be increased by one-half for each exterior layer of elastomer with a thickness more than one-half the thickness of an interior layer..........................................
n=4
s > 1.0 G S
s B 2 n hri
n := if hre > 0.5 hri , ni + 0.5 ne , ni
Using variables defined in this example and resolving into axis of bearing pad, Minimum compressive stress for uplift in longitudinal direction...............................
sz = 2.53 ksi
sx Wpad sz := 1.0 Gmax S n hri
178
Minimum compressive stress for uplift in transverse direction................................

sx = 0.73 ksi
sz Lpad sx := 1.0 Gmax S n hri
The actual compressive stress should be greater than the minimum compressive stress.
LRFD 14.7.5.3.5_1 := "OK, no uplift for bonded pad" if s.actual > sz s.actual > sx "N/A, FDOT unbonded pad: separation, but no tension on elastomer" otherwise LRFD 14.7.5.3.5_1 = "N/A, FDOT unbonded pad: separation, but no tension on elastomer"
Rectangular bearings free for shear deformation must also satisfy LRFD 14.7.5.3.5-2..........................................
s < 1.875 G S 1 0.200
s B 2 n hri
Using variables defined in this example and resolving into axis of bearing pad, Maximum compressive stress for uplift in longitudinal direction (free for shear)........
sz = 1.13 ksi
2 sx Wpad sz := 1.875 Gmin S 1 0.200 n hri 2 sz Lpad sx := 1.875 Gmin S 1 0.200 n hri
Maximum compressive stress for uplift in transverse direction (free for shear).........
sx = 1.57 ksi
The actual compressive stress should be less than the maximum compressive stress.
LRFD 14.7.5.3.5_2 := "OK, compression and rotation (free for shear)" if s.actual < sz s.actual < sx "NG, combined compression and rotation (free for shear)" otherwise LRFD 14.7.5.3.5_2 = "OK, compression and rotation (free for shear)"
Rectangular bearings fixed against shear deformation must also satisfy LRFD 14.7.5.3.5-3...........................................
s < 2.25 G S 1 0.167
s B 2 n hri
Using variables defined in this example and resolving into axis of bearing pad, Maximum compressive stress for uplift in longitudinal direction (fixed against shear).
sz = 1.48 ksi
2 sx Wpad sz := 2.25 Gmin S 1 0.167 n hri
179
Maximum compressive stress for uplift in transverse direction (fixed against shear)...
sx = 1.93 ksi
2 sz Lpad sx := 2.25 Gmin S 1 0.167 h n ri
The actual compressive stress should be less than the maximum compressive stress.
LRFD 14.7.5.3.5_3 := "OK, compression and rotation (fixed for shear)" if s.actual < sz s.actual < sx "NG, combined compression and rotation (fixed for shear)" otherwise LRFD 14.7.5.3.5_3 = "OK, compression and rotation (fixed for shear)"
C7. Stability of Elastomeric Bearings [LRFD 14.7.5.3.6]

The bearing is considered stable and no further stability checks are necessary if the requirements of LRFD 14.7.5.3.6 are satisfied. where
2 A B A := 1+ 1.92
therefore.........................................
A = 0.2
hrt Lpad
2.0 Lpad Wpad 2.67
and.................................................
B = 0.25
B :=
( S + 2.0 ) 1 +
4.0 Wpad
Lpad
Check the stability requirement

LRFD 14.7.5.3.6_1 := "OK, stability requirement met" if 2 A B "NG, further checks for stability are needed" otherwise LRFD 14.7.5.3.6_1 = "NG, further checks for stability are needed"
For rectangular bearings not satisfying LRFD 14.7.5.3.6_1 , the compressive stress due to the total load shall satisfy either of the following: Superstructure Free for Shear The following equation (LRFD 14.7.5.3.6-4 ) corresponds to sidesway buckling and applies to bridges in which the deck is free to translate horizontally...........................
s.actual = 0.846 ksi
s.actual
G S 2 A B
180
Re-writing and solving for the governing value where

Gmin S 2 A B = 5.898 ksi
LRFD 14.7.5.3.6_4 :=
Gmin S "OK, stability (free for shear)" if s.actual 2 A > B 2 A B "NG, stability not satisfied (free for shear)" otherwise
LRFD 14.7.5.3.6_4 = "OK, stability (free for shear)"
Superstructure Fixed for Shear If one point on the bridge is fixed against horizontal movement, the sidesway buckling mode is not possible and the following equation (LRFD 14.7.5.3.6-5 ) should be used.......................................
s.actual = 0.846 ksi
s.actual
G S A B
Re-writing and solving for the governing value: where

Gmin S AB = 21.128 ksi
LRFD 14.7.5.3.6_5 :=
Gmin S "OK, Stability-Deck Fixed to move" if s.actual 2A > B A B "NG, Stability not satisfied (fixed for shear)" otherwise
LRFD 14.7.5.3.6_5 = "NG, Stability not satisfied (fixed for shear)"
C.8 Reinforcement [LRFD 14.7.5.3.7]

The thickness of the steel reinforcement shall satisfy the following requirements at the service and fatigue limit states. The fatigue connection is assumed in detail category A. Yield stress of Grade 36 reinforcement..... Constant amplitude fatigue threshold for category A LRFD Table 6.6.1.2.5-3......... The thickest elastomer layer is the internal layer, since the external layers cannot exceed 70% of internal layer thickness.....
hmax = 0.489 in Fy := 36 ksi
FTH := 24 ksi
hmax := hri
181
Actual thickness of steel laminate.............

hsi = 0.079 in
Required thickness of steel laminate at the service limit state....................................

hs1 = 0.03 in
hs1 :=
3 hmax s.actual Fy
Required thickness of steel laminate at the fatigue limit state: Actual compressive stress due to live load................................................
L = 0.402 ksi L := RBrgLL Apad 2 hmax L FTH
Required thickness of steel laminate....

hs2 = 0.02 in
hs2 :=
If holes exist in the reinforcement, the minimum thickness shall be increased by a factor equal to twice the gross width divided by the net width. Check the LRFD criteria
LRFD 14.7.5.3.7 := "OK, Reinforcing Steel plate thickness" if hsi max hs1 , hs2
"NG, Reinforcing Steel layer thickness not adequate" otherwise LRFD 14.7.5.3.7 = "OK, Reinforcing Steel plate thickness"
C9. Anchorage and Anchor Bolts [LRFD 14.8.3]

LRFD states that horizontal forces may be induced by deformation the flexible element of the bearing. Bearings shall be anchored securely to the support to prevent their moving out of place during construction or the service life of the bridge. Elastomeric bearings may be left without anchorage if adequate friction is available. A design coefficient of friction of 0.2 may be assumed between elastomer and clean concrete or steel. Coefficient of friction.............................
:= 0.2
For completeness, this check is mentioned but will not be shown in this design example.
C10. Horizontal Force and Movement [LRFD 14.6.3.1]

The engineer shall determine the number of bearings required to resist the loads with consideration of the potential for unequal participation due to tolerances, unintended misalignments, the capacity of the individual bearings, and the skew. For completeness, this check is mentioned but will not be shown in this design example.
182
D. DESIGN SUMMARY
D1. Bearing Pad Properties
Durometer hardness.............. Length of bearing pad............ Width of bearing pad............. Height of bearing pad............
Grade = 60 Lpad = 12 in Wpad = 17 in hpad = 2.5 in
Thickness of external steel plates............. Thickness of internal steel plates.............. Number of external elastomer layers......... Number of internal elastomer layers......... Thickness of external elastomer layer....... Thickness of internal elastomer layers......
hse = 0.188 in hsi = 0.079 in ne = 2 ni = 3 hre = 0.25 in hri = 0.489 in
D2. LRFD Checks (Method B)

LRFD 14.7.5.1 = "OK, Thickness of the external layers" LRFD 14.7.5.3.3 = "OK, long-term compressive deflection less than maximum deflection" LRFD 14.7.5.3.4 = "OK, Elastomer thickness for shear deformation" LRFD 14.7.5.3.5_1 = "N/A, FDOT unbonded pad: separation, but no tension on elastomer" LRFD 14.7.5.3.7 = "OK, Reinforcing Steel plate thickness"
Satisfy the requirements for either of the applicable sections: Superstructure Free for Shear
LRFD 14.7.5.3.2_1 = "OK, actual compressive stress for total load (free for shear)" LRFD 14.7.5.3.2_2 = "OK, Compressive stress for live load only (free for shear)" LRFD 14.7.5.3.5_2 = "OK, compression and rotation (free for shear)" LRFD 14.7.5.3.6_1 = "NG, further checks for stability are needed" LRFD 14.7.5.3.6_4 = "OK, stability (free for shear)" (Note : OK if 14.7.5.6_4 is satisfied)
Superstructure Fixed for Shear

LRFD 14.7.5.3.2_3 = "OK, Compressive stress for total load (fixed for shear)" LRFD 14.7.5.3.2_4 = "OK, Compressive stress for live load only (fixed for shear)" LRFD 14.7.5.3.5_3 = "OK, compression and rotation (fixed for shear)" LRFD 14.7.5.3.6_1 = "NG, further checks for stability are needed" (Note : OK if 14.7.5.6_5 is satisfied)
LRFD 14.7.5.3.6_5 = "NG, Stability not satisfied (fixed for shear)"

Defined Units
183
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
Dead Loads
Reference
Reference:F:\HDRDesignExamples\Ex1_PCBeam\211BrgPad.mcd(R)
Description
This section provides the design dead loads applied to the substructure from the superstructure. The self-weight of the substructure is generated by the analysis program for the substructure model.
Page
185
Contents
A. General Criteria A1. End Bent Geometry A2. Pier Geometry A3. Footing Geometry A4. Pile Geometry
187
B. Dead Loads (DC, DW) B1. Beam Dead loads B2. End Bent Dead loads B3. Pier Dead loads B4. End Bent and Pier Dead load (DC, DW) Summary
Substructure Design
3.01 Dead Loads
184
A. General Criteria
A1. End Bent Geometry
(Note : End bent back wall not shown)
Depth of end bent cap.......... Width of end bent cap.......... Length of end bent cap......... Height of back wall.............. Backwall design width.......... Thickness of back wall..........
hEB = 2.5 ft b EB = 3.5 ft LEB = 101.614 ft hBW = 5 ft LBW = 1 ft t BW = 1 ft
A2. Pier Geometry

A model of the substructure has been created utilizing LARSA. The model will have the loads applied at the pedestals from the superstructure. In addition, it will generate it's own self-weight based on the following member properties of the pier:
Substructure Design
3.01 Dead Loads
185
Depth of pier cap................. Width of pier cap................. Length of pier cap................ Height of pier column........... Column diameter.................. Number of columns............. Surcharge........................... Height of footing.................. Width of footing................... Length of footing..................
hCap = 4.5 ft b Cap = 4.5 ft LCap = 101.614 ft hCol = 14 ft b Col = 4 ft nCol = 4 hSurcharge = 2 ft hFtg = 4 ft b Ftg = 7.5 ft LFtg = 7.5 ft
A4. Pile Geometry

Pile Embedment Depth.......... Pile Size..............................
Pileembed = 1 ft Pilesize = 18 in
Substructure Design
3.01 Dead Loads
186
B. Dead Loads (DC, DW)

B1. Beam Dead Loads
The dead loads of the superstructure (moment and shears) were previously computed utilizing the beam design length, Ldesign = 88.167 ft (see section 2.01 Dead Loads). For reactions on the pier, the reactions should be computed based on the span length, Lspan = 90.0 ft . Conservatively, we will adjust the loads as follows: Modification factors for span loads.........
1 = 1.021 1 := Lspan Ldesign
DC load at end bent for interior beam........

PDC.BeamInt = 87.1 kip
PDC.BeamInt := 1 V DC.BeamInt ( Support )
DC load at end bent for exterior beam.......

PDC.BeamExt = 91.8 kip
PDC.BeamExt := 1 V DC.BeamExt( Support)
DW load at end bent for interior beam.......

PDW.BeamInt = 5.4 kip
PDW.BeamInt := 1 V DW.BeamInt( Support)
DW load at end bent for exterior beam......

PDW.BeamExt = 4.7 kip
PDW.BeamExt := 1 V DW.BeamExt( Support)
B2. End Bent Dead loads

DC load at end bent for interior beam........
PDC.EndbentInt = 87.1 kip PDC.EndbentInt := PDC.BeamInt
DC load at end bent for exterior beam.......

PDC.EndbentExt = 91.8 kip
PDC.EndbentExt := PDC.BeamExt
DW load at end bent for interior beam.......

PDW.EndbentInt = 5.4 kip
PDW.EndbentInt := PDW.BeamInt
DW load at end bent for exterior beam......

PDW.EndbentExt = 4.7 kip
PDW.EndbentExt := PDW.BeamExt
B3. Pier Dead Loads

Dead load at pier for interior beam...........
PDC.PierInt = 174.3 kip PDC.PierInt := 2 PDC.BeamInt
Substructure Design
3.01 Dead Loads
187
Dead load at pier for exterior beam...........

PDC.PierExt = 183.6 kip
PDC.PierExt := 2 PDC.BeamExt
( (
) ) )
Dead load at pier for interior beam...........

PDW.PierInt = 10.8 kip
PDW.PierInt := 2 PDW.BeamInt
Dead load at pier for exterior beam...........

PDW.PierExt = 9.4 kip
PDW.PierExt := 2 PDW.BeamExt
B4. End Bent and Pier Dead Load Summary
End Bent Beam Reactions

UNFACTORED BEAM REACTIONS AT END BENTS
Beam DC Loads (kip) x y 0.0 -91.8 0.0 -87.1 0.0 -87.1 0.0 -87.1 0.0 -87.1 0.0 -87.1 0.0 -87.1 0.0 -87.1 0.0 -87.1 0.0 -87.1 0.0 -91.8 z 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 DW Loads (kip) x y 0.0 -5.4 0.0 -4.7 0.0 -4.7 0.0 -4.7 0.0 -4.7 0.0 -4.7 0.0 -4.7 0.0 -4.7 0.0 -4.7 0.0 -4.7 0.0 -5.4 z 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Pier Beam Reactions

UNFACTORED BEAM REACTIONS AT PIER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Defined Units
Substructure Design
3.01 Dead Loads
188
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
Pier Cap Live Load Analysis
References
Reference:F:\HDRDesignExamples\Ex1_PCBeam\301DLsSub.mcd(R)
Description
This section provides the pier cap design live load for (1) maximum positive moment, (2) maximum negative moment and (3) overhang negative moment.
Page
190
Contents
A. Input Variables A1. Shear: Skewed Modification Factor [LRFD 4.6.2.2.3c] A2. Maximum Live Load Reaction at Intermediate Pier - Two HL-93 Vehicles
191
B. Maximum Live Load Positive Moment B1. Influence Lines for the Maximum Positive Moment in Pier Cap B2. HL-93 Vehicle Placement for Maximum Moment
194
C. Maximum Negative Live Load Moment C1. HL-93 Vehicle Placement for Maximum Moment
196
D. Overhang Negative Live Load Moment D1. HL-93 Vehicle Placement for Maximum Moment
197
E. Summary
Substructure Design
3.02 Pier Cap Live Load Analysis
189
A. Input Variables
A1. Shear: Skewed Modification Factor [LRFD 4.6.2.2.3c]
Skew modification factor for shear shall be applied to the exterior beam at the obtuse corner (>90 deg) and to all beams in a multibeam bridge, whereas gv.Skew = 1.086 .
A2. Maximum Live Load Reaction at Intermediate Pier - Two HL-93 Vehicles
The reaction, RLLIs = 148.0 kip , needs to be separated into the truck and lane components in order to determine the beam reactions due to various vehicle placements along the deck. Reaction induced by HL-93 truck load...... Reaction induced by lane load.................. Impact factor........................................ The truck reaction (including impact and skew modification factors) is applied on the deck as two wheel-line loads..............
wheelline = 52.2 kip Rtrucks = 80.3 kip Rlanes = 57.6 kip IM = 1.33
wheelline := 90%
Rtrucks IM gv.Skew 2
The lane load reaction (including skew modification factor) is applied on the deck as a distributed load over the 10 ft lane.....
kip laneload = 5.6 ft
Rlanes laneload := 90% g 10 ft v.Skew
The truck wheel-line load and lane load can be placed in design lanes according to one of the following patterns.
Substructure Design
190
B. Maximum Positive Live Load Moment

For design live load moments in the pier cap, the controlling number and position of design live load lanes needs to be determined. This section shows a means of determining the controlling configuration of design lanes, along with the corresponding beam loads and pier cap moments.
B1. Influence Lines for the Maximum Positive Moment in Pier Cap
The influence lines for the pier cap will help determine the placement of design lanes on the deck to maximize moments in the pier cap. The influence lines are developed from the following model of the substructure.
The maximum positive moment in the pier cap will occur in the first bay. Typically, the maximum positive moment occurs at a distance of 0.4L from column 1 in span 1 for self-weight and uniformly applied loads. For concentrated loads, the maximum positive moment is expected to occur at beam 3 (0.5L) location. For this example, the finite element program LARSA 2000 was used to generate the influence lines at beam 3 location in the substructure model.
Influence Lines for Maximum Positive Moment in Span 1
6
Influence Lines Maximum Positive Moment in Span 1 Influence Line Magnitude -1.04 1.16 4.74 1.05 -0.42 -0.60 -0.23 0.05 0.09 0.03 0.00
Influence Line Magnitude
10
11
-2 1 2 3 4
-4
-6 Distance along Pier Cap (ft)
Beam 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Distance 4.6 13.9 23.1 32.3 41.6 50.8 60.1 69.3 78.5 87.8 97.0
Substructure Design
191
B2. HL-93 Vehicle Placement for Maximum Moment

HL-93 vehicles, comprising of HL-93 wheel-line loads and lane loads, should be placed on the deck to maximize the moments in the pier cap. Design Lane Placements For this example, the lane placements should maximize the positive moment in span 1. Referring to the influence lines for the pier cap, lanes placed above beams 2, 3, 4, 8, 9, and 10 will contribute to the maximum positive moment. Beam 3 is the most influential, followed by beam 2. The graph also shows that lanes placed above beams 1, 5, 6, 7, and 11 will reduce the maximum positive moment. From this information, several possible configurations for 1, 2, 3, and 4 lanes can be developed to maximize the positive moment in span 1. Note that for the maximum cap moments, live load is also placed on the other roadway. The influence line justifies live load placement in this roadway. Utilizing our engineering judgement, it is possible to have up to four lanes of HL-93 vehicles at a single time. However, note that for the calculation of the braking forces, vehicles in the opposite roadway were not utilized since the braking forces would be counter productive or in opposite directions.
Depending on the number of design lanes, a multiple presence factor (LRFD Table 3.6.1.1.2-1) is applied to the HL-93 wheel line loads and lane load.
MPF = 1.2 if Number_of_lanes = 1 1.0 if Number_of_lanes = 2 0.85 if Number_of_lanes = 3 0.65 if Number_of_lanes 4
Substructure Design
192
Corresponding Beam Loads The live loads from the design lanes are transferred to the pier cap through the beams. Utilizing the lever rule, the beam loads corresponding to the design lane configurations are calculated and multiplied by the multiple presence factors.
Beam Loads 2 Lanes 3 Lanes 0 0 61.7 52.5 136.3 115.9 104.6 89 18.7 15.9 0 0 0 0 0 42.4 0 85.9 0 8.3 0 0
Beam 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 Lane 0 34 124.7 34 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4 Lanes 0 40.1 88.6 69 75.6 40.1 0 32.4 65.7 6.3 0
Corresponding Moments The moments in the pier cap corresponding to the beam loads were determined using the Larsa 2000.
Maximum Positive Moment (k-ft) 725.7 892.8 769.3 590.2
1 Lane 2 Lanes 3 Lanes 4 Lanes
Substructure Design
193
C. Maximum Negative Live Load Moment

C1. Influence Lines for Maximum Negative Moment in Pier Cap
The maximum negative moment in the pier cap can occur at the first or second column. In this section, Larsa 2000 was used to generate the influence lines at the second intermediate column in the pier cap model. The maximum negative moment at the first column, pier cap overhang, will be checked separately.
Influence Lines for Maximum Negative Moment at Column 2 (left)

3
Influence Lines Maximum Negative Moment at Column 2

Influence Line Magnitude (Column left face) Influence Line Magnitude (Column right face)
10
11
-1
1
-2
Beam 1 2 3 4 Col left Col right 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Distance 4.6 13.9 23.1 32.3 35.0 39.0 41.6 50.8 60.1 69.3 78.5 87.8 97.0
-0.66 0.93 1.90 0.36 0.00 -0.96 1.34 0.48 -0.10 -0.29 -0.17 0.21
0.27 -0.57 -1.47 -1.00 -0.00 -0.26 -1.63 -0.74 0.15 0.26 0.08 0.04
C2. HL-93 Vehicle Placement for Maximum Moment

HL-93 vehicles, comprising of HL-93 wheel-line loads and lane loads, should be placed on the deck to maximize the moments in the pier cap. Design Lane Placements For this example, the lane placements should maximize the negative moment above column 2. Referring to the influence lines for the pier cap, lanes placed above beams 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 11 will contribute to the maximum negative moment. Beam 3 is the most influential, followed by beam 6. The graph also shows that lanes placed above beams 1, 8, 9, and 10 will reduce the maximum negative moment. From this information, several possible configurations for 2, 3, and 4 lanes can be developed to maximize the negative moment above column 2.
Substructure Design
194
Corresponding Beam Loads The live loads from the design lanes are transferred to the pier cap through the beams. Utilizing the lever rule, the beam loads corresponding to the design lane configurations are calculated and multiplied by the multiple presence factors.
Beam Loads 2 Lanes 3 Lanes 0 0 61.7 52.5 136.3 115.9 104.6 89 18.7 68.3 0 83 0 1.2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beam 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 Lane 0 1.7 117.1 74 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4 Lanes 0 40.1 88.6 68 52.3 88.6 68 12.2 0 0 0
Corresponding Moments The moments in the pier cap corresponding to the beam loads were determined using the Larsa 2000.
Maximum Negative Moment (k-ft) -515.1 -737.6 -814.6 -265.8
Substructure Design
195
D. Overhang Negative Live Load Moment

In this section, the negative moment at column 1 is determined due to the overhang.
D1. HL-93 Vehicle Placement for Maximum Moment

HL-93 vehicles, comprising of HL-93 wheel-line loads and lane loads, should be placed on the deck to maximize the moments in the pier cap. Design Lane Placements For this example, the lane placements should maximize the negative moment above column 1. The maximum negative moment will be obtained by loading beam 1. From this information, placing a single lane next to the barrier will maximize the negative moment above column 1.
Corresponding Beam Loads and Moment The live loads from the design lanes are transferred to the pier cap through the beams. Utilizing the lever rule, the beam loads corresponding to the design lane configurations are calculated and multiplied by the multiple presence factors.
Beam Loads 1 Lane 2 Lanes 144.6 --48.2 --0 --0 --0 --0 --0 --0 --0 --0 --0 ---
Beam 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
The moments in the pier cap corresponding to the beam loads were determined using the Larsa 2000.
Maximum Overhang Moment (k-ft) -727.6
1 Lane
Substructure Design
196
E. Summary
The results show that two design lanes govern. The following beam loads, corresponding to the governing positive moment live load, will later be used in the limit state combinations to obtain the design factored and unfactored positive moments for the pier cap........................
UNFACTORED LIVE LOAD (+M) AT PIER

Beam LL Loads (kip) x y 0.0 0.0 0.0 -61.7 0.0 -136.3 0.0 -104.6 0.0 -18.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 z 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
The results show that three design lanes govern. The following beam loads, corresponding to the governing negative moment live load, will later be used in the limit state combinations to obtain the design factored and unfactored negative moments for the pier cap......................................
UNFACTORED LIVE LOAD (-M) AT PIER

Beam LL Loads (kip) x y 0.0 0.0 0.0 -52.5 0.0 -115.9 0.0 -89.0 0.0 -68.3 0.0 -83.0 0.0 -1.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 z 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Substructure Design
197
The following beam loads, corresponding to the governing overhang negative moment live load, will later be used in the limit state combinations to obtain the design factored and unfactored negative moments for the pier cap......................
UNFACTORED LIVE LOAD (Overhang) AT PIER

Beam LL Loads (kip) x y 0.0 -144.6 0.0 -48.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 z 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Defined Units
Substructure Design
198
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
Pier Cap Design Loads
Reference
Reference:\\Sdo-appserver\computer_support\StructuresSoftware\StructuresManual\HDRDesignExamples\Ex1_PCBeam\302LLs.m
Description
This section provides the design parameters necessary for the substructure pier cap design. The loads calculated in this file are only from the superstructure. Substructure self-weight, wind on substructure and uniform temperature on substructure can be generated by the substructure analysis model/program chosen by the user. For this design example, Larsa 2000 was chosen as the analysis model/program (http://www.larsausa.com)
Page
200 202
Contents
LRFD Criteria A. General Criteria A1. Bearing Design Movement/Strain A2. Pier Dead Load Summary A3. Pier Live Load Summary A4. Center of Movement
205
B. Lateral Load Analysis B1. Center of Movement B2. Braking Force: BR [LRFD 3.6.4] B3. Temperature, Creep and Shrinkage Forces B4. Wind Pressure on Structure: WS B5. Wind Pressure on Vehicles [LRFD 3.8.1.3]
216
C. Design Limit States C1. Strength I Limit State C2. Strength V Limit State C3. Service I Limit State
Substructure Design
3.03 Pier Cap Design Loads
199
LRFD Criteria
WA = 0 FR = 0 TU
For superstructure design, water load and stream pressure are not applicable. No friction forces. Uniform temperature load effects on the pier will be generated by the substructure analysis model (Larsa 2000).
Strength1 = 1.25 DC + 1.50 DW + 1.75 LL + 0.50 ( TU + CR + SH )
STRENGTH II -
STRENGTH III -
Load combination relating to the bridge exposed to wind velocity exceeding 55 MPH.
Strength3 = 1.25 DC + 1.50 DW + 1.40 WS + 0.50 ( TU + CR + SH ) "Applicable but does not control substructure pier cap design... not evaluated"
STRENGTH IV -
Load combination relating to very high dead load to live load force effect ratios.
"Not applicable for the substructure design in this design example"
STRENGTH V -
Load combination relating to normal vehicular use of the bridge with wind of 55 MPH velocity.
Strength5 = 1.25 DC + 1.50 DW + 1.35 LL + 1.35 BR + 0.40 WS + 1.0 WL ... + 0.50 ( TU + CR + SH)
EXTREME EVENT I - Load combination including earthquake.

"Not applicable for this simple span prestressed beam bridge design example"
EXTREME EVENT II - Load combination relating to ice load, collision by vessels and vehicles, and certain hydraulic events.
SERVICE I -
Service1 = 1.0 DC + 1.0 DW + 1.0 LL + 1.0 BR + 0.3WS + 1.0 WL + 1.0 ( TU + CR + SH )
SERVICE II -
Load combination intended to control yielding of steel structures and slip of slip-critical connections due to vehicular live load.
Substructure Design
200
SERVICE III -
FATIGUE -
Substructure Design
201
A. General Criteria
Strain due to temperature, creep and shrinkage..............................................
CST = 0.00047 (Note: See Sect. 2.10.B4 - Bearing Design Movement/Strain)
A2. Pier Dead Load Summary

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A3. Pier Live Load Summary

Unfactored beam reactions at the pier for LL loads corresponding to maximum positive moment
UNFACTORED LIVE LOAD (+M) AT PIER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Substructure Design
202
Unfactored beam reactions at the pier for LL loads corresponding to maximum negative moment
UNFACTORED LIVE LOAD (-M) AT PIER
Beam LL Loads (kip) x y 0.0 0.0 0.0 -52.5 0.0 -115.9 0.0 -89.0 0.0 -68.3 0.0 -83.0 0.0 -1.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 z 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Unfactored beam reactions at the pier for LL loads corresponding to maximum overhang negative moment
UNFACTORED LIVE LOAD (Overhang) AT PIER
Beam LL Loads (kip) x y 0.0 -144.6 0.0 -48.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 z 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Substructure Design
203
A4. Center of Movement
By inspection, the center of movement will be the intermediate pier.....................

L0 = 90.0 ft
L0 := Lspan
Substructure Design
204
B. Lateral Load Analysis

B1. Centrifugal Force: CE [LRFD 3.6.3]
LRFD 4.6.1.2.1 states that effects of curvature may be neglected on open cross-sections whose radius is such that the central angle subtended by each span is less than:
Number of Beams 2 3 or 4 5 or more
Angle for One Span 2o 3o 4o
Angle for Two or More Spans 3o 4o 5o

R := 3800 ft Lspan 1span := R 2span := Lbridge R
Horizontal curve data.............................. Angle due to one span.............................

1span = 1.4 deg
Angle due to all spans.............................

2span = 2.7 deg
Since the number of beams is greater than 5 and the angles are within LRFD requirements, the bridge can be analyzed as a straight structure and therefore, centrifigal force effects are not necessary.
B2. Braking Force: BR [LRFD 3.6.4]

The braking force should be taken as the greater of: 25% of axle weight for design truck / tandem 5% of design truck / tandem and lane The number of lanes for braking force calculations depends on future expectations of the bridge. For this example, the bridge is not expected to become one-directional in the future, and future widening is expected to occur to the outside. From this information, the number of lanes is
Nlanes = 3
The multiple presence factor (LRFD Table 3.6.1.1.2-1) should be taken into account..
MPF = 0.85
MPF :=
1.2 if Nlanes = 1 1.0 if Nlanes = 2 0.85 if Nlanes = 3 0.65 otherwise
Braking force as 25% of axle weight for design truck / tandem.............................

BRForce.1 = 45.9 kip
BRForce.1 := 25% ( 72 kip ) Nlanes MPF
Substructure Design
205
Braking force as 5% of axle weight for design truck / tandem and lane.................
BRForce.2 := 5% 72 kip + wlane 2 Lspan Nlanes MPF
Governing braking force.........................

BRForce = 45.9 kip
BRForce := max BRForce.1 , BRForce.2
Distribution of Braking Forces to Pier
The same bearing pads are provided at the pier and end bent to distribute the braking forces. The braking force transferred to the pier or end bents is a function of the bearing pad and pier column stiffnesses. For this example, (1) the pier column stiffnesses are ignored, (2) the deck is continuous over pier 2 and expansion joints are provided only at the end bents.
BRPier = BRForce KPier KPier =
Braking force at pier...............................
where.............................................
Npads.pier Kpad
(Npads.pier + Npads.endbent)Kpad
Simplifying and using variables defined in this example, pier stiffness can be calculated as.......
KPier = 0.5 2 Nbeams KPier := ( 1 + 2 + 1 ) Nbeams BRPier := BRForce KPier
corresponding braking force..............

BRPier = 23.0 kip
Since the bridge superstructure is very stiff in the longitudinal direction, the braking forces are assumed to be equally distributed to the beams under the respective roadway.
beams := 6 BRPier BRPier := beams
Braking force at pier per beam.................

BRPier = 3.8 kip
Substructure Design
206
Adjustments for Skew The braking force is transferred to the pier by the bearing pads. The braking forces need to be resolved along the direction of the skew for design of the pier substructure. Braking force perpendicular (z-direction) to the pier per beam....................................
BRz.Pier = 3.3 kip BRz.Pier := BRPier cos( Skew)
Braking force parallel (x-direction) to the pier per beam.........................................

BRx.Pier = 1.9 kip
BRx.Pier := BRPier sin( Skew)
Adjustments for Braking Force Loads Applied 6' above Deck The longitudinal moment induced by braking forces over a pier is resisted by the moment arm. Conservatively, assume the braking occurs over one span only, then the result is an uplift reaction on the downstation end bent or pier and a downward reaction at the upstation end bent or pier. In this example, the braking is assumed to occur in span 1 and the eccentricity of the downward load with the bearing and centerline of pier eccentricities is ignored.
Moment arm from top of bearing pad to location of applied load............................

M arm = 11.250 ft
M arm := 6ft + h BRPier M arm Lspan
Braking force in pier (y-direction), vertical

BRy.Pier = 0.5 kip
BRy.Pier :=
Only the downward component of this force is considered. Typically, the vertical forces (uplift) are small and can be ignored.
Substructure Design
207
BRAKING FORCES AT PIER

BR Loads (kip) x y -1.9 -0.5 -1.9 -0.5 -1.9 -0.5 -1.9 -0.5 -1.9 -0.5 -1.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Beam
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
z 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
B3. Creep, Shrinkage, and Temperature Forces

The forces transferred from the superstructure to the substructure due to temperature, creep, and shrinkage are influenced by the shear displacements in the bearing pad. In this example, only temperature and shrinkage effects are considered. Creep is ignored, since this example assumes the beams will creep towards their center and the composite deck will offer some restraint. Displacements at top of pier due to temperature, creep, and shrinkage............
Pier2 = 0.0 in
Pier2 := L0 x dist CST 1
where
CST = 0.00047
Since the bridge has two equal spans and fairly constant pier stiffnesses, the center of movement is the intermediate pier. The center of movement has no displacements, so the pier has no displacements. Shear force transferred through each bearing pad due to creep, shrinkage, and temperature............................................
CSTPier = 0.00 kip Gmax Apad Pier2 h rt
CSTPier :=
This force needs to be resolved along the direction of the skew... Shear force perpendicular (z-direction) to the pier per beam...................................
CSTz.Pier = 0.00 kip CSTz.Pier := CSTPier cos( Skew)
Shear force parallel (x-direction) to the pier per beam...............................................

CSTx.Pier = 0.00 kip
CSTx.Pier := CSTPier sin( Skew)
Substructure Design
208
Summary of beam reactions at the pier due to creep, shrinkage and temperature...
CREEP, SHRINKAGE, TEMPERATURE FORCES AT PIER

Beam CR, SH, TU Loads (kip) x y z 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Note:
Shrinkage and temperature effects from the pier substructure can be calculated within the substructure model / analysis program. These values are only from the superstructure.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B4. Wind Pressure on Structure: WS

The wind loads are applied to the superstructure and substructure. Loads from Superstructure [LRFD 3.8.1.2.2] The wind pressure on the superstructure consists of lateral (x-direction) and longitudinal (z-direction) components. z x For prestressed beam bridges, the following wind pressures are given in the LRFD...................................................
0 15 Windskew := 30 45 60
.050 .044 WindLRFD := .041 .033 .017
.000 .006 .012 ksf .016 .019
The wind pressures in LRFD should be increased by 20% for bridges located in Palm Beach, Broward, Dade, and Monroe counties (LRFD 2.4.1). For bridges over 75 feet high or with unusual structural features, the wind pressures must be submitted to FDOT for approval. This example assumes a South Florida location, so the 20% factor applies...........
WindFDOT := FDOT WindLRFD
z
0.000 0.007 0.014 ksf 0.019 0.023
0.060 0.053 WindFDOT = 0.049 0.040 0.020
Substructure Design
209
Composite section height.........................

h = 5.25 ft
Superstructure Height.............................
h Super := h + 2.667 ft
Height above ground that the wind pressure is applied...............................................

Z1 = 24.42 ft
Z1 := h Col h Surcharge + h Cap + h Super
The exposed superstructure area influences the wind forces that are transferred to the supporting substructure. Tributary areas are used to determine the exposed superstructure area. Exposed superstructure area at Pier 2.......
ASuper = 712.5 ft
2
ASuper := Lspan h Super
Forces due to wind applied to the superstructure.......................................
WS Super.Pier := WindFDOT ASuper
37.6 WS Super.Pier = 35.1 28.2 14.5
42.8 0.0
5.1
10.3 kip 13.7 16.2
A conservative approach is taken to minimize the analysis required. The maximum transverse and longitudinal forces are used in the following calculations. Maximum transverse force......................
FWS.x = 42.8 kip FWS.x := WS Super.Pier 0, 0
Maximum longitudinal force....................

FWS.z = 16.2 kip
FWS.z := WS Super.Pier 4, 1
The forces due to wind need to be resolved along the direction of the skew. Force perpendicular (z-direction) to the pier.......................................................
WS z.Pier = 35.4 kip WS z.Pier := FWS.z cos( Skew) FWS.x sin( Skew)
Force parallel (x-direction) to the pier.......

WS x.Pier = 28.9 kip
WS x.Pier := FWS.z sin( Skew) + FWS.x cos( Skew)
Substructure Design
210
The force due to wind acts on the full superstructure. This force needs to be resolved into the reactions in each beam. The following table summarizes the beam reactions due to wind.
WIND ON STRUCTURE FORCES AT PIER
WS Loads (kip) x y 2.6 0.0 2.6 0.0 2.6 0.0 2.6 0.0 2.6 0.0 2.6 0.0 2.6 0.0 2.6 0.0 2.6 0.0 2.6 0.0 2.6 0.0
Beam
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
z 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2
Loads from Substructure [LRFD 3.8.1.2.3] Wind pressure applied directly to the substructure..........................................
WindLRFD := 0.04 ksf
The wind pressures in LRFD should be increased by 20% for bridges located in Palm Beach, Broward, Dade, and Monroe counties (LRFD 2.4.1). This example assumes a South Florida location, so the 20% factor applies...........
WindFDOT = 0.048 ksf WindFDOT := FDOT WindLRFD
General equation for wind forces applied to the substructure.....................................

WS Force = WindPressure Exposed AreaSubstructure SkewAdjustment
)(
)(
For modeling purposes in this example, the following information summarizes the placement of wind forces on the substructure.
Substructure Design
211
The longitudinal (z-direction) wind load on the pier cap is applied as a line load along the front of the cap.
WS z.PierCap := WindFDOT h Cap cos( Skew) h Cap sin( Skew) WS z.PierCap = 0.30 klf
The transverse (x-direction) wind load on the pier cap is applied as a point load on the end of the cap.
WS x.PierCap := WindFDOT b Cap h Cap cos( Skew) + LCap h Cap sin( Skew) WS x.PierCap = 10.13 kip
The longitudinal (z-direction) wind load on the column is applied as a line load on the exposed column height.
WS z.PierCol := WindFDOT b Col cos( Skew) b Col sin( Skew) WS z.PierCol = 0.26 klf
The transverse (x-direction) wind load on the column is applied as a line load on the exposed column height.
WS x.PierCol := WindFDOT b Col cos( Skew) + b Col sin( Skew) WS x.PierCol = 0.07 klf
B5. Wind Pressure on Vehicles [LRFD 3.8.1.3] 0 15 Skewwind := 30 45 60
z
0 .012
The LRFD specifies that wind load should be applied to vehicles on the bridge..........
.100 .088 WindLRFD := .082 .066 .034
kip
ft
.024 .032 .038
WindFDOT := 1.20 WindLRFD
z
0.000 0.014 0.029 0.038 0.046
0.120 0.106 WindFDOT = 0.098 0.079 0.041
kip
ft
Substructure Design
212
Height above ground for wind pressure on vehicles.................................................

Z2 = 28.25 ft
Z2 := Z1 2.1667 ft + 6ft
The wind forces on vehicles are transmitted to Pier 2 of the substructure using tributary lengths............................
LPier = 90 ft
LPier := Lspan
Forces due to wind on vehicles applied to the superstructure..................................
WLSuper.Pier := WindFDOT LPier
z
0.0 1.3 2.6 kip 3.5 4.1
10.8 9.5 WLSuper.Pier = 8.9 7.1 3.7
A conservative approach is taken to minimize the analysis required. The maximum transverse and longitudinal forces are used in the following calculations. Maximum transverse force......................
FWL.x = 10.8 kip FWL.x := WLSuper.Pier 0, 0

FWL.z = 4.1 kip
FWL.z := WLSuper.Pier 4, 1
The forces due to wind need to be resolved along the direction of the skew. Force perpendicular (z-direction) to the pier.......................................................
WLz.Pier = 8.95 kip WLz.Pier := FWL.z cos( Skew) FWL.x sin( Skew)
Force perpendicular (z-direction) to the pier per beam.........................................

WLz.Beam = 0.81 kip
WLz.Pier WLz.Beam := Nbeams WLx.Pier := FWL.z sin( Skew) + FWL.x cos( Skew)
Force parallel (x-direction) to the cap........

WLx.Pier = 7.30 kip
Force parallel (x-direction) to the cap per beam.....................................................

WLx.Beam = 0.66 kip
WLx.Pier WLx.Beam := Nbeams
Substructure Design
213
Longitudinal Adjustments for Wind on Vehicles The longitudinal moment is resisted by the moment arm (similar to braking forces).
Moment arm from top of bearing pad to location of applied load...........................

M arm = 11.250 ft (Marm = h + 6 ft) WLz.Beam M arm Lspan
Vertical force in pier due to wind pressure on vehicle per beam................................

WLy.Beam = 0.10 kip
WLy.Beam :=
For this design example, this component of the load is ignored.
Transverse Adjustments for Wind on Vehicles Using the principles of the lever rule for transverse distribution of live load on beams, the wind on live can be distributed similarly. It assumes that the wind acting on the live load will cause the vehicle to tilt over. Using the lever rule, the tilting effect of the vehicle is resisted by up and down reactions on the beams assuming the deck to act as a simple span between beams. For this example, the reaction at beam 3 is maximized for maximum positive moment in the pier cap. (To maximize the loads at other locations, these loads can be moved across the deck.)
Substructure Design
214
Moment arm from top of bearing pad to location of applied load...........................

M arm = 11.250 ft
Vertical reaction on one beam on pier from transverse wind pressure on vehicles........
WLy.Beam = 10.27 kip
WLy.Beam :=
WLx.Pier M arm BeamSpacing
Since this load can occur at any beam location, apply this load to all beams
WIND ON LIVE LOAD FORCES AT PIER
Beam WL Loads (kip) x y 0.7 0.0 0.7 10.3 0.7 -10.3 0.7 0.0 0.7 0.0 0.7 0.0 0.7 0.0 0.7 0.0 0.7 0.0 0.7 0.0 0.7 0.0 z 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Substructure Design
215
C. Design Limit States

The design loads for strength I, strength V, and service I limit states are summarized in this section. For each limit state, three loading conditions are presented: maximum positive moment in the cap, maximum negative moment in span 1, and maximum overhang negative moment.
These reactions are from the superstructure only, acting on the substructure. In the analysis model, such as a GTStrudl, Sap2000, Strudl, Larsa 2000, etc, include the following loads: DC: self-weight of the substructure, include pier cap and columns TU: a temperature increase and fall on the pier substructure utilizing the following parameters: coefficient of expansion t = 6 10 temperature change
6 1
temperatureincrease = temperaturefall = 25 F
For instance, in LEAP's RCPier, two load cases would be required for temperature with a positive and negative strain being inputed, equal to: t ( 25 F) = 0.00015
Note that in our model, the loads applied at the top of the cap from the beams are applied to rigid links that transfer the lateral loads as a lateral load and moment at the centroid of the pier cap. This is consistent with substructure design programs like LEAP's RCPier. Fixity of the pier was provided at the bottom of the columns.
Substructure Design 3.03 Pier Cap Design Loads 216
WS: Wind on the substructure should be applied directly to the analysis model. The following is an example of the wind locations and terminology used in our analysis:
Forces applied directly to the analysis model
All applied loads in the substructure analysis model should be multiplied by the appropriate load factor values and combined with the limit state loads calculated in this file for the final results.
C1. Strength I Limit State Loads

Strength1 = 1.25 DC + 1.5 DW + 1.75 LL + 1.75BR + 0.50 ( TU + CR + SH)
Strength I Limit State -M Loads (kip) Z X Y 5.8 -3.3 -246.5 5.8 -3.3 -324.7 5.8 -3.3 -435.7 5.8 -3.3 -388.6 5.8 -3.3 -352.4 0.0 -3.3 -377.3 0.0 0.0 -234.1 0.0 0.0 -232.0 0.0 0.0 -232.0 0.0 0.0 -232.0 0.0 0.0 -245.7
Beam # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
+M Loads (kip) X Y -3.3 -246.5 -3.3 -340.8 -3.3 -471.4 -3.3 -415.9 -3.3 -265.6 -3.3 -232.0 0.0 -232.0 0.0 -232.0 0.0 -232.0 0.0 -232.0 0.0 -245.7
Z 5.8 5.8 5.8 5.8 5.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Overhang -M Loads (kip) X Y Z -3.3 -499.5 5.8 -3.3 -317.2 5.8 -3.3 -232.9 5.8 -3.3 -232.9 5.8 -3.3 -232.9 5.8 -3.3 -232.0 0.0 0.0 -232.0 0.0 0.0 -232.0 0.0 0.0 -232.0 0.0 0.0 -232.0 0.0 0.0 -245.7 0.0
Substructure Design
217
C2. Strength V Limit State Loads

Strength5 = 1.25 DC + 1.50 DW + 1.35 LL + 1.35 BR + 0.40 WS + 1.0 WL + 0.50 ( TU + CR + SH)
Beam # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
+M Loads (kip) X Y -0.9 -246.3 -0.9 -305.7 -0.9 -426.9 -0.9 -373.9 -0.9 -257.9 -0.9 -232.0 1.7 -232.0 1.7 -232.0 1.7 -232.0 1.7 -232.0 1.7 -245.7
Z 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1
-M Loads (kip) X Y -0.9 -246.3 -0.9 -293.3 -0.9 -399.4 -0.9 -352.8 -0.9 -324.9 -0.9 -344.1 1.7 -233.6 1.7 -232.0 1.7 -232.0 1.7 -232.0 1.7 -245.7
Z 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1
Overhang -M Loads (kip) X Y Z -0.9 -441.5 6.6 -0.9 -287.5 6.6 -0.9 -242.9 6.6 -0.9 -232.7 6.6 -0.9 -232.7 6.6 -0.9 -232.0 2.1 1.7 -232.0 2.1 1.7 -232.0 2.1 1.7 -232.0 2.1 1.7 -232.0 2.1 1.7 -245.7 2.1
Wind Loads Applied to Substructure X (transv) Z (long) -4.05 kip 0.12 klf Pier Cap 0.03 klf 0.10 klf Pier Column
C3. Service I Limit State Loads

Service1 = 1.0 DC + 1.0 DW + 1.0 LL + 1.0 BR + 0.3WS + 1.0 WL + 1.0 CST +M Loads (kip) X Y -0.5 -194.8 -0.5 -235.6 -0.5 -330.8 -0.5 -288.8 -0.5 -202.9 -0.5 -183.7 1.5 -183.7 1.5 -183.7 1.5 -183.7 1.5 -183.7 1.5 -194.4 -M Loads (kip) X Y -0.5 -194.8 -0.5 -226.4 -0.5 -310.4 -0.5 -273.2 -0.5 -252.5 -0.5 -266.7 1.5 -184.9 1.5 -183.7 1.5 -183.7 1.5 -183.7 1.5 -194.4 Overhang -M Loads (kip) X Y Z -0.5 -339.4 5.1 -0.5 -222.1 5.1 -0.5 -194.5 5.1 -0.5 -184.2 5.1 -0.5 -184.2 5.1 -0.5 -183.7 1.8 1.5 -183.7 1.8 1.5 -183.7 1.8 1.5 -183.7 1.8 1.5 -183.7 1.8 1.5 -194.4 1.8
Beam # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Z 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8
Z 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8
Wind Loads Applied to Substructure X (transv) Z (long) -3.04 kip 0.09 klf Pier Cap 0.02 klf 0.08 klf Pier Column
Substructure Design
218
C4. Summary of Results
LARSA 2000 RESULTS

Member Joint
Result Case
Fx
Fy
Fz
Mx
My
Mz
17 17 17 20 20 20 20 20 20 14 14 14 14
18 Strength 1 - +M Cap -TU 18 Strength 5 - +M Cap -TU 18 Service 1 - +M Cap -TU 20 21 20 21 20 21 14 15 14 15 Strength 1 - -M Cap -TU Strength 1 - -M Cap -TU Strength 5 - -M Cap -TU Strength 5 - -M Cap -TU Service 1 - -M Cap -TU Service 1 - -M Cap -TU Strength 1 - OH Cap -TU Strength 1 - OH Cap -TU Service 1 - OH Cap -TU Service 1 - OH Cap -TU
-35.74 -22.25 18.78 14.69 -14.69 13.24 -13.24 -26.23 26.23 -0.95 0.95 -3.65 3.65
-199.75 -177.89 -122.36 -643.41 650.05 -626.10 632.74 -514.83 520.14 -469.94 476.58 -362.15 367.47
3.49 3.86 2.97 9.54 -9.54 10.99 -11.20 8.48 -8.63 6.74 -6.74 5.90 -6.06
-28.01 -13.57 -9.12
53.27 59.81 45.55
2742.47 2453.31 1966.55 2063.12 * -3194.90 2006.73 * -3108.21 1715.77 * -2621.36 1375.62 * -2203.83 1060.40 * -1698.82
45.15 -0.69 -45.15 -16.00 43.48 2.24 -43.48 -21.66 32.24 2.38 -32.24 -17.35 14.85 19.33 -14.85 -31.12 11.48 17.52 -11.48 -27.99
NOTES: (1) Values at face of column (*) used for design. Other node results given represents value at centerline of column. (2) Values highlighted are governing design loads. (3) -M cap design govern over overhang moment. Design of overhang will have the same steel as the negative moment requirements within the cap. (4) (-TU) means load case with a temperature fall in the substructure governed.
Also note that Strength V values do not govern in the design of the pier cap. Only the highlighted values are used for the pier cap design.
Defined Units
Substructure Design 3.03 Pier Cap Design Loads 219
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
Pier Cap Design

References
Reference:F:\HDRDesignExamples\Ex1_PCBeam\303PierCapLds.mcd(R)
Description
This section provides the criteria for the pier cap design.
Page
221 223
Contents
A. Input Variables B. Positive Moment Design B1. Positive Moment Region Design - Flexural Resistance [LRFD 5.7.3.2] B2. Limits for Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.3.3] B3. Crack Control by Distribution Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.3.4] B4. Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement [LRFD 5.10.8.2] B5. Mass Concrete Provisions
230
C. Negative Moment Design C1. Negative Moment Region Design - Flexural Resistance [LRFD 5.7.3.2] C2. Limits for Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.3.3] C3. Crack Control by Distribution Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.3.4]
235
D. Shear and Torsion Design [LRFD 5.8] D1. Check if Torsion Design is Required D2. Determine Nominal Shear Resistance D3. Transverse Reinforcement D4. Longitudinal Reinforcement
239
E. Summary
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
3.04 Pier Cap Design
220
A. Input Variables
Material Properties Unit weight of concrete........................... Modulus of elasticity for reinforcing steel.. Yield strength for reinforcing steel........... Design Parameters Resistance factor for flexure and tension of reinforced concrete................................ Resistance factor for shear and torsion (normal weight concrete)........................
= 0.9 v := 0.90 conc = 150 pcf Es = 29000 ksi fy = 60 ksi
Design Lanes Current lane configurations show two striped lanes per roadway with a traffic median barrier separating the roadways. Using the roadway clear width between barriers, Rdwywidth , the number of design traffic lanes per roadway, N lanes , can be calculated as: Roadway clear width.............................. Number of design traffic lanes per roadway...............................................
Rdwywidth = 42 ft
N lanes = 3
Florida Design Criteria Concrete cover for substructure not in contact with water................................. Concrete cover for substructure in contact with water or earth..................... Minimum 28-day compressive strength for cast-in-place substructure....................... Modulus of elasticity for cast-in-place substructure.......................................... Environmental classification for substructure..........................................
cover sub = 3 in cover sub.earth = 4 in fc.sub = 5.5 ksi Ec.sub = 3841 ksi Environmentsub = "Moderately"
Note: Epoxy coated reinforcing not allowed on FDOT projects.
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
221
Pier Geometry Height of pier cap................................... Width of pier cap................................... Length of pier cap.................................. Length of pier column............................. Column diameter.................................... Number of columns............................... Surchage (column section in ground).......
hCap = 4.5 ft b Cap = 4.5 ft LCap = 101.614 ft hCol = 14 ft b Col = 4 ft nCol = 4 hSurcharge = 2 ft
Design Loads - Moments, Shears and Torques Moment (-M) - Service........................... Moment (-M) - Strength........................... Corresponding Shear (-M) - Strength........ Corresponding Torsion (-M) - Strength.....
M Service1.neg = 1715.8 ft kip M Strength1.neg = 2063.1 ft kip V Strength1.neg = 643.4 kip *** See Note 1 TStrength1.neg = 45.2 ft kip M Service1.pos = 1966.5 ft kip M Strength1.pos = 2742.5 ft kip V Strength1.pos = 199.7 kip TStrength1.pos = 28 ft kip
Moment (+M) - Service.......................... Moment (+M) - Strength......................... Corresponding Shear (+M) - Strength....... Corresponding Torsion (+M) - Strength....
Note 1 : The design for shear on this section utilized the corresponding shear due to moment (-M). By inspection, the loading for maximum shear is similar to the shear produced by the loading for maximum moment (-M) in the cap. In a design, the engineer will need to make sure that the applied live load maximizes the shear in the cap for design.
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
222
B. Positive Moment Design

A few recommendations on bar size and spacing are available to minimize problems during construction. Use the same size and spacing of reinforcing for both the negative and positive moment regions. This prevents field errors whereas the top steel is mistakenly placed at the bottom or vice versa. If this arrangement is not possible, give preference to maintaining the same spacing between the top and bottom reinforcement. Same grid pattern allows the concrete vibrator to be more effective in reaching the full depth of the cap.
The design procedure consists of calculating the reinforcement required to satisfy the design moment, then checking this reinforcement against criteria for crack control, minimum reinforcement, maximum reinforcement, shrinkage and temperature reinforcement, and distribution of reinforcement. The procedure is the same for both positive and negative moment regions.
M r := MStrength1.pos M r = 2742.5 ft kip
Factored resistance
M r = Mn
For a rectangular, non-prestressed section,

B1. Positive Moment Region Design - Flexural Resistance [LRFD 5.7.3.2]

Using variables defined in this example...... where
fc.sub = 5.5 ksi fy = 60 ksi = 0.9 hCap = 54 in b Cap = 54 in M r = As.pos fy ds

1
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
223
Initial assumption for area of steel required Number of bars................................ Size of bar.......................................
nbar := 12 bar := "10" (Note : If less than 12-#10 bars are chosen, crack control [Sect B3]will not be satisfied).
Note: if bar spacing is "-1", the spacing is less than 3", and a bigger bar size should be selected.
Abar = 1.270 in dia = 1.270 in barspa = 4.3 in As := nbar Abar
2
Bar area........................................... Bar diameter.................................... Equivalent bar spacing....................... Area of steel provided.............................
As = 15.24 in
2
Distance from extreme compressive fiber to centroid of reinforcing steel (assuming a #5 stirrup)..................................................
ds = 49.7 in
dia 5 ds := hCap cover sub in 2 8
Solve the quadratic equation for the area of steel required......................................... Area of steel required..............................
As.reqd = 12.63 in
2 2
Given
M r = As fy ds
As.reqd := Find As
( )
2 0.85 fc.sub b Cap

1 As fy
The area of steel provided, As = 15.24 in , should be greater than the area of steel required, As.reqd = 12.63 in . If not, decrease the spacing of the reinforcement. Once As is greater than As.reqd , the proposed reinforcing is adequate for the applied moments.
M r.pos := As fy ds
Moment capacity provided.....................

M r.pos = 3287 ft kip
2 0.85 fc.sub b Cap

1 As fy

SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
224
Area of steel provided.............................

As = 15.24 in
2

1 = 0.775
1 := max0.85 0.05
fc.sub 4000 psi , 0.65 1000 psi

c = 4.7 in
c :=
As fy 0.85 fc.sub 1 b Cap
de =
for non-prestressed sections..............

de = 49.7 in
de := ds
The
c de
LRFD 5.7.3.3.1 :=
c de
0.42
fr = 562.8 psi fr := 0.24 fc.sub ksi
Section modulus of cap...........................

S = 15.2 ft
3
S :=
b Cap hCap 6
Cracking moment...................................
M cr = 1231.0 kip ft
M cr := fr S
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
225

Check that the capacity provided, Mr.pos = 3287 ft kip , exceeds minimum requirements, Mr.reqd = 1477.1 ft kip .
LRFD 5.7.3.3.2 := "OK, minimum reinforcement for positive moment is satisfied" if Mr.pos M r.reqd "NG, reinforcement for positive moment is less than minimum" otherwise LRFD 5.7.3.3.2 = "OK, minimum reinforcement for positive moment is satisfied"
B3. Crack Control by Distribution Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.3.4]

Concrete is subjected to cracking. Limiting the width of expected cracks under service conditions increases the longevity of the structure. Potential cracks can be minimized through proper placement of the reinforcement. The check for crack control requires that the actual stress in the reinforcement should not exceed the service limit state stress (LRFD 5.7.3.4). The stress equations emphasize bar spacing rather than crack widths. Stress in the mild steel reinforcement at the service limit state....................................
z
1
fsa =
0.6 fy
( dcA)
Crack width parameter............................
Environmentsuper = "Slightly" z := 170 kip in aggressive environment
dc = 2.635 in
dia dc := min hCap ds , 2 in + 2
Number of bars per design width of slab... Effective tension area of concrete surrounding the flexural tension reinforcement........................................
A = 23.7 in
2
nbar = 12
A :=
( bCap) ( 2dc)
nbar
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
226

fsa = 36.0 ksi
fsa := min
z
1
( d A) 3 c
, 0.6 fy
x := 12.6 in 1 2 b Cap x =
2
Given
Es Ec.sub
As ds x
Ts = 518.13 kip
Ts :=
MService1.pos xna ds 3
Ts fs.actual := As
LRFD 5.7.3.3.4 := "OK, crack control for positive moment is satisfied" if fs.actual fsa "NG, crack control for positive moment not satisfied, provide more reinforcement" otherwise LRFD 5.7.3.3.4 = "OK, crack control for positive moment is satisfied"
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
227
B4. Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement [LRFD 5.10.8.2]

Initial assumption for area of steel required Size of bar.......................................
barst := "5" if b Cap < 48in hCap < 48in "6" otherwise barst = "6"
)(
Spacing of bar.................................
barspa.st := 12 in Abar = 0.44 in dia = 0.750 in Ag := bCap hCap

2
Bar area........................................... Bar diameter....................................
Gross area of section..............................

Ag = 2916.0 in
2
Minimum area of shrinkage and temperature reinforcement......................

Ashrink.temp = 4.4 in
2
Ashrink.temp := 0.0015 Ag
Maximum spacing of shrinkage and temperature reinforcement

spacingshrink.temp := min
b Cap
Ashrink.temp Abar 2
, 12 in if b Cap < 48in hCap < 48in
)(
min 2 dc + dia , 3in spacingshrink.temp = 14.7 in
100 Abar
otherwise
LRFD 5.7.10.8 := "OK, minimum shrinkage and temperature requirements" if barspa.st spacingshrink.temp "NG, minimum shrinkage and temperature requirements" otherwise LRFD 5.7.10.8 = "OK, minimum shrinkage and temperature requirements"
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
228
B5. Mass Concrete Provisions

Surface area of pier cap..........................
Surfacecap = 1869.6 ft
2
Surfacecap := 2 b Cap hCap + 2b Cap + 2hCap LCap
Volume of pier cap.................................

Volume cap = 2057.7 ft
3
Volume cap := b Cap hCap LCap
Mass concrete provisions apply if the volume to surface area ratio, dimension exceeds 3 feet
SDG3.9 := "Use mass concrete provisions" if Volume cap Surfacecap
Volume cap Surfacecap
= 1.101 ft , exceeds 1 ft and any
> 1.0 ft b Cap > 3ft hCap > 3ft
"Use regular concrete provisions" otherwise SDG3.9 = "Use mass concrete provisions"
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
229
C. Negative Moment Design

A few recommendations on bar size and spacing are available to minimize problems during construction. The same size and spacing of reinforcing should be utilized for both the negative and positive moment regions. If this arrangement is not possible, the top and bottom reinforcement should be spaced as a multiple of each other. This pattern places the top and bottom bars in the same grid pattern, and any additional steel is placed between these bars. The design procedure consists of calculating the reinforcement required to satisfy the design moment, then checking this reinforcement against criteria for crack control, minimum reinforcement, maximum reinforcement, shrinkage and temperature reinforcement, and distribution of reinforcement. The procedure is the same for both positive and negative moment regions.
M r := M Strength1.neg M r = 2063.1 ft kip
Factored resistance
M r = Mn


Using variables defined in this example, where
fc.sub = 5.5 ksi fy = 60 ksi = 0.9 hCap = 54 in b Cap = 54 in
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
230
nbar := 10 bar := "10" (Note : If 12-#9 bars are chosen, crack control will not be satisfied, see Sect C3. Use 10-#10 bars at the same spacing as the bottom but with two bars missing.)
Note: if bar spacing is "-1", the spacing is less than 3", and a bigger bar size should be selected. Bar area........................................... Bar diameter.................................... Equivalent bar spacing...................... Area of steel provided.............................
As = 12.70 in
2
Abar = 1.270 in dia = 1.270 in barspa = 5.2 in
As := nbar Abar
Distance from extreme compressive fiber to centroid of reinforcing steel (assuming a #5 stirrup).............................................
ds = 49.7 in
dia 5 ds := hCap cover sub in 2 8
As.reqd = 9.43 in
2
Given
M r = As fy ds
As.reqd := Find As
( )
2 0.85 fc.sub b Cap

1 As fy
The area of steel provided, As = 12.70 in , should be greater than the area of steel required, As.reqd = 9.43 in . If not, decrease the spacing of the reinforcement. Once As is greater than As.reqd , the proposed reinforcing is adequate for the applied moments.
M r.neg := As fy ds

M r.neg = 2756.4 ft kip
2 0.85 fc.sub b Cap

1 As fy

As = 12.70 in
2
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
231

1 = 0.775
1 := max0.85 0.05
fc.sub 4000 psi , 0.65 1000 psi

c = 3.9 in
c :=
As fy 0.85 fc.sub 1 b Cap
de =

de = 49.7 in
de := ds
The
c de
LRFD 5.7.3.3.1 :=
"OK, maximum reinforcement requirements for negative moment are satisfied" if "NG, section is over-reinforced, see LRFD equation C5.7.3.3.1-1" otherwise
c de
0.42
LRFD 5.7.3.3.1 = "OK, maximum reinforcement requirements for negative moment are satisfied"
Minimum Reinforcement The minimum reinforcement requirements ensure the moment capacity provided is at least 1.2 times greater than the cracking moment. Modulus of Rupture................................
y = 27.0 in
y :=
hCap 2

Icap = 34.2 ft
4
1 3 Icap := b h 12 Cap Cap b Cap hCap 6

2
Section modulus of cap...........................

S = 15.2 ft
3
S :=
Cracking moment...................................
M cr := fr S
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
232

Check that the capacity provided, Mr.neg = 2756.4 ft kip , exceeds minimum requirements, M r.reqd = 1477.1 ft kip .
LRFD 5.7.3.3.2 := "OK, minimum reinforcement for negative moment is satisfied" if Mr.neg Mr.reqd "NG, reinforcement for negative moment is less than minimum" otherwise LRFD 5.7.3.3.2 = "OK, minimum reinforcement for negative moment is satisfied"

fsa =
z
1
0.6 fy
( dcA)
Crack width parameter...........................
Environmentsuper = "Slightly" z := 170 kip in
dc = 2.635 in
dia dc := min hCap ds , 2 in + 2

nbar = 10
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
233

A = 28.5 in
2
A :=
( bCap) ( 2dc)
nbar z
1

fsa = 36.0 ksi
fsa := min
( d A) 3 c
, 0.6 fy
x := 11.6 in 1 2 b Cap x =
2
Given
Es Ec.sub
As ds x
Ts = 448.9 kip
Ts :=
M Service1.neg xna ds 3
Ts fs.actual := As
LRFD 5.7.3.3.4 := "OK, crack control for positive moment is satisfied" if fs.actual fsa "NG, crack control for positive moment not satisfied, provide more reinforcement" otherwise LRFD 5.7.3.3.4 = "OK, crack control for positive moment is satisfied"
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
234
D. Shear and Torsion Design [LRFD 5.8]

D1. Check if Torsion Design is Required
Tu := TStrength1.neg V u := V Strength1.neg
For normal weight concrete, torsional effects shall be investigated if..................
Tu > 0.25 v Tcr fpc Tcr = 0.125 fc 1+ pc 0.125 fc Acp

2
and.................................................
Total area enclosed by outside perimeter of concrete cross section............................

Acp = 20.3 ft
2
Acp := hCap b Cap
Length of outside perimeter of cross section..................................................

p c = 18.0 ft
p c := 2 hCap + b Cap
Compressive stress in concrete after prestress losses have occured..................

fpc := 0 psi
2
Torsional cracking moment.....................

Tcr = 961.7 kip ft LRFD 5.8.2 :=
fpc Tcr := 0.125 fc.sub ksi 1+ pc 0.125 fc.sub ksi
Acp
"OK, torsion can be neglected" if 0.25 v Tcr Tu "NG, torsion shall be investigated..." otherwise
LRFD 5.8.2 = "OK, torsion can be neglected"

Effective width of the section..................
b v = 54.0 in b v := b Cap As fy 0.85 fc.sub b Cap

a = 3.018 in dv = 48.2 in
a :=
d a , 0.9 d , 0.72 h dv := max s Cap s 2
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
235
Determination of and (LRFD 5.8.3.4) The pier cap is a non-prestressed concrete section not subjected to axial tension. It should also have the least amount of transverse reinforcement specified in LRFD 5.8.2.5 or an overall depth of less than 16 in.
:= 2 := 45 deg

V c = 386.0 kip
V c := 0.0316 fc.sub ksi b v dv
D3. Transverse Reinforcement

Transverse reinforcement shall be provided in the pier cap according to LRFD 5.8.2.4.
V u > 0.5 v V c + V p
The pier cap has no prestressing.

V p := 0 kip
Is transverse reinforcement required?

LRFD 5.8.2.4 := " Transverse reinforcement shall be provided" if V u > 0.5 v V c + V p
" Transverse reinforcement not required, provide minimum reinforcement" otherwise LRFD 5.8.2.4 = " Transverse reinforcement shall be provided"
Stirrups Size of stirrup bar ( "4" "5" "6" "7" )... Number of stirrup bars ( "single" "double" ) .............................. Area of shear reinforcement.................... Diameter of shear reinforcement..............
bar := "5" nbar := "double" Av = 1.240 in
2
dia = 0.625 in

Vn = Vc + Vp + Vs
where.............................................
V n = 714.9 kip
V n := min
Vu v
, 0.25 fc.sub b v dv + V p
and.................................................
V s = 328.9 kip
V s := V n V c V p
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
236

smin = 18.6 in smin := Av fy 0.0316 b v fc.sub ksi

sreq = 10.9 in
Av fy dv cot( ) Vs

s = 10.9 in

smax := if
V u v V p < 0.125 fc.sub , min(0.8 dv , 24 in) , min( 0.4 dv , 12 in) v (b v dv)
smax = 24 in

spacing = 10.9 in
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
237

T= Mu dv b +
V s := min
where.............................................
V s = 328.9 kip
dv +
and.................................................
T = 1308.6 kip
T :=
MStrength1.pos
Longitudinal reinforcement, previously computed for positive moment design.......

As.posM = 15.2 in
2

TposM = 914.4 kip
TposM := As.posM fy
LRFD 5.8.3.5 :=
"Ok, positive moment longitudinal reinforcement is adequate" if TposM T "NG, positive moment longitudinal reinforcement provided" otherwise
LRFD 5.8.3.5 = "NG, positive moment longitudinal reinforcement provided" Note : These provisions are applicable at the end bearing support areas. In both positive and negative moment areas in the cap, the applied loads produce compression on the compression face, therefore the steel provided needs to satisfy moment only. Therefore, this check is ignored.
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
238
E. Summary of Reinforcement Provided in the Moment Region

Negative moment (top) reinforcement Bar size............. Number of bars.. Bar spacing.......
barnegM = "10" nbar.negM = 10 barspa.negM = 4.3 in
Positive moment (bottom) reinforcement Bar size............. Number of bars.. Bar spacing........
barposM = "10" nbar.posM = 12 barspa.posM = 4.3 in
Transverse reinforcement Bar size............. Bar spacing........ Type of stirrups.

bar = "5" spacing = 10.9 in nbar = "double"
Temperature and Shrinkage Bar size............. Bar spacing.......

barshrink.temp = "6" barspa.st = 12 in
Defined Units
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
239
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
Pier Column Live Load Analysis
References
Reference:F:\HDRDesignExamples\Ex1_PCBeam\304PierCap.mcd(R)
Description
This section provides the pier column design live load for (1) maximum axial load on Pier 2 column and (2) maximum moments on column.
Page
241
Contents
A. Input Variables A1. Shear: Skewed Modification Factor [LRFD 4.6.2.2.3c] A2. Maximum Live Load Reaction at Intermediate Pier - Two HL-93 vehicles A3. Dynamic Load Allowance [LRFD 3.6.2]
242
B. Maximum Axial Force B1. Influence Lines for the Pier Column B2. HL-93 vehicle placement for maximum axial load
245
C. Maximum Negative Live Load Moment C1. Influence Lines for the maximum negative pier cap moment C2. HL-93 vehicle placement for maximum moment
Substructure Design
3.05 Pier Column Live Load Analysis
240
A. Input Variables
The reaction, RLLIs = 148.0 kip , needs to be separated into the truck and lane components in order to determine the beam reactions due to various vehicle placements along the deck. Reaction induced by HL-93 truck load...... Reaction induced by lane load.................. Impact factor........................................ The truck reaction (including impact and skew modification factors) is applied on the deck as two wheel-line loads..............
wheelline = 52.2 kip Rtrucks = 80.3 kip Rlanes = 57.6 kip IM = 1.33
wheelline := 90%
Rtrucks IM gv.Skew 2
Rlanes laneload := 90% g 10 ft v.Skew
Substructure Design
241
B. Maximum Axial Force

For design live load moments in the pier column, the controlling number and position of design lanes needs to be determined. This section shows a means of determining the controlling configuration of design lanes, along with the corresponding beam loads and pier cap moments.
B1. Influence Lines for the Pier Column

The influence lines will help determine the placement of design lanes on the deck to maximize the axial force in pier column 2. In this example, Larsa 2000 was used to generate the influence lines.
Influence Lines for Maximum Axial Force in Column 2
6
Influence Lines Maximum Axial Force at Column 2

Influence Line Magnitude (Column axial)
10
11
-2 1 2 3 4
-4
Beam 1 2 3 4 Col 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Distance 4.6 13.9 23.1 32.3 37.0 41.6 50.8 60.1 69.3 78.5 87.8 97.0
0.15 -0.20 -0.62 -0.93 -1.00 -0.91 -0.56 -0.16 0.05 0.09 0.04 -0.03
B2. HL-93 Vehicle Placement for Maximum Axial Load

HL-93 vehicles, comprising of wheel line loads and lane loads, should be placed on the deck to maximize the axial load in the pier column. Design Lane Placements For this example, the lane placements should maximize the axial force in column 2. Referring to the influence line graph, lanes placed above beams 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 11 will contribute to the maximum axial force. Beams 4 and 5 are the most influential. The graph also shows that lanes placed above beams 1, 8, 9, and 10 will reduce the maximum axial force. From this information, several possible configurations for 1, 2, 3, and 4 lanes can be developed to maximize the axial force in column 2.
Substructure Design
242
Corresponding Beam Loads The live loads from the design lanes are transferred to the substructure through the beams. Utilizing the lever rule, the beam loads corresponding to the design lane configurations are calculated and multiplied by the multiple presence factors.
Beam 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 Lane 0 0 0.4 96 96 0.4 0 0 0 0 0 2 Lanes 0 0 38.8 121.9 121.9 38.8 0 0 0 0 0 3 Lanes 0 15.9 89 115.9 85.4 87.8 15.9 0 0 0 0 4 Lanes 0.9 63.4 65.3 79.3 79.3 65.3 63.4 0.9 0 0 0
Substructure Design
243
Corresponding Moments The axial forces and moments in the pier column corresponding to the beam loads were determined using Larsa 2000.
Maximum Axial Force Axial Force (k) Moment (k-ft) -191.7 -6.4 -292.4 -15.0 -320.1 -34.8 -265.8 -24.3
The results show that three design lanes govern. The following beam loads, corresponding to the governing maximum axial force, will be used in the limit state combinations to obtain the design values for the pier column.
UNFACTORED LIVE LOAD (causing axial) AT PIER COLUMN 2 Beam LL Loads (kip) x y 0.0 0.0 0.0 -15.9 0.0 -89.0 0.0 -115.9 0.0 -85.4 0.0 -87.8 0.0 -15.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 z 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Substructure Design
244
C. Maximum Negative Live Load Moment

C1. Influence Lines for the maximum negative pier cap moment
The influence lines will help determine the placement of design lanes on the deck to maximize the transverse moments at the top of pier column 2. In this example, Larsa 2000 was used to generate the influence lines.
Influence Lines for Maximum Moment at Top of Column 2

3
Influence Lines Maximum Moment at Top of Column 2

2
10
11
-1
1
-2
Beam 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Distance 4.6 13.9 23.1 32.3 41.6 50.8 60.1 69.3 78.5 87.8 97.0
Influence Line Magnitude -0.62 0.62 1.27 0.81 -0.73 -1.05 -0.47 0.13 0.07 -0.07 0.26
C2. HL-93 Vehicle Placement for Maximum Moment

HL-93 vehicles, comprising of wheel line loads and lane loads, should be placed on the deck to maximize the moments in the pier column. Design Lane Placements For this example, the lane placements should maximize the moment in column 2. Referring to the influence lines graph, lanes placed above beams 2, 3, 4, 8, 9, and 11 will contribute to the maximum positive moment. Beam 3 is the most influential, followed by beam 4. The graph also shows that lanes placed above beams 1, 5, 6, 7, and 10 will reduce the maximum positive moment. From this information, several possible configurations for 1, 2, and 3 lanes can be developed to maximize the moment in column 2.
Substructure Design
245
Corresponding Beam Loads The live loads from the design lanes are transferred to the substructure through the beams. Utilizing the lever rule, the beam loads corresponding to the design lane configurations are calculated and multiplied by the multiple presence factors.
Beam Loads 2 Lanes 1.4 97.7 123.3 97.7 1.4 0 0 0 0 0 0
Beam 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 Lane 0 1.7 117.1 74 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 Lanes 1.2 83 104.8 83 1.2 0 0.3 68 68 0.3 0
Substructure Design
246
Corresponding Moments The axial forces and moments in the pier column corresponding to the beam loads were determined using Larsa 2000.
1 Lane 2 Lanes 3 Lanes
Maximum Moment Axial Force (k) Moment (k-ft) -153.3 -104.6 -202.9 -153.2 -162.8 -132.5
The results show that two design lanes govern. The following beam loads, corresponding to the governing maximum axial force, will later be used in the limit state combinations to obtain the design values for the pier column.
UNFACTORED LIVE LOAD (causing moment) AT PIER COLUMN 2 Beam LL Loads (kip) x y 0.0 -1.4 0.0 -97.7 0.0 -123.3 0.0 -97.7 0.0 -1.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 z 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Defined Units
Substructure Design
247
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
Pier Column Design Loads
Reference
Reference:F:\HDRDesignExamples\Ex1_PCBeam\305PierColLL.mcd(R)
Description
This section provides the design parameters necessary for the substructure pier column design. The loads calculated in this file are only from the superstructure. Substructure self-weight, wind on substructure and uniform temperature on substructure can be generated by the substructure analysis model/program chosen by the user. For this design example, Larsa 2000 was chosen as the analysis model/program (http://www.larsausa.com)
Page
249 251
Contents
LRFD Criteria A. General Criteria A1. Load Summary
255
B. Design Limit States B1. Strength I Limit State B2. Strength III Limit State B3. Strength V Limit State
Substructure Design
3.06 Pier Column Design Loads
248
LRFD Criteria
WA = 0 FR = 0 TU
Strength1 = 1.25 DC + 1.50 DW + 1.75 LL + 0.50 ( TU + CR + SH)
STRENGTH II -
STRENGTH III -
Load combination relating to the bridge exposed to wind velocity exceeding 55 MPH.
Strength3 = 1.25 DC + 1.50 DW + 1.40 WS + 0.50 ( TU + CR + SH)
STRENGTH IV -
Load combination relating to very high dead load to live load force effect ratios.
STRENGTH V -
Load combination relating to normal vehicular use of the bridge with wind of 55 MPH velocity.
Strength5 = 1.25 DC + 1.50 DW + 1.35 LL + 1.35 BR + 0.40 WS + 1.0 WL ... + 0.50 ( TU + CR + SH)
EXTREME EVENT I - Load combination including earthquake.

EXTREME EVENT II - Load combination relating to ice load, collision by vessels and vehicles, and certain hydraulic events.
SERVICE I -
SERVICE II -
Load combination intended to control yielding of steel structures and slip of slip-critical connections due to vehicular live load.
SERVICE III Substructure Design
3.06 Pier Column Design Loads 249
FATIGUE -
Substructure Design
250
A. General Criteria
The following is a summary of all the loads previously calculated:
A1. Load Summary

Dead Loads - Unfactored beam reactions at the pier for DC and DW loads

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Live load Unfactored beam reactions at the pier for maximum axial force in the column
UNFACTORED LIVE LOAD (causing axial) AT PIER COLUMN 2 Beam LL Loads (kip) x y 0.0 0.0 0.0 -15.9 0.0 -89.0 0.0 -115.9 0.0 -85.4 0.0 -87.8 0.0 -15.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 z 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Substructure Design
251
Unfactored beam reactions at the pier for maximum transverse moment in the column
UNFACTORED LIVE LOAD (causing moment) AT PIER COLUMN 2 Beam LL Loads (kip) x y 0.0 -1.4 0.0 -97.7 0.0 -123.3 0.0 -97.7 0.0 -1.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 z 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Note : This live load placement causes a +Mz moment about pier column 2, while the majority of the loads that are being applied (WS and WL) have loads that cause a -Mz moment about pier column 2. We will change the direction of the WS and WL loads in the combinations.
Braking Force - Unfactored beam reactions at the pier for BR loads
BRAKING FORCES AT PIER

BR Loads (kip) x y 1.9 -0.5 1.9 -0.5 1.9 -0.5 1.9 -0.5 1.9 -0.5 1.9 -1.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Beam
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
z -3.3 -3.3 -3.3 -3.3 -3.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Note : The direction of braking was reversed in order to maximize the longitudinal braking moments, Mx caused by "z" loads, to maximize the effects of WS and WL.
Substructure Design
252
Creep, Shrinkage and Temperature - Unfactored beam reactions at the pier for CU, SH and TU loads
CREEP, SHRINKAGE, TEMPERATURE FORCES AT PIER
Beam CR, SH, TU Loads (kip) x y z 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Wind on structure - Unfactored beam reactions for WS loads

WIND ON STRUCTURE FORCES AT PIER
Beam WS Loads (kip) x y z -2.6 0.0 -3.2 -2.6 0.0 -3.2 -2.6 0.0 -3.2 -2.6 0.0 -3.2 -2.6 0.0 -3.2 -2.6 0.0 -3.2 -2.6 0.0 -3.2 -2.6 0.0 -3.2 -2.6 0.0 -3.2 -2.6 0.0 -3.2 -2.6 0.0 -3.2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Note : The direction of wind was reversed in order to maximize the -Mz moment about pier column 2
Wind Loads Applied to Substructure X (trans) Z (long) Pier Cap 10.13 kip -0.30 klf Pier Column -0.07 klf -0.26 klf
Substructure Design
253
Wind on load on vehicles - Unfactored beam reactions for WL loads

WIND ON LIVE LOAD FORCES AT PIER
Beam WL Loads (kip) x y -0.7 0.0 -0.7 10.3 -0.7 -10.3 -0.7 0.0 -0.7 0.0 -0.7 0.0 -0.7 0.0 -0.7 0.0 -0.7 0.0 -0.7 0.0 -0.7 0.0 z -0.8 -0.8 -0.8 -0.8 -0.8 -0.8 -0.8 -0.8 -0.8 -0.8 -0.8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Note : The direction of wind was reversed in order to maximize the -Mz moment about pier column 2
Substructure Design
254
B. Design Limit States

The design loads for strength I, strength III, and service V limit states are summarized in this section. For each limit state, two loading conditions are presented: maximum axial force and maximum moment.
These reactions are from the superstructure only, acting on the substructure. In the analysis model, such as a GTStrudl, Sap2000, Strudl, Larsa 2000, etc, include the following loads: DC: self-weight of the substructure, include pier cap and columns TU: a temperature increase and fall on the pier substructure utilizing the following parameters: coefficient of expansion t = 6 10 6 temperature change
1 F
Note that in our model, the loads applied at the top of the cap from the beams are applied to rigid links that transfer the lateral loads as a lateral load and moment at the centroid of the pier cap. This is consistent with substructure design programs like LEAP's RCPier. Fixity of the pier was provided at the bottom of the columns.
WS: Wind on the substructure should be applied directly to the analysis model. The following is an example
3.06 Pier Column Design Loads 255
Substructure Design
WS: Wind on the substructure should be applied directly to the analysis model. The following is an example of the wind locations and terminology used in our analysis:
Forces applied directly to the analysis model
All applied loads in the substructure analysis model should be multiplied by the appropriate load factor values and combined with the limit state loads calculated in this file for the final results.
B1. Strength I Limit State

Strength I Limit State Max. Axial Loads (kip) Max. Moment Loads (kip) X Y Z X Y Z 3.3 -246.5 -5.8 3.3 -248.9 -5.8 3.3 -260.7 -5.8 3.3 -403.8 -5.8 3.3 -388.6 -5.8 3.3 -448.6 -5.8 3.3 -435.7 -5.8 3.3 -403.8 -5.8 3.3 -382.3 -5.8 3.3 -235.3 -5.8 3.3 -389.0 0.0 3.3 -235.4 0.0 0.0 -259.9 0.0 0.0 -232.0 0.0 0.0 -232.0 0.0 0.0 -232.0 0.0 0.0 -232.0 0.0 0.0 -232.0 0.0 0.0 -232.0 0.0 0.0 -232.0 0.0 0.0 -245.7 0.0 0.0 -245.7 0.0
Beam # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Substructure Design
256
B2. Strength III Limit State

Strength3 = 1.25 DC + 1.5 DW + 1.4WS + 0.50 ( TU + CR + SH)
Strength III Limit State Wind Loads Applied to Substructure Z X (trans) Z (long) -4.5 Pier Cap 14.19 klf -0.41 kip -4.5 Pier Column -0.10 klf -0.37 klf -4.5 -4.5 -4.5 -4.5 -4.5 -4.5 -4.5 -4.5 -4.5
Beam # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Loads (kip) X Y -3.7 -245.7 -3.7 -232.0 -3.7 -232.0 -3.7 -232.0 -3.7 -232.0 -3.7 -232.0 -3.7 -232.0 -3.7 -232.0 -3.7 -232.0 -3.7 -232.0 -3.7 -245.7
B3. Strength V Limit State

Beam # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
'Max. Axial Loads (kip) Max. Moment Loads (kip) X Y Z X Y Z 0.9 -246.3 -6.6 0.9 -248.2 -6.6 0.9 -243.9 -6.6 0.9 -354.3 -6.6 0.9 -363.1 -6.6 0.9 -409.4 -6.6 0.9 -389.1 -6.6 0.9 -364.6 -6.6 0.9 -348.0 -6.6 0.9 -234.6 -6.6 0.9 -353.1 -2.1 0.9 -234.6 -2.1 -1.7 -253.5 -2.1 -1.7 -232.0 -2.1 -1.7 -232.0 -2.1 -1.7 -232.0 -2.1 -1.7 -232.0 -2.1 -1.7 -232.0 -2.1 -1.7 -232.0 -2.1 -1.7 -232.0 -2.1 -1.7 -245.7 -2.1 -1.7 -245.7 -2.1
Wind Loads Applied to Substructure X (transv) Z (long) 4.05 kip -0.12 klf Pier Cap -0.03 klf -0.10 klf Pier Column
Substructure Design
257
LARSA 2000 COLUMN 2 RESULTS

Member Joint
Result Case
Fx
Fy
Fz
Mx
My
Mz
37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37
21 Strength 1 - P Col -TU 38 Strength 1 - P Col -TU 21 Strength 1 - M Col -TU 38 Strength 1 - M Col -TU 21 Strength 3 - Col -TU 38 Strength 3 - Col -TU 21 38 21 38 Strength 5 - P Col -TU Strength 5 - P Col -TU Strength 5 - M Col -TU Strength 5 - M Col -TU
30.86 -1352.58 -30.86 1396.17 65.42 -1164.71 -65.42 1208.30 9.62 -7.81 24.25 -23.73 50.92 -50.40 -829.40 872.99 -1236.90 1280.50 -1092.08 1135.67
-11.21 11.21 -11.21 11.21 -25.37 32.11 -18.41 20.33 -18.41 20.33
-6.11 -17.32 213.40 17.32 -6.11 -17.32 213.40 17.32 -16.23 547.92 3.03 -3.03
310.71 260.21 * 730.02 * 480.23 * 97.43 63.79 * 247.92 195.95 571.46 365.70 *
-13.35 -12.26 371.70 12.26 -13.35 -12.26 371.70 12.26
NOTES: (1) Values (*) used for column design check. Node 21 results given represents value at top of column, node 38 is bottom of column. (2) Values highlighted are governing design loads. (3) (-TU) means load case with a temperature fall in the substructure governed.
From the load cases that were run, we can also ask for the values at Column 1. Based on the loads that were applied for the cap design and column 2 design, these load combinations should give a fairly accurate value of
Substructure Design 3.06 Pier Column Design Loads 258
applied for the cap design and column 2 design, these load combinations should give a fairly accurate value of the loads experienced by this column. In fact, based on the evaluation of these loads in the next section, the loads in column 1 govern the reinforcing requirements. This approach was somewhat on purpose. It was meant to show that the column that may experience the greater loads may not necessarily be the most critical. Therefore, exterior columns should also be checked since their design may be governed by bending moments rather than axial loads.
LARSA 2000 COLUMN 1 RESULTS

Member Joint
Result Case
Fx
Fy
Fz
Mx
My
Mz
36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36
15 Strength 1 - +M Cap +TU 37 Strength 1 - +M Cap +TU 15 Strength 1 - P Col +TU 37 Strength 1 - P Col +TU 15 Strength 1 - M Col +TU 37 Strength 1 - M Col +TU 15 Strength 3 - Col +TU 37 Strength 3 - Col +TU 15 37 15 37 Strength 5 - P Col +TU Strength 5 - P Col +TU Strength 5 - M Col +TU Strength 5 - M Col +TU
-99.94 99.94 -70.28 70.28 -92.83 92.83 -55.11 56.93 -69.03 69.55 -86.43 86.94
-899.84 943.43 -776.23 819.82 -937.03 980.62 -681.18 724.77 -751.90 795.49 -876.03 919.62
15.24 -1.91 -15.24 -279.99 -15.24 15.24 -15.24 15.24 -21.46 28.19 -20.04 21.96 -20.04 21.96 1.91 279.99 1.91 279.99 -40.07 499.31 -16.13 404.61 -16.13 404.61
5.23 -5.23 -5.23 5.23 -5.23 5.23 9.14 -9.14 -0.51 0.51 -0.51 0.51
-1114.70 * -734.16 -780.03 -520.06 * -1067.45 -649.82 -542.45 -493.95 * -745.60 -536.21 -967.34 * -636.34
NOTES: (1) Values (*) used for column design check. Node 15 results given represents value at top of column, node 37 is bottom of column. (2) Values highlighted are governing design loads. (3) (+TU) means load case with a temperature rise in the substructure governed.
Defined Units
Substructure Design
259
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
Pier Column Design
Reference
Reference:F:\HDRDesignExamples\Ex1_PCBeam\306PierColLds.mcd(R)
Description
This document provides the design check summary for columns 1 and 2. P or any secondary effects were not evaluated. (Note: Most higher-end analysis programs, such as Larsa 2000 have the capability to analyze for secondary effects on columns such that the resulting moments are already magnified by P. f not, programs like PCA Column have a "Slender" column option whereas some parameters for slenderness can be entered to include secondary effects.)
Page
261
Contents
A. General Criteria A1. Pier Column Design Loads
262
B. PCA Column Analysis B1. Input Variables B2. Output
Substructure Design
3.07 Pier Column Design
260
A. General Criteria
A1. Pier Column Design Loads
Strength I, strength III, and strength V loads for columns 1 and 2 were evaluated. The following table summarizes the results from LARSA 2000 output for pier columns 1 and 2..
LARSA 2000 COLUMN RESULTS

Member
Joint
Result Case
Fx
Fy
Fz
Mx
My
Mz
Column 1 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 15 Strength 1 - +M Cap +TU 37 Strength 1 - +M Cap +TU 15 Strength 1 - P Col +TU 37 Strength 1 - P Col +TU 15 Strength 3 - Col +TU 37 Strength 3 - Col +TU 15 Strength 5 - M Col +TU 37 Strength 5 - M Col +TU Column 2 21 Strength 1 - P Col -TU 38 Strength 1 - P Col -TU 21 Strength 1 - M Col -TU 38 Strength 1 - M Col -TU 21 Strength 3 - Col -TU 38 Strength 3 - Col -TU 21 Strength 5 - M Col -TU 38 Strength 5 - M Col -TU -99.94 99.94 -70.28 70.28 -55.11 56.93 -86.43 86.94 -899.84 943.43 -776.23 819.82 -681.18 724.77 -876.03 919.62 15.24 -15.24 15.24 -21.46 28.19 -20.04 21.96 -1.91 1.91 279.99 -40.07 499.31 -16.13 404.61 5.23 -5.23 -5.23 5.23 9.14 -9.14 -0.51 0.51 -1114.70 * -734.16 -780.03 * -520.06 -542.45 -493.95 * -967.34 * -636.34 -15.24 -279.99
37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37
30.86 -1352.58 -30.86 1396.17 65.42 -1164.71 -65.42 1208.30 9.62 -7.81 -829.40 872.99
-11.21 11.21 -11.21 11.21 -25.37 32.11 -18.41 20.33
-6.11 -17.32 213.40 17.32 -6.11 -17.32 213.40 17.32 -16.23 547.92 3.03 -3.03
310.71 260.21 * 730.02 * 480.23 97.43 63.79 * 571.46 * 365.70
50.92 -1092.08 -50.40 1135.67
-13.35 -12.26 371.70 12.26
NOTES: (1) Values (*) used for column design. Node 15 and 37 represents value at top and bottom of column 1, nodes 21 and 38 are top and bottom of column 2. (2) Values highlighted are governing design loads. (3) (-TU) means load case with a temperature fall in the substructure governed.
Substructure Design
261
B. PCA Column Analysis

B1. Input Variables
...Enter general information...
...Enter material properties...
...Enter column geometry...
Substructure Design
262
Limits of Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.4.2] To account for the compressive strength of concrete, minimum reinforcement in flexural members is found to be proportional to
fc . Therefore, the longitudinal reinforcement in columns can be less than 0.01 Ag if allowed fy
As Ag Aps fpu Ag fy +
by the following equation: Maximum area of reinforcement..............

+ 0.08 (Note : 8% maximum is still applicable as per the LRFD).
Minimum area of reinforcement...............
As fy Ag f'c
Aps fpu Ag f'c
0.135
For non-prestressed columns, the minimum percentage of reinforcement allowed is.....
fc.sub As% := 0.135 fy As% = 1.24 %
(Note : This equation was written in the form of As fc.sub As% = 0.135 where Ag fy As% is the percentage of reinforcement.
In this situation, the minimum steel requirement was greater than 1% of the gross column area. For PCA Column, enter As% = 1.24 % for minimum reinforcement.
...Enter column design criteria...
Substructure Design
263
...Enter column tie reinforcing information...
...Enter column reinforcing information...
...Enter factored loads acting on column...
Substructure Design
264
B2. Output
Based on the results, the columns have adequate capacity for the applied loads. The columns can be reduced in diameter, however, 4 foot diameter columns are typically found on intermediate piers over cross-streets. Another alternative to maximize the columns is to increase the column spacing, however, this will require greater reinforcing in the pier cap.
Total steel area, As = 24.00 in^2 at 1.33%
24-#9
Cover = 3 in
No.
Pu kip
Mux k-ft
Muy k-ft
fMnx k-ft
fMny k-ft
fMn/Mu
(Note : For constructability, our experience has shown that if the bars are kept to a multiple of 4 then it improves placing the longitudinal steel around the column steel. In the plans, 24-#9 will be detailed.)
<- governs ---------------------------------------------------------------900.0 2.0 1115.0 4.4 2529.9 1 2.269 Since point 1 governs for 2 776.0 2.0 780.0 6.5 2498.3 3.203 moment [column 1], the 3 725.0 499.0 494.0 1763.7 1745.5 3.534 foundation for this 4 876.0 16.0 967.0 41.1 2524.7 2.611 column is subsequently 5 1396.0 213.0 260.0 1761.2 2149.8 8.268 designed. 6 1165.0 6.0 730.0 21.9 2648.8 3.629 7 873.0 548.0 64.0 2506.2 295.9 4.574 8 1092.0 13.0 571.0 55.8 2600.3 4.554
Substructure Design
265
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
Pier Foundation Design Loads
Reference
Reference:F:\HDRDesignExamples\Ex1_PCBeam\307PierCol.mcd(R)
Description
This document provides the design parameters necessary for the substructure pile vertical load and footing design.
Page
267
Contents
A. General Criteria A1. Pier Column Live Load (LL) Summary
A2. Foundation Design Load Summary
Substructure Design
3.08 Pier Foundation Design Loads
266
A. General Criteria
A1. Modification to Pier Column Live Loads for Foundation Design
The Dynamic Load Amplification (DLA) is not required since the foundation components are entirely below ground level [LRFD 3.6.2.1].
A2. Foundation Design Load Summary

For the foundation design, the impact on the truck will need to be removed from the load combinations since the footing is embedded in the ground. If the footing were a waterline footing, then impact should be included. For this design example, we will use the load combination that governed for the column design. In addition, the corresponding service limit state moments have been included and shown in the table below.
LARSA 2000 COLUMN RESULTS

Member Joint
Result Case
Fx
Fy
Fz
Mx
My
Mz
Column 1 36 36 15 Strength 1 - +M Cap +TU 37 Strength 1 - +M Cap +TU -99.94 99.94 -899.84 943.43 943.43 -673.09 707.96 707.96 15.24 -1.91 -15.24 -279.99 -325.70 15.41 13.83 -16.85 -312.19 -362.74 5.23 -5.23 -1114.70 -734.16 -1033.98 * -1008.23 -845.54 -1145.56 *
36 36
15 Service 1 - +M Cap +TU 37 Service 1 - +M Cap +TU
-100.40 100.01
0.05 -0.05
Note : The values in bold have been translated from the bottom of the column to the top of the piles (= 3 ft).
Defined Units
Substructure Design
3.08 Pier Foundation Design Loads
267
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
Pier Piles Vertical Load Design
References
Reference:F:\HDRDesignExamples\Ex1_PCBeam\308PierFoundLds.mcd(R)
Description
This section provides the design of the piles for vertical loads (exclude lateral load design). For this design example, only the piles for column 1 footing will be evaluated.
Page
269 270
Contents
FDOT Criteria A. Input Variables A1. Geometry A2. Forces on Top of Footing
271
B. Pile Loads B1. 4- Pile Footing Investigation B2. 6- Pile Footing Investigation
276
C. Pile Tip Elevations for Vertical Load C1. Pile Capacities as per SPT97
Substructure Design
3.09 Pier Piles Vertical Load Design
268
LRFD Criteria
FDOT Criteria
Minimum Sizes [SDG 3.5.2]
Use 18" square piling, except for extremely aggressive salt water environments.
Spacing, Clearances and Embedment and Size [SDG 3.5.3]

Minimum pile spacing center-to-center must be at least three times the least width of the deep foundation element measured at the ground line.
Resistance Factors [SDG 3.5.5]

The resistance factor utilizing SPT97 for piles under compression shall be...
SPT97 := 0.65
Minimum Pile Tip [SDG 3.5.7]

The minimum pile tip elevation must be the deepest of the minimum elevations that satisfy lateral stability requirements for the three limit states. Since this bridge is not over water, scour and ship impact are not design issues. The design criteria for minimum tip elevation are based on vertical load requirements and lateral load analysis.
Pile Driving Resistance [SDG 3.5.11]

The Required Driving Resistance for an 18" square concrete pile must not exceed............................................
UBCFDOT := 300 Ton
Substructure Design
269
A. Input Variables
A1. Geometry
Depth of footing.................................... Width of footing.................................... Length of footing................................... Pile Embedment Depth............................
hFtg = 4 ft b Ftg = 7.5 ft LFtg = 7.5 ft Pileembed = 1 ft
A2. Forces on Top of Footing

Area of Footing......................................
Aftg := bFtg LFtg Aftg = 56.3 ft
2
Footing weight not included in LARSA.....
wtFtg := conc Aftg hFtg wtFtg = 33.8 kip
Maximum service load............................ and corresponding moments..............
Py = 708.0 kip M x = 362.7 ft kip M z = 1145.6 ft kip
Maximum factored load.......................... and corresponding moments..............
Puy = 943.4 kip Mux = 325.7 ft kip Muz = 1034.0 ft kip
Substructure Design
270
B. Pile Loads
B1. 4- Pile Footing Investigation
So far, the design example has assumed that a 4-pile footing will be adequate. Foundation Layout Size of the square concrete piles.............. Number of Piles..................................... Pile Coordinates.....................................
0 1 Pileindex := 2 3 k := 0 .. npile 1 Pile Layout
3.75 Z-Longitudinal Spacing,ft
Pilesize = 18 in npile := 4
2.25 2.25 X pile := ft 2.25 2.25
2.25 2.25 Zpile := ft 2.25 2.25
3.75 3.75
0 X-Transverse Spacing, ft
3.75
Overturning Forces due to Moments General equation for axial load on any pile..
Qm = Py n + Mx z
n
z= 0
2 2 (z ) (x ) n x= 0
Mz x
Substructure Design
271
Factored Axial Load on Pile

Puy + 1.25 wtFtg npile Mux Zpile k
npile 1 z= 0
Q u :=
k
Muz X pile k
npile 1 x=0
2 Zpile z
2 X pilex
0 1 Pileindex := 2 3
167.7 397.5 Qu = kip 325.1 95.3 Q max := max Q u
Maximum axial load on pile.....................
( )
Factored Design Load + Net Scour + Downdrag
Q max = 198.7 Ton
Required driving resistance (RDR)...........
RDR = UBC =
Using variables defined in this example......
UBC :=
Q max SPT97
UBC = 305.8 Ton
This value should not exceed the limit specified by FDOT.................................
UBCFDOT = 300 Ton
A 4-pile footing is not acceptable. It is recommended not to design to the UBC limit since difficulties in pile driving can be encountered causing construction delays. Suggest consulting with the District geotechnical and structural engineers if within 5%-10%. We will investigate a 6-pile footing.
B2. 6- Pile Footing Investigation

The 4-pile footing design involves a limited amount of shear design, since the piles are outside the critical section for shear. To illustrate the shear design process, a 6-pile footing will be evaluated and designed. New depth of footing............................. New width of footing............................. New length of footing............................. New area of Footing...............................
hFtg.new := 4 ft b Ftg.new := 12 ft LFtg.new := 7.5 ft Aftg.new := bFtg.new LFtg.new Aftg.new = 90.0 ft
2
Substructure Design
272
Footing weight not included in LARSA.....
wtFtg := conc Aftg.new hFtg.new wtFtg = 54.0 kip
Foundation Layout Size of the square concrete piles.............. Number of Piles..................................... Pile Coordinates.....................................
Pilesize = 18 in npile := 6
0 1 2 Pileindex := 3 4 5
k := 0 .. npile 1 Pile Layout
3.75 Z-Longitudinal Spacing,ft
4.5 0 4.5 X pile := ft 4.5 0 4.5
2.25 2.25 2.25 Zpile := ft 2.25 2.25 2.25
Note: Pile numbering is from "0" to "5" and are numbered CLOCKWISE beginning with the upper top left side pile.
3.75
0 X-Transverse Spacing, ft
Substructure Design
273
Service Axial Load on Pile

Py + 1.0 wtFtg npile Mx Zpile k
npile 1 z= 0
Q :=
k
Mz X pile k
npile 1 x= 0
2 Z pilez
2 X pilex
0 1 2 Pileindex = 3 4 5
Factored Axial Load on Pile
Puy + 1.25 wtFtg npile
90.2 153.9 217.5 kip Q= 163.8 100.1 36.5
Q u :=
k
Mux Zpile k
npile 1 z= 0
Muz X pile k
npile 1 x=0
2 Zpile z
2 X pilex
0 1 2 Pileindex = 3 4 5
Maximum axial load on pile......................
135.2 192.6 250.1 Qu = kip 201.8 144.4 86.9

Q max := max Q u Q max = 125 Ton
( )
Minimum axial load on pile (verify no uplift occurs).................................................
Q min := min Q u
( )
Q min = 43.5 Ton Factored Design Load + Net Scour + Downdrag
Required driving resistance (RDR)...........
RDR = UBC =
Substructure Design
274
Using variables defined in this example......
UBC :=
Q max SPT97
UBC = 192.4 Ton
This value should not exceed the limit specified by FDOT.................................
UBCFDOT = 300 Ton
A 6-pile footing is acceptable.
Substructure Design
275
C. Pile Tip Elevations for Vertical Load

C1. Pile Capacities as per SPT97
The Static Pile Capacity Analysis Program, SPT97 NT v1.5 dated 6/2/00, was utilized to determine the pile capacity. Using boring data, the program can analyze concrete piles, H-piles, pipe piles, and cylinder piles. It is available at the following FDOT website: http://www11.myflorida.com/structures/programs/spt97setup.exe For this design example, the boring data is based on Example2 in the program, which is part of the install package.
Substructure Design
276
The following picture shows the boring log entries in Example2.in.
Recall that the ultimate bearing capacity, UBC, is given by....................................
UBC =
Factored Design Load + Net Scour + Downdrag
In this design example, net scour and downdrag are zero, so the UBC is............
UBC = 192.4 Ton
Substructure Design
277
The program was executed, and the output can be summarized as follows:
D. PILE CAPACITY VS. PENETRATION ================================== TEST PILE LENGTH (FT) -----26.2 29.5 PILE TIP ELEV (FT) ----17.8 -21.0 ULTIMATE SIDE FRICTION (TONS) -------70.64 89.84 MOBILIZED END BEARING (TONS) --------105.33 115.90 ESTIMATED DAVISSON CAPACITY (TONS) --------175.97 205.74 ALLOWABLE PILE CAPACITY (TONS) --------87.98 102.87 ULTIMATE PILE CAPACITY (TONS) -------386.63 437.53
A lateral load analysis may require the pile tip elevations to be driven deeper for stability purposes. This file only evaluates the vertical load requirements based on the boring capacity curves.
Substructure Design
278
Calculate the pile length required........

pile length = 28 ft
pile length := ( UBC 175.97 Ton) + 26.2 ft
... 205.74 Ton 175.97 Ton

29.5 ft 26.2 ft
Calculate the pile tip elevation required:

pile tip = 19.6 ft
pile tip := ( UBC 175.97 Ton)
+ 17.8 ft 205.74 Ton 175.97 Ton

21.0 ft 17.8 ft
...based on the Estimated Davisson pile capacity curve given above, the pile lengths for vertical load will require a specified Tip Elevation = -19.6 ft. Therefore, the pile in the ground length is 28.0 ft.
Defined Units
Substructure Design
279
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
Pier Footing Design
References
Reference:F:\HDRDesignExamples\Ex1_PCBeam\309PierPiles.mcd(R)
Description
This document provides the criteria for the pier footing design. For this design example, only column 1 footing will be evaluated.
Page
281 282
Contents
LRFD Criteria A. Input Variables A1. Design Parameters A2. Pile Layout A3. Flexural Design Parameters A4. Moments - Y Critical Section A5. Moments - X Critical Section A6. Design Moments
287
B. Flexural Design B1. Transverse Flexural Design [LRFD 5.7.3.2] B2. Transverse Limits for Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.3.3] B3. Transverse Crack Control by Distribution Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.3.4] B4. Longitudinal Flexural Design [LRFD 5.7.3.2] B5. Longitudinal Limits for Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.3.3] B6. Longitudinal Crack Control by Distribution Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.3.4] B7. Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement [LRFD 5.10.8.2] B8. Mass Concrete Provisions
297
C. Shear Design Parameters [LRFD 5.13.3.6] C1. Shear Design Parameters - One Way Shear C2. and parameters [LRFD 5.8.3.4.2] C3. One Way Shear - Y Critical Section C4. One Way Shear - X Critical Section C5. Two Way Shear Design (Punching Shear)
304
D. Design Summary
Substructure Design
3.10 Pier Footing Design
280
LRFD Criteria
WA = 0 FR = 0 TU
Strength1 = 1.25 DC + 1.50 DW + 1.75 LL + 0.50 ( TU + CR + SH)
SERVICE I -
Service1 = 1.0 DC + 1.0 DW + 1.0 LL + 1.0 BR + 0.3WS + 1.0 WL + 1.0 ( TU + CR + SH "For the footing, utilized only to check for crack control"
Substructure Design
281
A. Input Variables
A1. Design Parameters
Transverse dimension of footing.............. Longitudinal dimension of footing............ Depth of footing..................................... Area of footing......................................
b Ftg = 12 ft LFtg = 7.5 ft hFtg = 4 ft Aftg := bFtg LFtg Aftg = 90 ft

2
Embedment of pile in footing................... Concrete cover above piles...................... Height of surcharge (column height in ground)................................................. Diameter of column................................
Pileembed = 1 ft cover pile := 3 in hSurcharge := 2.0 ft b Col = 4 ft ACol
Area of column......................................
( bCol) :=
4
2
ACol = 12.6 ft
Equivalent square width for the circular column [LRFD 5.13.3.4]:.......................
b Col.eff := round b Col.eff =
ACol , 1
Substructure Design
282
A2. Pile Layout

Pile size................................................. Number of piles..................................... Summary of pile loads
Service I Limit State Strength I Limit State Q, Tons Q, kips Qu, Tons Qu, kips 45.1 90.2 67.6 135.2 76.9 153.9 96.3 192.6 108.8 217.5 125.0 250.1 81.9 163.8 100.9 201.8 50.1 100.1 72.2 144.4 18.2 36.5 43.5 86.9
Pilesize = 18 in npile = 6
Pile # 0 1 2 3 4 5
x Coord. 2.25 2.25 2.25 -2.25 -2.25 -2.25
y Coord. -4.5 0 4.5 4.5 0 -4.5
Pile Layout
x- Longitudinal Spacing,ft 3.75
3.75
0 y- Transverse Spacing, ft
A3. Flexural Design Parameters
Substructure Design
283
Distance from centerline of piles to edge of footing..................................................

pile edge = 1.5 ft
pile edge := 1.5ft
Distance from x-critical section (face of effective column) to edge of footing along the x-axis..............................................
xedge =
xedge :=
LFtg b Col.eff 2
Distance from x-critical section to centerline of piles along the x-axis............

xcrit =
xcrit := xedge pile edge
Distance from y-critical section (face of effective column) to edge of footing along the y-axis..............................................
yedge =
yedge :=
b Ftg b Col.eff 2
Distance from y-critical section to centerline of piles along the y-axis............

ycrit =
ycrit := yedge pile edge
A4. Moments - Y Critical Section

Unfactored pile loads contributing to transverse moment.................................
P = 254 kip P := max Q + Q , Q + Q
0 3 2
Unfactored moments at critical section due to pile loads............................................

MxPile = kip ft
MxPile := P ycrit
Unfactored moment at critical section due to footing weight....................................

MxFtg = kip ft
MxFtg := LFtg hFtg conc
yedge 2
Unfactored moments at critical section due to surcharge ....................................

MxSurcharge = kip ft
MxSurcharge := LFtg hSurcharge soil
yedge 2
Substructure Design
284
Factored pile loads contributing to transverse moment.................................

Pu = 337 kip
Pu := max Q u + Q u , Q u + Q u 3 2 5 0
Assure the critical section is within the footing dimensions.................................

Pu = kip
Pu := if ycrit yedge , 0 kip , Pu
Factored moments at critical section due to pile loads...............................................

MuxPile = kip ft
MuxPile := Pu ycrit
A5. Moments - X Critical Section

Unfactored pile loads contributing to longitudinal moment...............................
P = 462 kip P := max Q + Q + Q , Q + Q + Q
0 1 2 3 4
Unfactored moments at critical section due to pile loads...........................................

MyPile = kip ft
MyPile := P xcrit
Unfactored moment at critical section due to footing weight........................................

MyFtg = kip ft
MyFtg := bFtg hFtg conc
xedge 2
Unfactored moments at critical section due to surcharge..........................................

MySurcharge = kip ft
MySurcharge := b Ftg hSurcharge soil
xedge 2
Factored pile loads contributing to longitudinal moment................................

Pu = 578 kip
Pu := max Q u + Q u + Q u , Q u + Q u + Q u 1 2 3 4 5 0
Assure the critical section is within the footing dimensions.................................

Pu = kip
Pu := if xcrit xedge , 0 kip , Pu
Factored moments at critical section due to pile loads...............................................

MuyPile = kip ft
MuyPile := Pu xcrit
Substructure Design
285
A6. Design Moments

Transverse Footing Design (Mx moments) - Strength I............................................
MxStrength1 = kip ft MxStrength1 := MuxPile 1.25 MxFtg 1.50 MxSurcharge
Transverse Footing Design (Mx moments) - Service I..............................................

MxService1 = kip ft
MxService1 := 1.0 MxPile 1.0 MxFtg 1.0 MxSurcharge
Longitudinal Footing Design (My moments) - Strength I.............................

MyStrength1 = kip ft
MyStrength1 := MuyPile 1.25 MyFtg 1.50 MySurcharge
Longitudinal Footing Design (My moments) - Service I..............................

MyService1 = kip ft
MyService1 := 1.0 MyPile 1.0 MyFtg 1.0 MySurcharge
Substructure Design
286
B. Flexural Design
B1. Transverse Flexural Design [LRFD 5.7.3.2]
The design procedure consists of calculating the reinforcement required to satisfy the design moment, then checking this reinforcement against criteria for crack control, minimum reinforcement, maximum reinforcement, shrinkage and temperature reinforcement, and distribution of reinforcement. The procedure is the same for both the transverse and longitudinal moment designs. Factored resistance................................. Nominal flexural resistance......................
M r = Mn
a hf a d a A' f' d' a + 0.85 f' b b h M n = Aps fps d + A f p 2 s y s 2 s y s 2 c w 1 f 2 2
Using variables defined in this example, Factored resistance...........................

M r := MxStrength1 M r = ft kip
Width of section
b := LFtg b = 7.5 ft
Initial assumption for area of steel required Number of bars............................... Size of bar.......................................
nybar := 8 ybar := "9" (Note : Bar size and spacing are governed by crack control criteria and not bending capacity).
Note: if bar spacing is "-1", the spacing is less than 3", and a bigger bar size should be selected. Bar area.......................................... Bar diameter.................................... Equivalent bar spacing......................
Abar = 1.000 in
2
ybar dia = 1.128 in ybar spa = 11.8 in As := nybar Abar

As = 8.00 in
2
Substructure Design
287

ds = 32.436 in
ds := hFtg cover pile Pileembed
ybar dia 2
Given
M r = As fy ds
2 0.85 fc.sub b
1
As fy
Area of steel required..............................

As.reqd = in
2
As.reqd := Find As
( )
2
The area of steel provided, As = 8.00 in , should be greater than the area of steel required, As.reqd = in . If not, decrease the spacing of the reinforcement. Once As is greater than As.reqd , the proposed reinforcing is adequate for the applied moments. Moment capacity provided.....................
M r.tran = 1147.2 ft kip M r.tran := As fy ds
2 0.85 fc.sub b
1
As fy
B2. Transverse Limits for Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.3.3]

As = 8.00 in
2

1 = 0.775
1 := max0.85 0.05
fc.sub 4000 psi , 0.65 1000 psi

c = 1.472 in
c :=
As fy 0.85 fc.sub 1 b
Depth of equivalent stress block..............

a = 1.141 in
a := c 1
Effective depth from extreme compression fiber to centroid of tensile reinforcement...
de =

de = 32.4 in
de := ds
Substructure Design
288
The
c de
= 0.045 ratio should be less than 0.42 to satisfy maximum reinforcement requirements. c de 0.42
LRFD 5.7.3.3.1 :=
"OK, maximum reinforcement requirement for transverse moment is satisfied" if "NG, section is over-reinforced, see LRFD equation C5.7.3.3.1-1" otherwise
LRFD 5.7.3.3.1 = "OK, maximum reinforcement requirement for transverse moment is satisfied"
Minimum Reinforcement The minimum reinforcement requirements ensure the moment capacity provided is at least 1.2 times greater than the cracking moment. Modulus of rupture................................
Section modulus of the footing above the piles......................................................

S = 11.3 ft
3
S :=
LFtg hFtg Pileembed 6
Cracking moment...................................
M cr = 911.8 kip ft
M cr := fr S

M r.reqd = ft kip
Check that the capacity provided, Mr.tran = 1147.2 ft kip , exceeds minimum requirements, M r.reqd = ft kip .
LRFD 5.7.3.3.2 := "OK, minimum reinforcement for transverse moment is satisfied" if M r.tran M r.reqd "NG, reinforcement for transverse moment is less than minimum" otherwise LRFD 5.7.3.3.2 =
Substructure Design
289
B3. Transverse Crack Control by Distribution Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.3.4]

z
1
fsa =
0.6 fy
( dcA) 3
z := 170 kip in
dc = 2.564 in
dc := min hFtg ds , 2 in +
ybar dia 2
Number of bars.....................................
nybar = 8

A = 57.7 in
2
A :=
( b ) 2 dc nybar

fsa = 32.1 ksi
fsa := min
z
1
( d A) 3 c
, 0.6 fy
The neutral axis of the section must be determined to calculate the actual stress in the reinforcement. This process is iterative, so an initial assumption of the neutral axis must be made.
x := 6.0 in 1 2 b x =
2
Given
Es Ec.sub
As ds x
Substructure Design
290
Ts = kip
Ts :=
MxService1 xna ds 3
fs.actual = ksi
Ts fs.actual := As
LRFD 5.7.3.3.4 := "OK, crack control for transverse moment" if fs.actual fsa "NG, crack control for transverse moment, provide more reinforcement" otherwise LRFD 5.7.3.3.4 =
B4. Longitudinal Flexural Design [LRFD 5.7.3.2]

Factored resistance................................ Using variables defined in this example, Factored resistance.......................... Width of section..............................
M r := MyStrength1 b := bFtg b = 12 ft M r = Mn
nxbar := 12 xbar := "6"
Note: if bar spacing is "-1", the spacing is less than 3", and a bigger bar size should be selected. Bar area.......................................... Bar diameter.................................... Equivalent bar spacing......................
Abar = 0.440 in
2
xbardia = 0.750 in xbarspa = 12.4 in
Substructure Design
291

As = 5.28 in
2
As := nxbar Abar

ds = 31.497 in
ds := hFtg cover pile Pileembed ybar dia
xbardia 2
As.reqd = in
2 2
Given
M r = As fy ds
As.reqd := Find As
( )
2 0.85 fc.sub b
1
As fy
The area of steel provided, As = 5.28 in , should be greater than the area of steel required, As.reqd = in . If not, decrease the spacing of the reinforcement. Once As is greater than As.reqd , the proposed reinforcing is adequate for the applied moments. Moment capacity provided.....................
M r.long = 742.8 ft kip M r.long := As fy ds
2 0.85 fc.sub b
1
As fy
B5. Longitudinal Limits for Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.3.3]

As = 5.28 in
2

c = 0.607 in
c :=
Depth of equivalent stress block..............

a = 0.471 in
a := c 1
de =

de = 31.5 in
de := ds
Substructure Design
292
The
c de
= 0.019 ratio should be less than 0.42 to satisfy maximum reinforcement requirements. c de 0.42
LRFD 5.7.3.3.1 :=
"OK, maximum reinforcement requirement for longitudinal moment is satisfied" if "NG, section is over-reinforced, see LRFD equation C5.7.3.3.1-1" otherwise
LRFD 5.7.3.3.1 = "OK, maximum reinforcement requirement for longitudinal moment is satisfied"
Minimum Reinforcement The minimum reinforcement requirements ensure the moment capacity provided is at least 1.2 times greater than the cracking moment. Modulus of rupture................................
fr = 562.8 psi
Section modulus of the footing above piles

S = 18.0 ft
3
S :=
b Ftg hFtg Pileembed 6
Cracking moment...................................
M cr := fr S

M r.reqd = ft kip
Check that the capacity provided, Mr.long = 742.8 ft kip , exceeds minimum requirements, Mr.reqd = ft kip .
LRFD 5.7.3.3.2 := "OK, minimum reinforcement for longitudinal moment is satisfied" if M r.long M r.reqd "NG, reinforcement for longitudinal moment is less than minimum" otherwise LRFD 5.7.3.3.2 =
Substructure Design
293
B6. Longitudinal Crack Control by Distribution Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.3.4]

Stress in the mild steel reinforcement at the service limit state....................................
fsa = z
1
0.6 fy
( dcA) 3
z := 170 kip in
dc = 3.503 in
dc := min hFtg ds , 2 in + ybar dia +
xbardia 2
Number of bars......................................
nxbar = 12

A = 84.1 in
2
A :=
( b ) 2 dc nxbar

fsa = 25.6 ksi
fsa := min
1 ( d A) 3 c
, 0.6 fy
x := 3.9 in 1 2 b x =
2
Given
Es Ec.sub
As ds x
Substructure Design
294
Tensile force in the reinforcing steel due to service limit state moment.......................
Ts = kip
Ts :=
MyService1 xna ds 3
fs.actual = ksi
Ts fs.actual := As
LRFD 5.7.3.3.4 := "OK, crack control for longitudinal moment" if fs.actual fsa "NG, crack control for longitudinal moment, provide more reinforcement" otherwise LRFD 5.7.3.3.4 =
B7. Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement [LRFD 5.10.8.2]

Initial assumption for area of steel required Size of bar......................................
barst := "5" if LFtg < 48in bFtg < 48in hFtg < 48in "6" otherwise barst = "6"
)(
)(
Spacing of bar................................. Bar area.......................................... Bar diameter....................................
barspa.st := 12 in Abar = 0.44 in dia = 0.750 in

2
Maximum spacing of shrinkage and temperature reinforcement......................

spacingshrink.temp = 14.7 in
spacingshrink.temp := min
min( 2 dc + dia , 3in)
100 Abar
, 18 in
LRFD 5.7.10.8 := "OK, minimum shrinkage and temperature requirements" if barspa.st spacingshrink.temp "NG, minimum shrinkage and temperature requirements" otherwise LRFD 5.7.10.8 = "OK, minimum shrinkage and temperature requirements"
Substructure Design
295
B8. Mass Concrete Provisions

Volume to surface area ratio for footing....
RatioVS = 1.071 ft RatioVS := b Ftg hFtg LFtg
2 b Ftg LFtg + 2b Ftg + 2LFtg hFtg
Mass concrete provisions apply if the volume to surface area ratio exceeds 1 ft and any dimension exceeds 3 feet
SDG3.9 := "Use mass concrete provisions" if RatioVS > 1.0 ft b Ftg > 3ft hFtg > 3ft "Use regular concrete provisions" otherwise SDG3.9 = "Use mass concrete provisions"
Substructure Design
296
C. Shear Design Parameters [LRFD 5.13.3.6]

C1. Shear Design Parameters - One Way Shear
Distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of tension steel (use the top of the main transverse steel or bottom of the longitudinal steel)...................................
de = 2.656 ft
de := hFtg Pileembed cover pile ybar dia
Effective shear depth [LRFD 5.8.2.9]...... Using variables defined in this example,
dv = 2.39 ft
dv = maxval 0.9 de , 0.72 h
) )
dv := max 0.9 de , 0.72 hFtg Pileembed
C2. and Parameters [LRFD 5.8.3.4.2]

Tables are give in LRFD to determine from the longitudinal strain and crack spacing parameter, so these values need to be calculated.
Mu
Longitudinal strain for sections with no prestressing or transverse reinforcement...
x =
dv
+ 0.5 V u cot( ) Es As
b v = 4.5 ft dv = 2.39 ft
Substructure Design
297
Factor indicating ability of diagonally cracked concrete to transmit tension.. Angle of inclination for diagonal compressive stresses........................ Crack spacing parameter........................ Maximum aggregate size................... The variable sx is the lesser of dv or the maximum distance between layers of longitudinal reinforcement.............
(Note : Values of = 2 and = 45 deg cannot be assumed since footings are typically not transversely reinforced for shear.) 1.38 ag + 0.63 , 80 in
sxe = min sx
ag := 1.5 in
sx := dv
LRFD Table 5.8.3.4.2-2 presents values of and for sections without transverse reinforcement . LRFD C5.8.3.4.2 states that data given by the table may be used over a range of values. Linear interpolation may be used, but is not recommended for hand calculations.
The longitudinal strain and crack spacing parameter are calculated for the appropriate critical sections.
C3. One Way Shear - Y Critical Section

Factored pile loads contributing to transverse shear ....................................
VuT = 337 kip VuT := max Q u + Q u , Q u + Q u 3 2 5 0
Substructure Design
298
Distance between face of equivalent square column and face of pile.................

dyface =
dyface :=
Pilesize ( bFtg bCol.eff) + pile 2
edge
The location of the piles relative to the critical shear plane determines the amount of shear design. According to LRFD, if a portion of the pile lies inside the critical section, the pile load shall be uniformally distributed over the pile width, and the portion of the load outside the critical section shall be included in shear calculations for the critical section.
Transverseshear := "Full shear, piles are outside of the y-critical shear plane" if dyface dv "No shear, Y-critical shear plane is outside footing dimension" if dv yedge "Partial shear, piles intersect y-critical shear plane" if dyface < dv dv < yedge Transverseshear =
If the piles partially intersect the shear plane, the shear for the critical section can be linearly reduced by the following factor.
y =
y :=
1 if dyface dv 0 if dv yedge 1 dv dyface Pilesize if dyface < dv dv < yedge
Factored shear along transverse y-critical section..................................................

VuT = kip
VuT := y VuT
i := 50.9 deg VuT dv x := dv + 0.5 VuT cot i Es AsT 1.38 ag in + 0.63 , 80 in
( )
( 1000 )
x =

sxe = 19 in
sxe := min sx
Substructure Design
299
:= 50.9 deg

:= 1.52
The nominal shear resistance for footings with no prestressing or transverse reinforcing is the minimum of the following equations................................
V n = 0.0316 f'c b v dv V n = 0.25 f'c b v dv
or
b v := LFtg V c1 := 0.0316 fc.sub ksi b v dv V c2 := 0.25 fc.sub b v dv
and the correspondig shear values......

V c1 = 290.8 kip V c2 = 3549.7 kip
Nominal shear resistance.........................

V n = 290.8 kip
V n := min V c1 , V c2
Check the section has adequate shear capacity

LRFD 5.8.3.3 := "OK, footing depth for Y-critical section is adequate for 1-way shear" if V n VuT v
"NG, footing depth for Y-critical section is not adequate for 1-way shear" otherwise LRFD 5.8.3.3 =
C4. One Way Shear - X Critical Section

Factored pile loads contributing to longitudinal shear...................................
VuL = 578 kip VuL := max Q u + Q u + Q u , Q u + Q u + Q u 0 1 2 3 4 5
Distance between face of equivalent square column and face of pile...........................

dxface =
dxface :=
( LFtg bCol.eff)
2
Pilesize + pile edge 2
Substructure Design
300
The location of the piles relative to the critical shear plane determines the amount of shear design.
Longitudinal shear := "Full shear, piles are outside of the x-critical shear plane" if dxface dv "No shear, X-critical shear plane is outside footing dimension" if dv xedge "Partial shear, piles intersect x-critical shear plane" if dxface < dv dv < xedge Longitudinal shear =
If the piles partially intersect the shear plane, the shear affecting the critical section can be linearly reduced by the following factor....................................................
x =
x :=
1 if dxface dv 0 if dv xedge 1 dv dxface Pilesize if dxface < dv dv < xedge
Factored shear along longitudinal x-critical section..................................................

VuL = kip
VuL := x VuL
i := 32.3 deg VuL dv x := dv + 0.5 VuL cot i Es AsL , 80 in
( )
( 1000)
Longitudinal strain............................
x =
Crack width parameter.....................

sxe = 19 in
sxe := min sx
1.38 ag in + 0.63
:= 32.3 deg

:= 4.61
Substructure Design
301
The nominal shear resistance for footings with no prestressing or transverse reinforcing is the minimum of the following equations...............................................
V n = 0.25 f'c b v dv
V n = 0.0316 f'c b v dv
b v := b Ftg V c1 := 0.0316 fc.sub ksi b v dv V c2 := 0.25 fc.sub b v dv
and the correspondig shear values......

V c1 = 1411.2 kip V c2 = 5679.6 kip

V n = 1411.2 kip
V n := min V c1 , V c2
Check the section has adequate shear capacity

LRFD 5.8.3.3 := "OK, X-critical section footing depth is adequate for 1-way shear" if V n VuL v
"NG, X-critical section footing depth is NO GOOD for 1-way shear" otherwise LRFD 5.8.3.3 =
C5. Two Way Shear Design (Punching Shear)
Substructure Design
302
Critical section for 2-way shear [LRFD 5.13.3.6]...............................................

dv2 = 1.2 ft
dv2 := 0.5 dv
Maximum shear force for pile 2...............

Vupile = 250.1 kip
Vupile := Q max
Nominal shear resistance for 2-way action in sections without shear reinforcement....
0.063 + Vn =
0.126 c
( fc b o dv) 0.126 fc b o dv
Perimeter of critical section.....................

b o = 4.5 ft
b o := 2 pile edge + Pilesize
Ratio of long side to short side of the rectangle, which the concentrated load or reaction is transmitted
c := 1.0
V n := min 0.063 +
V n = 457.7 kip
0.126 c
( fc.sub ksi bo dv) , 0.126 fc.sub ksi b o dv
LRFD 5.13.3.6.3 :=
"OK, Footing depth for 2-way pile punching shear" if V n > "NG, Footing depth for 2-way pile punching shear" otherwise
Vupile v
LRFD 5.13.3.6.3 = "OK, Footing depth for 2-way pile punching shear"
Substructure Design
303
D. Design Summary
Footing properties Transverse dimension of footing........ Longitudinal dimension of footing....... Depth of footing............................... Bottom reinforcement (transverse)
b Ftg = 12 ft LFtg = 7.5 ft hFtg = 4 ft nybar = 8 ybar = "9" ybar spa = 11.8 in nxbar = 12 xbar = "6" xbarspa = 12.4 in
Number of bars............................... Selected bar size.............................. Approximate spacing........................
use 11.5" +/-spacing
Bottom reinforcement (longitudinal)
Number of bars............................... Selected bar size............................... Approximate spacing........................
use 12" +/-spacing
Temp and shrinkage (top and side)
Selected bar size............................... Spacing...........................................
barst = "6" barspa.st = 12 in
Defined Units
Substructure Design
304
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
End Bent Live Load Analysis

References
Reference:F:\HDRDesignExamples\Ex1_PCBeam\310PierFtg.mcd(R)
Description
This document provides the criteria for the end bent live load design. Since the piles are placed directly under the beams at the end bent, no positive or negative moment due to live load is introduced in the end bent cap, therefore, the maximum live load placement will try to maximize a beam reaction or pile load.
Page
306
Contents
A. Input Variables A1. Shear: Skewed Modification Factor [LRFD 4.6.2.2.3c]
A2. Maximum Live Load Reaction at End Bent - One HL-93 Vehicle
307 B. Maximum Axial Force B1. HL-93 Vehicle Placement for Maximum Axial Load
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
3.11 End Bent Live Load Analysis
305
A. Input Variables
Since each beam is directly over each pile, live load will not contribute to any moments or shears in the bent cap. For the pile design, the live load will not include dynamic amplification since the piles are considered to be in the ground. Reaction induced by HL-93 truck load...... Reaction induced by lane load.................. Impact factor........................................ The truck reaction (including impact and skew modification factors) is applied on the deck as two wheel-line loads..............
wheelline = 35.0 kip V truck( Support) = 64.4 kip V lane( Support) = 28.2 kip IM = 1.33
wheelline :=
V truck (Support) gv.Skew 2
laneload :=
V lane( Support) gv.Skew 10 ft
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
306
B. Maximum Axial Force

For design live load axial force in the end bent piles, the controlling number and position of design lanes need to be determined. This section shows a means of determining the controlling configuration of design lanes, along with the corresponding beam loads and pile axial forces.
B1. HL-93 Vehicle Placement for Maximum Axial Load

HL-93 vehicle, comprising of wheel line loads and lane loads, should be placed on the deck to maximize the axial force in the end bent piles. Design Lane Placements For this example, the lane placements should maximize the axial force in pile 3. Since a pile is placed directly under each beam, placing design lanes above beam 3 will induce the maximum axial force in pile 3.
Corresponding Beam Loads The live loads from the design lanes are transferred to the substructure through the beams. Utilizing the lever rule, the beam loads corresponding to the design lane configurations are calculated.
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
307
Beam 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Beam Loads 1 Lane 2 Lanes 0 0 27.6 51.5 104.5 111.7 27.6 87.9 0 15.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Corresponding Axial Force Since a pile is directly under each beam, the maximum axial force in pile 3 corresponds to the reaction in beam 3.
1 Lane 2 Lanes
Maximum Axial Force Axial Force (k) 104.5 111.7
The results show that two design lanes govern. The following beam loads, corresponding to the governing maximum axial force, will later be used in the limit state combinations to obtain the design values for the end bent piles.
UNFACTORED LIVE LOAD (axial) AT END BENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Defined Units
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
308
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
End Bent Design Loads
Reference
Reference:F:\HDRDesignExamples\Ex1_PCBeam\311EndBentLLs.mcd(R)
Description
This section provides the design parameters necessary for the for the substructure end bent design. The loads calculated in this file are only from the superstructure. Substructure self-weight, wind on substructure and uniform temperature on substructure can be generated by the substructure analysis model/program chosen by the user. For this design example, Larsa 2000 was chosen as the analysis model/program (http://www.larsausa.com)
Page
310
Contents
A. General Criteria A1. Bearing Design Movement/Strain A2. End Bent Dead Load Summary A3. End Bent Live Load Summary
312
B. Lateral Load Analysis B1. Center of Movement B2. Braking Force: BR [LRFD 3.6.4] B3. Temperature, Creep and Shrinkage Forces B4. Wind Pressure on Structure: WS B5. Wind Pressure on Vehicles [LRFD 3.8.1.3]
322
C. Design Limit States C1. Strength I Limit State C2. Strength III Limit State C3. Service I Limit State
Substructure Design
3.12 End Bent Design Loads
309
A. General Criteria
Strain due to temperature, creep and shrinkage...............................................
CST = 0.00047 (Note : See Sect. 2.10.B4 - Bearing Design Movement/Strain)
A2. End Bent Dead Load Summary

Unfactored beam reactions at the end bent for DC and DW loads
UNFACTORED BEAM REACTIONS AT END BENTS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A2. End Bent Live Load Summary

Unfactored beam reactions at the pier for LL loads corresponding to maximum axial force
UNFACTORED LIVE LOAD (axial) AT END BENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Substructure Design
310
A4. Center of Movement
By inspection, the center of movement will be the intermediate pier.

L0 := Lspan L0 = 90.0 ft
Substructure Design
311
B. Lateral Load Analysis

B1. Centrifugal Force: CE [LRFD 3.6.3]
LRFD 4.6.1.2.1 states that effects of curvature may be neglected on open cross-sections whose radius is such that the central angle subtended by each span is less than:
Number of Beams 2 3 or 4 5 or more
Angle for One Span 2o 3o 4o
Angle for Two or More Spans 3o 4o 5o

R := 3800 ft Lspan 1span := R 2span := Lbridge R
Horizontal curve data.............................. Angle due to one span.............................

1span = 1.4 deg
Angle due to all spans.............................

2span = 2.7 deg
Since the number of beams is greater than 5 and the angles are within LRFD requirements, the bridge can be analyzed as a straight structure and therefore, centrifigal force effects are not necessary.
B2. Braking Force: BR [LRFD 3.6.4]

The braking force should be taken as the greater of: 25% of axle weight for design truck / tandem 5% of design truck / tandem and lane The number of lanes for braking force calculations depends on future expectations of the bridge. For this example, the bridge is not expected to become one-directional in the future, and future widening is expected to occur to the outside. From this information, the number of lanes is
N lanes = 3
The multiple presence factor (LRFD Table 3.6.1.1.2-1) should be taken into account..
MPF = 0.85
MPF :=
1.2 if N lanes = 1 1.0 if N lanes = 2 0.85 if N lanes = 3 0.65 otherwise
Braking force as 25% of axle weight for design truck / tandem.............................

BRForce.1 := 25% ( 72 kip ) N lanes MPF
Substructure Design
312
Braking force as 5% of axle weight for design truck / tandem and lane.................
BRForce.2 := 5% 72 kip + wlane Lspan N lanes MPF
Governing braking force.........................

BRForce = 45.9 kip
BRForce := max BRForce.1 , BRForce.2
Distribution of Braking Forces to End Bent
The same bearing pads are provided at the pier and end bent to distribute the braking forces. The braking force transferred to the pier or end bents is a function of the bearing pad and pier column stiffnesses. For this example, (1) the pier column stiffnesses are ignored, (2) the deck is continuous over pier 2 and expansion joints are provided only at the end bents. Braking force at End Bent.......................
BREndbent = BRForce KEndbent
where.............................................
KEndbent =
N pads.endbent Kpad
(Npads.pier + N pads.endbent)Kpad
Simplifying and using variables defined in this example, pier stiffness can be calculated as.......
KEndbent = 0.25 N beams KEndbent := ( 1 + 2 + 1 ) N beams BREndbent := BRForce KEndbent
corresponding braking force..............

BREndbent = 11.5 kip
Since the bridge superstructure is very stiff in the longitudinal direction, the braking forces are assumed to be equally distributed to the beams under the respective roadway.
beams := 6 BREndbent beams
Braking force at end bent per beam..........

BREndbent = 1.9 kip
BREndbent :=
Substructure Design
313
Adjustments for Skew The braking force is transferred to the pier by the bearing pads. The braking forces need to be resolved along the axis of the bearing pads for design of the pier substructure. Braking force perpendicular (z-direction) to the skew...............................................
BRz.Endbent = 1.7 kip BRz.Endbent := BREndbent cos( Skew)
Braking force parallel (x-direction) to the skew....................................................

BRx.Endbent = 1.0 kip
BRx.Endbent := BREndbent sin( Skew)
Adjustments for Braking Force Loads Applied 6' above Deck The longitudinal moment induced by braking forces over a pier is resisted by the moment arm. Conservatively, assume the braking occurs over one span only, then the result is an uplift reaction on the downstation end bent or pier and a downward reaction at the upstation end bent or pier. In this example, the braking is assumed to occur in span 1 and the eccentricity of the downward load with the bearing and centerline of pier eccentricities is ignored.

M arm = 11.250 ft
M arm := 6ft + h
Braking force in end bent (y-direction), vertical..................................................

BRy.Endbent = 0.2 kip
BRy.Endbent :=
BREndbent M arm Lspan
Only the downward component of this force is considered. Typically, the vertical forces (uplift) are small and can be ignored.
Substructure Design
314
BRAKING FORCES AT END BENT

Beam BR Loads (kip) x y -1.0 -0.2 -1.0 -0.2 -1.0 -0.2 -1.0 -0.2 -1.0 -0.2 -1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 z 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B3. Creep, Shrinkage, and Temperature Forces

The forces transferred from the superstructure to the substructure due to temperature, creep, and shrinkage are influenced by the shear displacements in the bearing pad. In this example, only temperature and shrinkage effects are considered. Creep is ignored, since this example assumes the beams will creep towards their center and the composite deck will offer some restraint.
CST = 0.00047
Displacements at top of end bent due to temperature, creep, and shrinkage............

Endbent1 = 0.5 in
Endbent1 := L0 xdist CST 0
Shear force transferred through each bearing pad due to creep, shrinkage, and temperature...........................................
CSTEndbent = 10.50 kip
CSTEndbent :=
Gmax Apad Endbent1 hrt
This force needs to be resolved along the direction of the skew Shear force perpendicular (z-direction) to the end bent per beam.............................
CSTz.Endbent = 9.09 kip CSTz.Endbent := CSTEndbent cos( Skew)
Shear force parallel (x-direction) to the end bent per beam........................................

CSTx.Endbent = 5.25 kip
CSTx.Endbent := CSTEndbent sin( Skew)
Substructure Design
315
Summary of beam reactions at the end bent due to creep, shrinkage, and temperature
CREEP, SHRINKAGE, TEMPERATURE FORCES AT END BENT
Beam CR, SH, TU Loads (kip) x y z -5.3 0.0 9.1 -5.3 0.0 9.1 -5.3 0.0 9.1 -5.3 0.0 9.1 -5.3 0.0 9.1 -5.3 0.0 9.1 -5.3 0.0 9.1 -5.3 0.0 9.1 -5.3 0.0 9.1 -5.3 0.0 9.1 -5.3 0.0 9.1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B4. Wind Pressure on Structure: WS

The wind loads are applied to the superstructure and substructure. Loads from Superstructure [LRFD 3.8.1.2.2] The wind pressure on the superstructure consists of lateral (x-direction) and longitudinal (z-direction) components. x z For prestressed beam bridges, the following wind pressures are given in the LRFD...................................................
0 15 Windskew := 30 45 60
.050 .044 WindLRFD := .041 .033 .017
.000 .006
.012 ksf .016 .019
The wind pressures in LRFD should be increased by 20% for bridges located in Palm Beach, Broward, Dade, and Monroe counties (LRFD 2.4.1). For bridges over 75 feet high or with unusual structural features, the wind pressures must be submitted to FDOT for approval. This example assumes a South Florida location, so the 20% factor applies...........
z
0.000 0.007
0.060 0.053 WindFDOT = 0.049 0.040 0.020
0.014 ksf 0.019 0.023
Substructure Design
316
Composite section height.........................

h = 5.25 ft
Superstructure Height.............................
hSuper := h + 2.1667 ft
Height above ground that the wind pressure is applied...............................................

Z1 = 21.92 ft
Z1 := hCol hSurcharge + hEB + hSuper
The exposed superstructure area influences the wind forces that are transferred to the supporting substructure. Tributary areas are used to determine the exposed superstructure area. Exposed superstructure area at end bent...
ASuper = 333.8 ft
2
ASuper :=
Lspan 2
hSuper
Forces due to wind applied to the superstructure........................................
WS Super.Endbent := WindFDOT ASuper
z
0.0 2.4
20.0 17.6 WS Super.Endbent = 16.4 13.2 6.8
4.8 kip 6.4 7.6
A conservative approach is taken to minimize the analysis required. The maximum transverse and longitudinal forces are used in the following calculations.
FWS.x := WS Super.Endbent 0, 0
Maximum transverse force......................

FWS.x = 20 kip

FWS.z = 7.6 kip
FWS.z := WS Super.Endbent 4, 1
The forces due to wind need to be resolved along the direction of the skew. Force perpendicular (z-direction) to the end bent................................................
WS z.Endbent = 16.6 kip WS z.Endbent := FWS.z cos( Skew) FWS.x sin( Skew)
Substructure Design
317
Force parallel (x-direction) to the end bent

WS x.Endbent = 13.5 kip
WS x.Endbent := FWS.z sin( Skew) + FWS.x cos( Skew)
The force due to wind acts on the full superstructure. This force needs to be resolved into the reactions in each beam. The following table summarizes the beam reactions due to wind.
WIND ON STRUCTURE FORCES AT END BENT
WS Loads (kip) x y 1.2 0.0 1.2 0.0 1.2 0.0 1.2 0.0 1.2 0.0 1.2 0.0 1.2 0.0 1.2 0.0 1.2 0.0 1.2 0.0 1.2 0.0
Beam
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
z 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Loads from Substructure [LRFD 3.8.1.2.3] Wind pressure applied directly to the substructure..........................................
WindLRFD := 0.04 ksf
The wind pressures in LRFD should be increased by 20% for bridges located in Palm Beach, Broward, Dade, and Monroe counties [LRFD 2.4.1]. This example assumes a South Florida location, so the 20% factor applies...........
WindFDOT = 0.048 ksf
General equation for wind forces applied to the substructure.....................................

WS Force = WindPressure Exposed AreaSubstructure SkewAdjustment
)(
)(
The end bents are usually shielded from wind by a MSE wall or an embankment fill, so wind on the end bent substructure is ignored.
Substructure Design
318
B5. Wind Pressure on Vehicles [LRFD 3.8.1.3] 0 15 Skewwind := 30 45 60 .100 .088 WindLRFD := .082 .066 .034 kip .024 ft .032 .038
0 .012
The LRFD specifies that wind load should be applied to vehicles on the bridge..........
WindFDOT := 1.20 WindLRFD
z
0.000 0.014
0.120 0.106 WindFDOT = 0.098 0.079 0.041
kip 0.029 ft 0.038 0.046
Height above ground for wind pressure on vehicles.................................................

Z2 = 25.75 ft
Z2 := Z1 2.1667 ft + 6ft
The wind forces on vehicles are transmitted to the end bent using tributary lengths.......
LEndbent = 45 ft
LEndbent :=
Lspan 2
Forces due to wind on vehicles applied to the superstructure..................................
WLSuper.Endbent := WindFDOT LEndbent
z
0.0 0.6
5.4 4.8 WLSuper.Endbent = 4.4 3.6 1.8
1.3 kip 1.7 2.1
A conservative approach is taken to minimize the analysis required. The maximum transverse and longitudinal forces are used in the following calculations.
Substructure Design
319
Maximum transverse force......................

FWL.x = 5.4 kip
FWL.x := WLSuper.Endbent 0, 0

FWL.z = 2.1 kip
FWL.z := WLSuper.Endbent 4, 1
The forces due to wind need to be resolved along the direction of the skew. Force perpendicular (z-direction) to the endbent.................................................
WLz.Endbent = 4.48 kip
WLz.Endbent := FWL.z cos( Skew) FWL.x sin( Skew)
Force perpendicular (z-direction) to the endbent per beam...................................

WLz.Beam = 0.41 kip
WLz.Beam :=
WLz.Endbent N beams
Force parallel (x-direction) to the cap.......

WLx.Endbent = 3.65 kip
WLx.Endbent := FWL.z sin( Skew) + FWL.x cos( Skew)
Force parallel (x-direction) to the cap per beam.....................................................

WLx.Beam = 0.33 kip
WLx.Beam :=
WLx.Endbent N beams
Longitudinal Adjustments for Wind on Vehicles The longitudinal moment is resisted by the moment arm.
M arm = 11.250 ft
(Marm = h + 6 ft)
Vertical force in end bent due to wind pressure on vehicle.................................

WLy.Endbent = 0.56 kip
WLy.Endbent :=
WLz.Endbent M arm Lspan
For this design example, this component of the load is ignored.
Substructure Design
320
Transverse Adjustments for Wind on Vehicles Using the principles of the lever rule for transverse distribution of live load on beams, the wind on live can be distributed similarly. It assumes that the wind acting on the live load will cause the vehicle to tilt over. Using the lever rule, the tilting effect of the vehicle is resisted by up and down reactions on the beams assuming the deck to act as a simple span between beams. Conservatively, assume all beams that can see live load can develop this load since the placement of the vehicle(s) and number of vehicles within the deck is constantly changing.

M arm = 11.250 ft
Vertical reaction on pier from transverse wind pressure on vehicles.......................

WLy.Endbent = 5.13 kip
WLy.Endbent :=
WLx.Endbent M arm BeamSpacing
Since this load can occur at any beam location, apply this load to all beams
WIND ON LIVE LOAD FORCES AT END BENT
Beam WL Loads (kip) x y 0.3 0.0 0.3 5.1 0.3 -5.1 0.3 0.0 0.3 0.0 0.3 0.0 0.3 0.0 0.3 0.0 0.3 0.0 0.3 0.0 0.3 0.0 z 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Substructure Design
321
C. Design Limit States

The design loads for strength I, strength III, strength V, and service I limit states are summarized in this section. These reactions are from the superstructure only, acting on the substructure. In the analysis model, such as a GTStrudl, Sap2000, Strudl, Larsa 2000, etc, include the following loads: DC: self-weight of the substructure, include end bent cap and backwall. TU: a temperature increase and fall on the pier substructure utilizing the following parameters: coefficient of expansion t = 6 10 6 temperature change
1 F
Note that in our model, the loads applied at the top of the cap from the beams are applied to rigid links that transfer the lateral loads as a lateral load and moment at the centroid of the end bent cap. This is consistent with substructure design programs like LEAP's RCPier. For the end bent, assuming the cap to be supported on pin supports at every pile location is an acceptable modeling decision.
Substructure Design
322
WS: Wind on the substructure should be applied directly to the analysis model. For the end bent surrounded by MSE wall, the wind loads on substructure are non-existant since the substructure can be considered shielded by the wall. All applied loads in the substructure analysis model should be multiplied by the appropriate load factor values and combined with the limit state loads calculated in this file for the final results.
C1. Strength I Limit State Loads

Strength I Limit State Beam Loads (kip) Beam # X Y 1 -4.3 -123.2 2 -4.3 -206.6 3 -4.3 -311.9 4 -4.3 -270.3 5 -4.3 -142.9 6 -4.3 -116.0 7 -2.6 -116.0 8 -2.6 -116.0 9 -2.6 -116.0 10 -2.6 -116.0 11 -2.6 -122.8
Z 7.4 7.4 7.4 7.4 7.4 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
C2. Strength III Limit State Loads

Strength3 = 1.25 DC + 1.5 DW + 1.4WS + 0.5 ( TU + CR + SH)
Strength III Limit State Loads (kip) Beam # X Y 1 -0.9 -122.8 2 -0.9 -116.0 3 -0.9 -116.0 4 -0.9 -116.0 5 -0.9 -116.0 6 -0.9 -116.0 7 -0.9 -116.0 8 -0.9 -116.0 9 -0.9 -116.0 10 -0.9 -116.0 11 -0.9 -122.8
Z 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.7
Substructure Design
323
B3. Strength V Limit State

Strength V Limit State Loads (kip) Beam # X Y 1 -3.1 -123.1 2 -3.1 -180.7 3 -3.1 -272.3 4 -3.1 -235.0 5 -3.1 -136.7 6 -3.1 -116.0 7 -1.8 -116.0 8 -1.8 -116.0 9 -1.8 -116.0 10 -1.8 -116.0 11 -1.8 -122.8
Z 7.8 7.8 7.8 7.8 7.8 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6
C3. Service I Limit State Loads

Service1 = 1.0 DC + 1.0 DW + 1.0 LL + 1.0 BR + 0.3WS + 1.0 WL + 1.0 ( TU + CR + SH)
Service I Limit State Beam Loads (kip) Beam # X Y Z 1 -5.5 -97.4 11.6 2 -5.5 -138.5 11.6 3 -5.5 -208.9 11.6 4 -5.5 -180.0 11.6 5 -5.5 -107.2 11.6 6 -5.5 -91.9 10.0 7 -4.5 -91.9 10.0 8 -4.5 -91.9 10.0 9 -4.5 -91.9 10.0 10 -4.5 -91.9 10.0 11 -4.5 -97.2 10.0
Substructure Design
324
From the results of the analysis, the governing moments for the design of the end bent cap and the corresponding service moments were as follows:
M Strength1.Negative := 32.9 ft kip M Strength1.Positive := 10.3 ft kip M Service1.Negative := 28.9 ft kip M Service1.Positive := 8.4 ft kip
The maximum pile reaction was pile #3, the governing loads were as follows:
PStrength1 := 336.2 kip PService1 := 228.4 kip
For purposes of this design example, these values are given for references purposes. The method of obtaining the design values has been shown and the user will then utilize design equations and methodologies similar to Section 3.4 Pier Cap Design to design the end bent cap. For the piles, the approach is similar to Section 3.9 Pier Pile Vertical Load design. There are no moments transfered from the end bent cap to the piles since for a 1 foot embedment of the pile into the cap, the connection is considered to be a pin connection.
Defined Units
Substructure Design
325
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
End Bent Cap Design
Reference
Description
The actual design of the end bent cap for the governing moments and shears has not been performed in this design example. For a similar design approach, refer to Section 3.4 Pier Cap Design.
Substructure Design
3.13 End Bent Cap Design
326
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
End Bent Pile Vertical Load Design
Reference
Description
The actual design of the end bent piles for the vertical loads has not been performed in this design example. For a similar design approach, refer to Section 3.9 Pier Pile Vertical Load Design.
Substructure Design
3.14 End Bent Pile Vertical Load Design
327
SUBSTRUCTURE DESIGN
End Bent Backwall Design
Reference
Reference:F:\HDRDesignExamples\Ex1_PCBeam\312EndBentLds.mcd(R)
Description
This section provides the design for the end bent backwall.
Page
329
Contents
A. General Criteria A1. End Bent Geometry A2. Soil Parameters
331
B. Back wall design B1. Tie-strap design B2. Back wall design
343
C. Summary of Reinforcement Provided
Substructure Design
3.15 End Bent Backwall Design
328
A. General Criteria
A1. End Bent Design Parameters
Depth of end bent cap................................. Width of end bent cap................................. Length of end bent cap................................ Height of back wall..................................... Backwall design width................................. Thickness of back wall................................ Approach slab thickness.............................. Approach slab length................................... Concrete cover........................................... Resistance Factor for flexure and tension...... Resistance Factor for shear and torsion......... Load factor for EH and ES (LRFD 3.4.1)...... Load factor for dead load............................
hEB = 2.5 ft b EB = 3.5 ft LEB = 101.614 ft hBW = 5 ft LBW = 1 ft t BW = 1 ft t ApprSlab = 13.5 in LApprSlab = 34.75 ft cover sub = 3 in = 0.9 v = 0.9 p := 1.5 DC := 1.25
A2. Soil Parameters

Values for the active lateral earth pressure, ka , [LRFD 3.11.5.3, 3.11.5.6] may be taken as:
ka =
sin sin( )
2
sin + ' f
)
2
where
sin( ' f + ) sin(' f ) = 1 + sin( ) sin( + )
Substructure Design
329
defining the following:

soil = 115 pcf := 90 deg ' f := 29 deg := 29 deg := 0 deg
Unit weight of soil angle of the end bent back face of the wall to the horizontal effective angle of internal friction as per LRFD Table 3.11.5.3-1 friction angle between fill and wall given by LRFD Table 3.11.5.3-1 angle of fill to the horizontal
(Note : based on concrete on clean fine to medium sand)
therefore
sin(' f + ) sin( ' f ) := 1 + sin( ) sin( + )

= 2.841
and
ka :=
sin( ) sin( )
2
sin + ' f
)
2
ka = 0.371
The horizontal earth pressure due to live load, p , [LRFD 3.11.6.4] may be approximated as follows:
p = k soil heq soil = 115 pcf k := ka heq := 4.0 ft
where
Unit weight of soil Coefficient of lateral earth pressure equivalent height of soil for vehicular loading, LRFD Table 3.11.6.4-1 or 3.11.6.4-2
therefore
p := k soil heq p = 0.171 ksf
Substructure Design
330
B. Back wall design

B1. Tie-strap design
The following is a free body diagram of the loads acting on the end bent and the proposed resisting moment. The resisting moment, for this design example, is accomplished by specifying tie-back straps attached to the backwall which are the same that are used in the MSE walls. Generally, the factored and unfactored forces per linear foot of wall that the straps need to widthstand are specified. Loads
Calculate moment at top of pile due to earth pressure per foot of backwall
Fearth := ka soil hBW + hEB 2 hBW + hEB 3 Pileembed
Lateral force....................................
Fearth = 1.20 ft yearth = 1.50 ft kip
Lateral force moment arm.................
yearth :=
Moment at top of pile.......................

M earth = 1.80 kip ft ft
M earth := Fearth yearth
Substructure Design
331
Calculate moment at top of pile due to live load surcharge per foot of backwall Lateral force....................................
Fsurcharge = 1.28 ft ysurcharge = 2.75 ft kip Fsurcharge := p hBW + hEB ysurcharge := hBW + hEB 2 Pileembed
Lateral force moment arm.................

M surcharge = 3.52 kip ft ft
M surcharge := Fsurcharge ysurcharge
Calculate moment at top of pile due to approach slab per foot of backwall Vertical force...................................
kip PAS = 1.95 ft PAS := conc
t ApprSlab LApprSlab 3
(Note : assume 1/3 of weight is seen at back wall)
Vertical force moment arm...............

eAS = 1.25 ft
eAS :=
tBW b EB 2

M AS = 2.44 kip ft ft
M AS := PAS eAS
Calculate moment at top of pile due to back wall per foot of backwall Vertical force...................................
PBW = 0.75 ft eBW = 1.25 ft kip PBW := conc hBW tBW
Vertical force moment arm................
eBW := eAS
Moment at top of pile........................

M BW = 0.94 kip ft ft
M BW := PBW eBW
Calculate moment at top of pile due to end bent cap per foot of backwall Vertical force...................................
PCap = 1.31 ft eCap = 0.00 ft kip PCap := conc hEB b EB
eCap := 0 ft

M Cap = 0.00 kip ft ft
M Cap := PCap eCap
Substructure Design
332
Calculate moment at top of pile due to maximum Strength I limit state reaction (pile #3) per foot of backwall. To get an equivalent load per foot of backwall, the beam reaction is divided by the beam spacing. Strength Vertical force...................................
kip PStr1 = 38.99 ft 1 PStr1 := 311.9 kip BeamSpacing

ePy = 0.17 ft
ePy :=
b EB 2
tBW K

M P.Str1 = 6.50 kip ft ft
M P.Str1 := PStr1 ePy
Lateral force...................................
kip FStr1 = 0.93 ft
1 FStr1 := 7.4 kip BeamSpacing
Strength I Limit State Beam Loads (kip) Beam # X Y 1 -4.3 -123.2 2 -4.3 -206.6 3 -4.3 -311.9 4 -4.3 -270.3 5 -4.3 -142.9 6 -4.3 -116.0 7 -2.6 -116.0 8 -2.6 -116.0 9 -2.6 -116.0 10 -2.6 -116.0 11 -2.6 -122.8
Z 7.4 7.4 7.4 7.4 7.4 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5

eFy = 1.83 ft
eFy := hEB Pileembed + 4 in
(Note : Use 4" pedestal height).

M F.Str1 = 1.70 kip ft ft
M F.Str1 := FStr1 eFy
Service Vertical force...................................

kip PSrv1 = 26.11 ft 1 PSrv1 := 208.9 kip BeamSpacing
Vertical force moment arm

ePy = 0.17 ft

M P.Srv1 = 4.35 kip ft ft
M P.Srv1 := PSrv1 ePy
Lateral force...................................
kip FSrv1 = 1.45 ft
1 FSrv1 := 11.6 kip BeamSpacing
Service I Limit State Beam Loads (kip) Beam # X Y Z 1 -5.5 -97.4 11.6 2 -5.5 -138.5 11.6 3 -5.5 -208.9 11.6 4 -5.5 -180.0 11.6 5 -5.5 -107.2 11.6 6 -5.5 -91.9 10.0 7 -4.5 -91.9 10.0 8 -4.5 -91.9 10.0 9 -4.5 -91.9 10.0 10 -4.5 -91.9 10.0 11 -4.5 -97.2 10.0

eFy = 1.83 ft

M F.Srv1 = 2.66 kip ft ft
M F.Srv1 := FSrv1 eFy
Substructure Design
333
Resisting Moments
(Note : Jacking loads which can cause a resultant moment MA in the opposite direction were not considered in this design example)
Calculate the Strength I values per foot of backwall and eccentricity to optimize the force in the strap: Moment.................................................
M strength1 = 11.9 kip ft ft M strength1 := M P.Str1 + MF.Str1 + 1.25 MAS + M BW + MCap ... + 1.50 M earth + M surcharge
Force....................................................
Fstrength1 = 4.6 ft kip
Fstrength1 := FStr1 + 1.50 Fearth + Fsurcharge
Eccentricity...........................................
ystr1 = 2.57 ft
M strength1 ystr1 := Fstrength1
(Note : This dimension is from top of pile)
Calculate the Service I values per foot of backwall and eccentricity to optimize the force in the strap: Moment.................................................
M service1 = 8.9 kip ft ft M service1 := MP.Srv1 + MF.Srv1 + 1.00 M AS + MBW + MCap ... + 1.00 Mearth + Msurcharge
Force....................................................
Fservice1 = 3.9 ft kip
Fservice1 := FSrv1 + 1.00 Fearth + Fsurcharge
Eccentricity...........................................
ysrv1 = 2.28 ft
Mservice1 ysrv1 := Fservice1
(Note : This dimension is from top of pile)
Substructure Design
334
Calculate Design Forces for Tie-Straps per foot of back wall for moment requirement Note: For the tie strap, only 1 strap is assumed in the calculations. The geotechnical engineer should be consulted to determine the length of the strap required. If additional straps are required, place the resultant of the straps about the current design location. Distance between tie-strap and top of pile.................................................
ystrap = 2.5 ft ystrap := 2.5 ft (Note : Options ystr1 2.572 = ft This ysrv1 2.277 dimension is from top of pile)
Factored design force for tie-strap......

Fr strapM = 4.78 kip ft
Fr strapM :=
M strength1 ystrap M service1 ystrap
Service design force for tie-strap.......

kip FstrapM = 3.58 ft
FstrapM :=
Calculate Design Forces for Tie-Straps per foot of back wall for lateral load requirement Factored design force for tie-strap......
Fr strapF = 4.64 kip ft FstrapF := Fservice1 Fr strapF := Fstrength1

FstrapF = 3.93 ft kip
Governing design forces for Tie-Straps Factored design force for tie-strap......
Fr strap = 4.78 kip ft Fstrap := max FstrapM , FstrapF Fr strap := max Fr strapM , Fr strapF

Fstrap = 3.93 ft kip
Substructure Design
335
B2. Back wall design

Calculate Design Moments for Backwall per foot of back wall
Passive Earth Pressure For purposes of this design example, this condition will assume that if the lateral forces are applied in the direction towards the back wall, the passive earth resistance will be activated. To minimize calculations, it is assumed that the passive resistance mobilized will be equal to the lateral applied loads. With this assumption, the moment for the back wall design can be calculated by taking the applied lateral loads at the location of the resultant passive force and multiplying by the arm to the design moment location of the back wall. The engineer should use judgement in figuring out the way in which these loads can be resisted. The approach slab can offer some resistance as well as the piles. Conservatively are assumed to be resisted only by the soil behind the wall.
2 yBpassive := h + hBW hEB 3 EB
Distance to pt. B..............................

yBpassive = 2.50 ft
Factored design force for back wall....

Mrpassive = 2.31 kip ft ft
Mrpassive := FStr1 yBpassive
Service design force for back wall....

M passive = 3.63 kip ft ft
M passive := FSrv1 yBpassive
(Note : Active earth pressure and surcharge loads are not included since they are not reversible).
Check to see if there is sufficient force in the passive pressure: Passive pressure.............................. where the coefficient of lateral earth pressure......................
p p = kp soil z + 2 c kp kp := 6 (Note : LRFD Figure 3.11.5.4-1 for = 90 deg and angle of internal friction = 29 deg.)
Substructure Design
336
depth below surface of soil...
z := hEB + hBW z = 7.5 ft c := 0 ksf
(Note : Use full depth of endbent wall and cap)
soil cohesion........................ passive pressure activated.....
(Note : Assuming fine sand backfill)
p p := kp soil z + 2 c kp p p = 5.175 ksf
Service passive pressure force per foot of back wall.............................

kip Fpassive = 19.4 ft
Fpassive :=
1 p z 2 p
Factored passive pressure force per foot of back wall.............................

Fr passive = 29.1 kip ft kip
1 Fr passive := p 2 p p z
where p = 1.5
By inspection, the assumption that the soil has sufficient capacity in passive earth pressure is valid since the factored resistance, Fr passive = 29.1 , is greater than the factored design force, FStr1 = 0.9 . ft ft Similarly, the service resistance, Fpassive = 19.4 . Therefore, assumption is valid.
kip ft kip
, is greater than the service design force, FSrv1 = 1.5
kip ft
Tie-straps Distance to pt. B..............................

yBstrap = 1.00 ft yBstrap := ystrap + Pileembed hEB
Factored design force for back wall....

Mrstrap = 4.78 kip ft ft
Mrstrap := Fr strap yBstrap
Service design force for back wall....

M strap = 3.93 kip ft ft
M strap := Fstrap yBstrap
Back wall design moments: Strength..........................................

MrBW = 4.8 ft kip MrBW := max Mrpassive , Mrstrap LBW
Service...........................................
M BW = 3.9 ft kip
M BW := max M passive , M strap LBW
Substructure Design
337
Factored resistance
M r = Mn M r = As fy ds
2 0.85 fc.sub b
1
As fy
where
M r := MrBW b := LBW
Initial assumption for area of steel required Size of bar.......................... Proposed bar spacing...........
bar := "5" spacing := 12 in Abar = 0.310 in dia = 0.625 in
2
(Note : #5 @ 12" spacing reinforcement requirement is governed by minimum steel and not moment capacity.)
Bar area.............................. Bar diameter........................ Area of steel provided per foot of back wall
As = 0.31 in
2
Distance from extreme compressive... fiber to centroid of reinforcing steel

ds = 7.7 in
dia ds := t BW cover sub.earth 2
Solve the quadratic equation for the area of steel required

Given M r = As fy ds
2 0.85 fc.sub b
1
As fy
As.reqd := Find As As.reqd = 0.16 in

2
( )
The area of steel provided, As = 0.31 in , should be greater than the area of steel required, As.reqd = 0.16 in . If not, decrease the spacing of the reinforcement. Once As is greater than As.reqd , the proposed reinforcing is adequate for the design moments.
M r.prov := As fy ds

M r.prov = 10.5 ft kip
2 0.85 fc.sub b
1
As fy
Substructure Design
338
Crack Control by Distribution Reinforcement [LRFD 5.7.3.4] Concrete is subjected to cracking. Limiting the width of expected cracks under service conditions increases the longevity of the structure. Potential cracks can be minimized through proper placement of the reinforcement. The check for crack control requires that the actual stress in the reinforcement should not exceed the service limit state stress (LRFD 5.7.3.4). The stress equations emphasize bar spacing rather than crack widths. Stress in the mild steel reinforcement at the service limit state
fsa = z
1
0.6 fy
( dcA) 3
Crack width parameter............................
Environmentsuper = "Slightly" aggressive environment
The environmental classifications for Florida designs do not match the classifications to select the crack width parameter. For this example, a "Slightly" or "Moderately" aggressive environment corresponds to "moderate exposure" and an "Extremely" aggressive environment corresponds to "severe exposure"............ Distance from extreme tension fiber to center of closest bar (concrete cover need not exceed 2 in.).............................
dc = 2.313 in
z := 170
kip in
dia dc := min tBW ds , 2 in + 2
Number of bars per design width of back wall......................................................

nbar = 1
b nbar := spacing
Effective tension area of concrete. surrounding the flexural tension reinforcement........................................

A = 55.5 in
2
A :=
( b ) 2 dc nbar
)
z

fsa = 33.7 ksi
fsa := min
1 ( d A) 3 c
, 0.6 fy
Substructure Design
339
x := 1.5 in Given 1 2 b x =
2
Es Ec.sub
As ds x
Tensile force in the reinforcing steel due to service limit state moment...................
Ts = 6.574 kip
Ts :=
MBW xna ds 3
Actual stress in the reinforcing steel due to service limit state moment...................
Ts fs.actual := As
LRFD 5.7.3.3.4 := "OK, crack control is satisfied" if fs.actual fsa "NG, increase the reinforcement provided" otherwise LRFD 5.7.3.3.4 = "OK, crack control is satisfied"
Maximum Reinforcement The maximum reinforcement requirements ensure the section has sufficient ductility and is not overreinforced. Area of steel provided
As = 0.31 in
2

1 = 0.775
1 := max0.85 0.05
fc.sub 4000 psi , 0.65 1000 psi

c = 0.4 in
c :=
Effective depth from extreme compression fiber to centroid of the tensile reinforcement
de = Aps fps dp + As fy ds Aps fps + As fy
Substructure Design
340
for a non-prestressed section.............

de = 7.7 in c de
de := ds
The
LRFD 5.7.3.3.1 :=
"OK, maximum reinforcement requirements are satisfied" if
c de
0.42
"NG, section is over-reinforced, see LRFD equation C5.7.3.3.1-1" otherwise LRFD 5.7.3.3.1 = "OK, maximum reinforcement requirements are satisfied"
Minimum Reinforcement The minimum reinforcement requirements ensure the moment capacity provided is at least 1.2 times greater than the cracking moment.
fr := 0.24 fc.sub ksi
Modulus of Rupture................................
fr = 562.8 psi
Section modulus.....................................
S = 288.0 in
3
S :=
b t BW 6
Cracking moment...................................
M cr = 13.5 kip ft
M cr := fr S

Check that the capacity provided, Mr.prov = 10.5 ft kip , exceeds minimum requirements, M r.reqd = 6.4 ft kip .
LRFD 5.7.3.3.2 := "OK, minimum reinforcement for moment is satisfied" if M r.prov Mr.reqd "NG, reinforcement for moment is less than minimum" otherwise LRFD 5.7.3.3.2 = "OK, minimum reinforcement for moment is satisfied"
Substructure Design
341
Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement [LRFD 5.10.8.2] Size of bar ( "4" "5" "6" "7" ) Shrinkage reinforcement provided............
barst := "5" barspa.st := 12 in
2
Bar area.......................................... Bar diameter.................................... Gross area of section..............................

Ag = 144.0 in
2
Abar = 0.31 in dia = 0.625 in
Ag := tBW LBW
Minimum area of shrinkage and temperature reinforcement......................

AST = 0.26 in
2
AST :=
0.11 ksi Ag fy

spacingST.reqd = 14.1 in
spacingST.reqd := min
b
AST Abar
, 3 tBW , 18 in
LRFD 5.7.10.8 := "OK, minimum shrinkage and temperature requirements" if barspa.st spacingST.reqd "NG, minimum shrinkage and temperature requirements" otherwise LRFD 5.7.10.8 = "OK, minimum shrinkage and temperature requirements"
Substructure Design
342
C. Summary of Reinforcement Provided

Moment reinforcement (each face) Bar size............. Bar spacing.......
bar = "5" spacing = 12 in
Temperature and Shrinkage Bar size............. Bar spacing........

barshrink.temp = "5" barspa.st = 12 in
Tie-straps Location of strap from bottom of back wall......... Factored design force................ Service design force.................
yBstrap = 1 ft kip ft
Fr strap = 4.78
kip Fstrap = 3.93 ft
Defined Units
Substructure Design
343
Substructure Design
344

Precast Concrete Beam Design Example LRFD 2002

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Precast Concrete Beam Design Example LRFD 2002

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LRFD Design Example #1:

Prestressed Precast Concrete Beam Bridge Design

Click here for Table of Contents

LRFD DESIGN EXAMPLE: PRESTRESSED PRECAST CONCRETE BEAM BRIDGE DESIGN

(similar to Section 3.4) (similar to Section 3.9)

LRFD Design Example

About this Design Example

1.01 About this Design Example

Definitions for some common structural engineering units:

kN 1000 newton psf psi lbf ft

1.01 About this Design Example

Environment...................... The superstructure is classified as slightly aggressive.

Reinforcing Steel.............. ASTM A615, Grade 60 Concrete Cover................. Superstructure

Distribution Values........... Item

1.02 General Notes

1.03 Design Parameters

A1. Bridge Geometry

1.03 Design Parameters

Overall bridge length............. Bridge design span length......

Lbridge 180 ft Lspan := 90 ft

1.03 Design Parameters

Superstructure Beam Type

Overhang := 4ft + 6.5in hbuildup := 1in t diap := 9 in

A2. Number of Lanes

1.03 Design Parameters

A3. Concrete, Reinforcing and Prestressing Steel Properties

1.03 Design Parameters

B1. Dynamic Load Allowance [LRFD 3.6.2]

B2. Resistance Factors [LRFD 5.5.4.2]

:= 0.9 ' := 1.00 v := 0.90

B3. Limit States [LRFD 1.3.2]

Use One of These at a Time

1.00 1.00 1.00

1.00 1.00 1.00

0.50/1.20 0.50/1.20 0.50/1.20

yTG yTG yTG

ySE ySE ySE

1.35 yEQ 0.50 1.00

1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00

1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00

Table 3.4.1-2 - Load factors for permanent loads, yp

1.03 Design Parameters

Concrete cover for substructure not in contact with water...........................

4 in if Environmentsub = "Extremely" 3 in otherwise

Concrete cover for substructure in contact with water..................................

4.5 in if Environmentsub = "Extremely" 4 in otherwise

Minimum 28-day compressive strength of concrete components.........................

1.03 Design Parameters

C2. Chapter 2 - Loads and Load Factors

Weight of sacrificial milling surface, using t mill = 0 in.......

mill := t mill conc

(Note : See Sect. C3 [SDG 4.2] for calculation of t mill ).

Miscellaneous Loads [SDG 2.5]

1.03 Design Parameters

Weight of traffic railing barrier................................. Weight of traffic railing median barrier.................................

wbarrier := 421 plf

wmedian.bar := 486 plf soil := 115 pcf

Weight of compacted soil...... Weight of stay-in-place metal forms..................................

Maximum number of beams in a span..............................

K := if N beams > 10 , 10 , N beams

BeamSpacing 3 (10 K) 2 + 39 + ( 3 K 8 ) ft 1.4

Lspan Lspan Lspan C2 := 2.2 0.335 + 0.0279 0.000793 10 ft 10 ft 10 ft

Dead load of barriers applied to the exterior beams............

Dead load of barriers applied to the interior beams.............